PRODUCT AND ACCESSORY CATALOG

Transcription

1 PRODUCT AND ACCESSORY CATALOG

2

3 ELITE SERIES PREMIUM SERIES CONTRACTOR SERIES

4

5 GARAGE DOOR OPENERS TABLE OF CONTENTS Why LiftMaster... G3 LiftMaster Garage Door Openers... G5 Comparison Chart... G6 Elite Series... G DC Battery Backup Capable Wall Mount... G W DC Battery Backup Belt Drive Wi-Fi... G W 3/4 HP AC Chain Drive Wi-Fi... G W 3/4 HP AC Belt Drive Wi-Fi... G13 Premium Series... G DC Battery Backup Capable Chain Drive... G /2 HP AC Belt Drive... G /2 HP AC Screw Drive... G /2 HP AC Chain Drive... G19 Contractor Series... G /2 HP AC Chain Drive... G /2 HP AC Belt Drive... G /2 HP AC Chain Drive... G24 Rails for Operators... G25 MODEL NUMBER LOGIC CHART 1st Digit = Generation 2nd Digit = Series 3rd Digit = Drive 4th Digit = Motor 5th Digit = Feature 8 = Security+ 2.0 /MyQ 5 = Elite 3 = Premium 1 = Contractor 0 = Contractor/Square 8 = I-Beam Chain, 2-Speed Sprocket Chain 6 = Chain 5 = Belt 4 = Screw 0 = Direct 7 = 3/4 HP AC 5 = 1/2 HP AC 0 = DC W = Wi-Fi Example: 8550W = 8 (Security+ 2.0/MyQ) + 5 (Elite Series) + 5 (Belt Drive) + 0 (DC Motor) + W (Wi-Fi) All LiftMaster Garage Door Openers follow this logic (except for model 3240). Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance

6 GARAGE DOOR OPENERS THE LEADER IN ACCESS SOLUTIONS

7 WHY LIFTMASTER GARAGE DOOR OPENERS For over 45 years, LiftMaster has been exceeding expectations by providing peace of mind through expert service and innovative solutions. This catalog gives you access to our entire product and accessory lines including our newest garage door opener models with built-in Wi-Fi. The latest advances like our MyQ Technology, Security+ 2.0, Battery Backup and our specially designed P3 Motors allow our products to best serve specifi c needs while staying safe and connected at all times. LiftMaster provides products and access solutions for homes and businesses worldwide. We are committed to providing quality products, innovative designs and comprehensive services which go beyond our Customers expectations. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G3

8 GARAGE DOOR OPENERS PEACE OF MIND FROM ANYWHERE Apple and ipad are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

9 LIFTMASTER GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LiftMaster Garage Door Openers are engineered with advanced safety features and the latest technology, making each one a reliable solution that s sure to fit the needs of any home. We guarantee the highest level of performance in our garage door openers by focusing on four unique features within our product line. BATTERY BACKUP GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LiftMaster has a patented system to ensure that your garage door opener continues to operate during power outages. CONNECTIVITY LiftMaster Garage Door Openers help you stay connected to your home while you re away with your smartphone, tablet or computer, giving you greater control, information and access. P3 MOTORS LiftMaster designs our own purpose-built motors to meet the exact requirements needed to move the heaviest moving object in your home. SAFETY AND SECURITY LiftMaster Garage Door Openers have security features designed to help safeguard your home, giving you greater peace of mind. Our line of garage door openers provides a variety of solutions to serve specific household needs while never compromising safety and security to ensure peace of mind. G5

10 COMPARISON CHART GARAGE DOOR OPENERS GARAGE DOOR OPENERS Series Elite Elite Elite Elite Premium Model Number W 8587W 8557W 8360 Description DC Battery Backup Capable Wall Mount DC Battery Backup Belt Drive Wi-Fi 3/4 HP AC Chain Drive Wi-Fi 3/4 HP AC Belt Drive Wi-Fi Built-In Wi-Fi* Yes Yes Yes DC Battery Backup Capable Chain Drive MyQ Technology* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Security+ 2.0 * Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Battery Backup* Capable Yes Capable Electronic Limit/ Auto-Force* Tri-Band Radio (310, 315 and 390 MHz) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Timer-to-Close Yes Yes Yes Yes Backwards Compatible Remote (MAX) LCD Programming Menu Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Soft Start/Stop Yes Yes Yes Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) Yes Yes Motion Detection Light Activation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Light/Lock Functions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced Standby Power (Approx.1 Watt) Yes Yes Yes Yes Maintenance Alert System Control Panel Remote Control Additional Features Lighting 888LM MyQ Control Panel 893MAX 3-Button Remote Control Remote Light, Power Deadbolt, 475LM Battery (Sold Separately) 2 x 100 watts, Remote Fixture Yes Yes Yes Yes 880LM Smart Control Panel 893MAX 3-Button Remote Control 485LM Battery 2 x 100 watts, Side to Side 880LM Smart Control Panel 893MAX 3-Button Remote Control I-Beam Rail System, 2-Speed Sprocket, Sensor Extension Brackets, Chassis Support Bracket 2 x 100 watts, Side to Side 880LM Smart Control Panel 893MAX 3-Button Remote Control 2 x 100 watts, Side to Side 886LM Motion-Detecting Control Panel 893LM 3-Button Remote Control 485LM Battery (Sold Separately) 2 x 100 watts, Front to Back Motor Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Parts Warranty 5-Year 5-Year 5-Year 5-Year 1-Year Other Warranty 1-Year Battery (Optional) Lifetime Belt, 1-Year Battery Lifetime Belt Previous Model Year Battery (Optional) *Key Features Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G6 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

11 Premium Premium Premium Contractor Contractor Contractor Series Model Number 1/2 HP AC Belt Drive 1/2 HP AC Screw Drive 1/2 HP AC Chain Drive 1/2 HP AC Chain Drive 1/2 HP AC Belt Drive 1/2 HP AC Chain Drive Description Built-In Wi-Fi * Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MyQ Technology* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Security+ 2.0 * Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Battery Backup* Electronic Limit/ Auto-Force* Tri-Band Radio (310, 315 and 390 MHz) Timer-to-Close Backwards Compatible Remote (MAX) LCD Programming Menu Soft Start/Stop Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) GARAGE DOOR OPENERS Motion Detection Light Activation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Light/Lock Functions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced Standby Power (Approx.1 Watt) Yes Yes Yes Yes 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel 893LM 3-Button Remote Control 78LM Multi-Function Control Panel 373LM 3-Button Remote Control 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel 893LM 3-Button Remote Control 2nd 893LM 3-Button Remote Control and 877LM Wireless Keyless Entry 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel 891LM 1-Button Remote Control 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel 891LM 1-Button Remote Control 883LM Door Control Button 891LM 1-Button Remote Control Maintenance Alert System Control Panel Remote Control Additional Features 2 x 100 watts, Front to Back 2 x 100 watts, Front to Back 2 x 100 watts, Front to Back 1 x 100 watt, Front 1 x 100 watt, Front 1 x 75 watt, Front Lighting Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime 4-Year 4-Year 4-Year Motor Warranty 1-Year 1-Year 1-Year 1-Year 1-Year 1-Year Parts Warranty Lifetime Belt 10-Year Belt Other Warranty Previous Model *Key Features Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G7

12 ELITE SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS 8550W DC Battery Backup Belt Drive Wi-Fi GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES IS HOME TO OUR TOP-OF-THE-LINE GARAGE DOOR OPENERS. For those looking to replace or upgrade their garage door opener, this series offers the best advances in technology and engineering, while remaining a reliable, secure access solution to any garage. Powers up when the power is down with the reliability of Battery Backup. CONNECTIVITY PERFORMANCE LiftMaster MyQ Technology with Wi-Fi enables secure monitoring and control of garage door openers and houselights with a smartphone, tablet or computer.* Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications on a mobile device, so that the status of the garage door and houselights is always known. MyQ App is a free download requiring no activation or subscription fees. P3 Motors from LiftMaster are reliable, durable and powerful designed specifically for the homeowner s needs. Ideal for vaulted ceilings, connecting to the power source is easier than ever with the 6 ft. Power Cord. Eliminate the need for manual adjustments due to weather conditions with Auto Force. Lifetime motor warranty. 5-year parts warranty. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G8 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

13 8500 DC Battery Backup Capable Wall Mount* 8587W 3/4 HP AC Chain Drive Wi-Fi 8557W 3/4 HP AC Belt Drive Wi-Fi GARAGE DOOR OPENERS Get an open-spaced solution for any garage with the sleek Battery Backup Capable Wall Mount Design. Strong enough to lift the heaviest doors, including carriage house and solid wood, with the chassis support bracket and I-Beam Rail. One of our quietest garage door openers can move reinforced doors in high-wind areas in near silence with the LiftMaster Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ). SAFETY Security+ 2.0 safeguards the household with every click, a new code is sent to the garage door opener so that the door opens only for the homeowner. Plus, get increased range with reduced interference. When your Customer forgets to close the garage door, Timer-to-Close remembers and will automatically close the door after a pre-programmed number of minutes. Motion-Detection activates the garage door opener lights as soon as movement is detected, so no more fumbling in the dark (lightbulbs not included). The Protector System has safety sensors that project a light beam across the garage door opening, automatically reversing the door if anything interrupts the beam when it is closing. Alert-2-Close warning system provides audible and visual warnings when the garage door is about to close while using MyQ Technology or Timer-to-Close. *MyQ Technology is available for non-wi-fi LiftMaster Garage Door Openers when paired with the Internet Gateway. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G9

14 ELITE SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS 8500 DC Battery Backup Capable Wall Mount GARAGE DOOR OPENERS SLEEK, SPACE-SAVING MODEL MOUNTS ON THE WALL BESIDE THE GARAGE DOOR, FREEING UP CEILING SPACE. This LiftMaster Elite Series model comes fully equipped with Security+ 2.0, MyQ Technology and the Timer-to-Close feature. It is also available with an optional Battery Backup that continues working even when the power is out. PERFORMANCE DC Motor is powerful yet ultra-quiet and maintenance free. Battery Backup Capable powers up even when the power is out so the garage can be accessed (optional Battery (475LM) is required). Wall Mount Design frees the garage ceiling of hanging operators and rails and opens up the space for additional storage ideal for cathedral or obstructed ceilings. Remote light delivers 200 Watts of light (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay. Soft start/stop ensures smooth operation. Lifetime motor warranty. SAFETY Power Lock Deadbolt ensures the door cannot be forced open. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. MyQ Control Panel (888LM). Control LiftMaster Garage Door Openers by a smartphone, tablet or computer (when paired with the Internet Gateway). Equipped with the Timer-to-Close and Motion-Detection features. Remote Light (380LM). Garage space is lit up by placing this in any location in the garage within 6 ft. of an outlet. Provides 200 Watts of light with 1/2- to 4-1/2-minute timer. Power Lock Deadbolt (041A6102). Automatically locks door upon closure, ensuring the door cannot be forced open. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. Battery Backup (475LM). Powers up even when the power is out, so Customers can get into the garage. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G10 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

15 8550W DC Battery Backup Belt Drive Wi-Fi GET INTO THE GARAGE EVERY TIME, EVEN WHEN THE POWER IS OUT, WITH THIS LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES WI-FI MODEL. This revolutionary DC Motor Belt Drive offers quiet operation and comes fully equipped with Security+ 2.0, MyQ Technology with Wi-Fi and the Timer-to-Close feature. PERFORMANCE DC Motor Belt Drive System delivers powerful, ultra-quiet performance. Battery Backup ensures access to your garage when the power goes out. Soft start/stop ensures smooth operation. Lifetime motor and belt warranty. 1-year Battery Backup warranty. SAFETY PosiLock locks down the garage door by electronically monitoring against a forced opening. Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) GARAGE DOOR OPENERS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories.With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Smart Control Panel (880LM). Program remote controls, keypads, MyQ Accessories and Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers. An intuitive menu-driven LCD display enables simple adjustment of settings. Integrated Battery Backup (485LM). Operates the garage door opener as if the power was still on, plus all safety and security features will be operational. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. Remote Light Control (825LM). Control any lamp with a garage door opener remote control or smartphone via the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM). Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside the house. Remote Light Switch (823LM). Controls lights remotely. Turn on lights in your garage, yard or home with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Use with the Internet Gateway or Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers to control single pole lights from your smartphone or computer. Compatible only with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Remote Controls and MyQ Accessories. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G11

16 ELITE SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS 8587W 3/4 HP AC Chain Drive Wi-Fi GARAGE DOOR OPENERS ULTRA-POWERFUL LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES WI-FI GARAGE DOOR OPENER IS BUILT TO PROVIDE MAXIMUM POWER TO LIFT THE HEAVIEST DOORS, INCLUDING CARRIAGE HOUSE AND SOLID WOOD. The Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) provides quiet, smooth operation, and the garage door opener comes fully equipped with Security+ 2.0, MyQ Technology with Wi-Fi and the Timer-to-Close feature. PERFORMANCE 3/4 HP AC Motor Chain Drive System is built to provide maximum power to lift the heaviest doors, including carriage house and solid wood. I-Beam Rail System and reinforced chassis with chain drive provides maximum support. Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS) provides super-quiet, smooth operation year after year. Enclosed Gear Case protects gears from dirt and dust, which provides longer gear life Get the option of installation customization with the 2-Speed Sprocket, which slows down heavy doors. Lifetime motor warranty. SAFETY PosiLock locks down the garage door by electronically monitoring against a forced opening. Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Smart Control Panel (880LM). Program remote controls, keypads, MyQ Accessories and Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers. An intuitive menu-driven LCD display enables simple adjustment of settings. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. Remote Light Control (825LM). Control any lamp with a garage door opener remote control or smartphone via the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM). Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside the house. Remote Light Switch (823LM). Controls lights remotely. Turn on lights in your garage, yard or home with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Use with the Internet Gateway or Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers to control single pole lights from your smartphone or computer. Compatible only with LiftMaster Security+2.0 Garage Door Openers, Remote Controls and MyQ Accessories. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G12 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

17 8557W 3/4 HP AC Belt Drive Wi-Fi LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES WI-FI GARAGE DOOR OPENER GIVES YOU POWERFUL, YET QUIET, PERFORMANCE. It is designed specifi cally for heavy-load doors and reinforced doors. The Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) provides quiet, smooth operation, and the garage door opener comes fully equipped with Security+ 2.0, MyQ Technology with Wi-Fi and the Timer-to-Close feature. PERFORMANCE 3/4 HP Motor combines a strong pulling force with a steel-reinforced belt to lift heavy doors and reinforced doors in high-wind areas. Belt Drive System means ultra-quiet performance ideal if the home has living space above or next to the garage. Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS) provides super-quiet, smooth operation year after year. Enclosed Gear Case protects gears from dirt and dust, which provides longer gear life. Lifetime motor and belt warranty. SAFETY PosiLock locks down the garage door by electronically monitoring against a forced opening. Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) GARAGE DOOR OPENERS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Smart Control Panel (880LM). Program remote controls, keypads, MyQ Accessories and Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers. An intuitive menu-driven LCD display enables simple adjustment of settings. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. Remote Light Control (825LM). Control any lamp with a garage door opener remote control or smartphone via the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM). Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside the house. Remote Light Switch (823LM). Controls lights remotely. Turn on lights in your garage, yard or home with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Use with the Internet Gateway or Wi-Fi Garage Door Openers to control single pole lights from your smartphone or computer. Compatible only with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Remote Controls and MyQ Accessories. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance G13

18 PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS /2 HP AC Belt Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LIFTMASTER PREMIUM SERIES IS HOME TO OUR MID-TIER GARAGE DOOR OPENERS. These products offer a variety of features that provide a wide spectrum of innovative solutions while never compromising the safety and reliability every household needs. Get quiet, energy-effi cient performance with the LiftMaster Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ). CONNECTIVITY* PERFORMANCE LiftMaster MyQ Technology enables secure monitoring and control of garage door openers and house lights with a smartphone, tablet or computer. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications on a mobile device, so that the status of the garage door and houselights is always known. MyQ App is a free download requiring no activation or subscription fees. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. P3 Motors from LiftMaster are reliable, durable and powerful designed specifically for the homeowner s needs. Lifetime motor warranty. 1-year parts warranty. *Excludes the /2 HP AC Screw Drive G14 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

19 8360 DC Battery Backup Capable Chain Drive /2 HP AC Chain Drive /2 HP AC Screw Drive Rely on the Battery Backup Capable Chain Drive to power up when the power is down. A reliable choice equipped with an Extra Remote Control and a Wireless Keyless Entry. One-Piece Screw Drive Rail provides smooth, powerful performance. GARAGE DOOR OPENERS SAFETY Security+ 2.0 * safeguards the household with every click, a new code is sent to the garage door opener so that the door opens only for the homeowner. Plus, get increased range with reduced interference. PosiLock locks down the garage door by electronically monitoring against a forced opening. The Protector System has safety sensors that project a light beam across the garage door opening, automatically reversing the door if anything interrupts the beam when it is closing. *Excludes the /2 HP AC Screw Drive G15

20 PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS 8360 DC Battery Backup Capable Chain Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LIFTMASTER PREMIUM SERIES MODEL PROVIDES INDUSTRIAL- STRENGTH PERFORMANCE AND COMES FULLY EQUIPPED WITH SECURITY+ 2.0 AND MyQ TECHNOLOGY. REQUIRES INTERNET GATEWAY (828LM) TO CONNECT TO THE MyQ APP. IT S ALSO AVAILABLE WITH AN OPTIONAL BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM THAT CONTINUES WORKING EVEN WHEN THE POWER IS OUT. PERFORMANCE DC Motor Chain Drive System provides steady performance and industrial-strength lifting power. Battery Backup Cabable powers up even when the power is out so the garage can be accessed (optional Battery (485LM) is required). Energy-efficient operation consumes up to 75% less power in standby mode. Soft start/stop ensures smooth operation. 1-year Battery Backup warranty. SAFETY Alert-2-Close warning system provides audible and visual warnings when the garage door is about to close while using LiftMaster MyQ Technology or Timer-to-Close. Motion-Detection activates the garage door opener lights as soon as you walk in, so no more fumbling in the dark (lightbulbs not included). INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Standard Remote Control (893LM). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Motion-Detecting Control Panel (886LM). Automatically turns on the light when motion is detected. Includes garage door opener light control and lockout transmitters for added security. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Remote Light Switch (823LM). Controls lights remotely. Turn on lights in your garage, yard or home with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Use with the Internet Gateway to control single pole lights from your smartphone or computer. Compatible only with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Remote Controls and MyQ Accessories. Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. Remote Light Control (825LM). Control any lamp with a garage door opener remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway and the free MyQ App. Integrated Battery Backup (485LM). Operates the garage door opener as if the power was still on, plus all safety and security features will be operational. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G16 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

21 8355 1/2 HP AC Belt Drive LIFTMASTER PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENER PROVIDES RELIABLE, ENERGY-EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE YEAR AFTER YEAR. The Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) provides quiet, smooth operation, and the garage door opener comes fully equipped with Security+ 2.0 and MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with Belt Drive System provides quiet, reliable and maintenance-free performance. Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS) provides super-quiet, smooth operation year after year. Energy-efficient operation consumes up to 75% less power in standby mode. SAFETY Alert-2-Close warning system provides audible and visual warnings when the garage door is about to close while using LiftMaster MyQ Technology or Timer-to-Close. GARAGE DOOR OPENERS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Standard Remote Control (893LM). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Multi-Function Control Panel (882LM). Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Light Accessories from the control panel. Includes display lights, garage door opener light control, lockout remote controls and keypad for added security. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Remote Light Switch (823LM). Controls lights remotely. Turn on lights in your garage, yard or home with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Use with the Internet Gateway to control single pole lights from your smartphone or computer. Compatible only with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Remote Controls and MyQ Accessories. Remote Light Control (825LM). Control any lamp with a garage door opener remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway and the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM). Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside the house. Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G17

22 PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS /2 HP AC Screw Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS LIFTMASTER PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENER PROVIDES OPTIMAL PERFORMANCE NO MATTER THE CLIMATE. This model is maintenance free and specially engineered to run smoothly and quietly. The Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS ) provides quiet, smooth operation. It is also equipped with Security+ Rolling Code Technology. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with industrial-strength screw drive provides steady performance and lifting power. Motor Vibration Isolation System (MVIS) provides super-quiet, smooth operation year after year. 200-Watt lighting (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay for more energy-efficient use. One-piece screw drive means less friction, so no binding or lubrication is needed. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control (373LM). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators or commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. Multi-Function Control Panel (78LM). Turn garage door opener lights on and off from inside the garage. Includes adjustable light timer, illuminated push button for convenience and lockout button for added security. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE MyQ Control Panel (888LM). Control LiftMaster Garage Door Openers by a smartphone, tablet or computer (when paired with the Internet Gateway). Equipped with the Timer-to-Close and Motion-Detection features. 3-Button Mini Remote Control (890MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. Internet Gateway (828LM).* For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. *Requires a MyQ Control Panel (888LM) with the Internet Gateway (828LM) to get connected to the MyQ App. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G18 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

23 /2 HP AC Chain Drive ENHANCED LIFTMASTER PREMIUM SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENER OFFERS SUPERIOR LIFTING POWER. It comes with two Remote Controls and a Wireless Keyless Entry for added home access. Plus it comes equipped with Security+ 2.0 and MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with industrial-strength chain drive provides steady performance and lifting power. 200-Watt lighting (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay for more energy-efficient use. SAFETY Alert-2-Close warning system provides audible and visual warnings when the garage door is about to close while using LiftMaster MyQ Technology or Timer-to-Close. Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) GARAGE DOOR OPENERS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES COMPLETE THE PACKAGE 3-Button Standard Remote Control (893LM). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Comes standard with two remote controls. 3-Button Mini Remote Control (890MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. Multi-Function Control Panel (882LM). Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Light Accessories from the control panel. Includes display lights, garage door opener light control, lockout remote controls and keypad for added security. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM). Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside the house. Wireless Keyless Entry (877LM). Open or close the garage door instantly without a remote control using one-press activation. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. Temporary codes can be created for friends and service people. Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G19

24 CONTRACTOR SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS /2 HP AC Chain Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS THE LIFTMASTER CONTRACTOR SERIES CONTAINS OUR LINE OF BASIC GARAGE DOOR OPENERS. These garage door openers offer simple and dependable access solutions that include MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. Get rugged, reliable performance for everyday use. PERFORMANCE SAFETY P3 Motors from LiftMaster are reliable, durable and powerful designed specifically for the homeowner s needs. 4-year motor warranty. 1-year parts warranty. Security+ 2.0 safeguards the household with every click, a new code is sent to the garage door opener so that the door opens only for the homeowner. Plus, get increased range with reduced interference. PosiLock locks down the garage door by electronically monitoring against a forced opening. The Protector System has safety sensors that project a light beam across the garage door opening, automatically reversing the door if anything interrupts the beam when it is closing. G20 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

25 8155 1/2 HP AC Belt Drive /2 HP AC Chain Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS Get ultimate dependability with the Belt Drive System and 10-year belt warranty. A basic solution for any garage. G21

26 CONTRACTOR SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS /2 HP AC Chain Drive GARAGE DOOR OPENERS THIS LIFTMASTER CONTRACTOR SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENER IS THE IDEAL CHOICE FOR VALUE AND RELIABILITY. Its industrial-strength design provides smooth and steady performance. It is also equipped with Security+ 2.0 and MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with industrial-strength chain drive provides steady performance and lifting power. 100-Watt lighting (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay for more energy-efficient use. SAFETY Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1-Button Remote Control (891LM). Program a single garage door opener, gate operator, commercial door operator or MyQ Light Accessory. Multi-Function Control Panel (882LM). Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Light Accessories from the control panel. Includes display lights, garage door opener light control, lockout remote controls and keypad for added security. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. 3-Button Mini Remote Control (890MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G22 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

27 8155 1/2 HP AC Belt Drive THIS LIFTMASTER CONTRACTOR SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENER OFFERS RELIABLE AND DEPENDABLE PERFORMANCE. It is also equipped with Security+ 2.0 and MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with Belt Drive System provides reliable and maintenance-free performance. 100-Watt lighting (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay for more energy-efficient use. 10-year belt warranty. GARAGE DOOR OPENERS SAFETY Your Customer will receive an alert from the Maintenance Alert System when their opener is due for service. (Must be activated by a LiftMaster Dealer.) INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1-Button Remote Control (891LM). Program a single garage door opener, gate operator, commercial door operator or MyQ Light Accessory. Multi-Function Control Panel (882LM). Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Light Accessories from the control panel. Includes display lights, garage door opener light control, lockout remote controls and keypad for added security. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. 3-Button Mini Remote Control (890MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G23

28 CONTRACTOR SERIES GARAGE DOOR OPENERS /2 HP AC Chain Drive THIS BASIC MODEL OFFERS STRONG LIFTING POWER AND STEADY GARAGE DOOR OPENERS PERFORMANCE. It is also equipped with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and MyQ Technology. Requires Internet Gateway (828LM) to connect to the MyQ App. PERFORMANCE 1/2 HP Motor with industrial-strength chain drive provides steady performance and lifting power. 75-Watt lighting (or CFL equivalent) with adjustable light time delay for more energy-efficient use. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1-Button Remote Control (891LM). Program a single garage door opener, gate operator, commercial door operator or MyQ Light Accessory. Door-Control Button (883LM). Program remote controls, keypad and MyQ Light Accessories from the control panel. Controls one garage door opener and turns opener lights on and off. COMPLETE THE PACKAGE Internet Gateway (828LM). For LiftMaster MyQ-Enabled Garage Door Openers, this connects to the home Internet router. Open and close the garage door or gate from anywhere, and control home lighting with a smartphone, tablet or computer. 3-Button Mini Remote Control (890MAX). Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX). Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Holds four unique PINs, and users can control up to four garage door openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. G24 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

29 RAILS FOR OPERATORS BELT RAILS 2777BD 7 ft. Belt Rail 2778BD 8 ft. Belt Rail 2770BD 10 ft. Belt Rail GARAGE DOOR OPENERS CHAIN RAILS 1707LM 7 ft. Full Chain Rail 1708LM 8 ft. Chain Rail 1710LM 10 ft. Chain Rail I-BEAM CHAIN RAILS 3707CH 7 ft. I-Beam Rail 3708CH 8 ft. I-Beam Rail 3710CH 10 ft. I-Beam Rail 3712RV 12 ft. I-Beam Rail 3714RV 14 ft. I-Beam Rail SCREW DRIVE RAILS 3077SD 7 ft. Screw Rail 3088SD 8 ft. Screw Rail G25

30 GARAGE DOOR OPENERS GARAGE DOOR OPENERS G26 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

31 ELITE SERIES MEDIUM-DUTY LIGHT-DUTY MODIFICATIONS FIRE DOOR ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS

32

33 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS TABLE OF CONTENTS Why LiftMaster... C3 LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators... C5 Safety Information... C6 How to Place Your Orders... C8 Elite Series... C10 GT Gearhead Trolley Operator... C12 T Trolley Operator... C14 APT Trolley Operator... C16 GH Gearhead Hoist Operator... C18 H Hoist Operator... C20 DHJ Door Lock Hoist Jackshaft Operator... C22 J Jackshaft Operator... C24 DJ Door Lock Jackshaft Operator... C26 GSD Gearhead Slide Door Operator... C28 SD Slide Door Operator... C30 Medium-Duty Series... C32 MT Medium-Duty Series Logic Trolley Operator... C34 MH Medium-Duty Series Logic Hoist Operator... C36 MHS Medium-Duty Series Logic Slow-Speed Hoist Operator... C38 MJ Medium-Duty Series Logic Jackshaft Operator... C40 MGJ Medium-Duty Series Logic Gear-Reduced Operator... C42 Light-Duty Series... C Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator... C Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator for Rolling Sheet Doors... C48 ATS Light-Duty Series Trolley Operator... C50 Modifications... C52 Modifications At A Glance... C52 Logic Operators Power Transmission... C56 Mechanical Powerheads Starter Panels... C70 Fire Door Systems... C84 Release Devices... C84 Installation Information... C86 Application... C86 Detection Devices... C87

34 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS THE LEADER IN ACCESS SOLUTIONS

35 WHY LIFTMASTER For over 45 years, LiftMaster has been exceeding expectations by providing peace of mind through expert service and innovative solutions. This catalog gives you access to our entire product and accessory lines. The latest advances like our MyQ Technology, Security+ 2.0, Battery Backup and our specially designed P3 Motors allow our products to best serve specifi c needs while staying safe and connected at all times. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LiftMaster provides products and access solutions for homes and businesses worldwide. We are committed to providing quality products, innovative designs and comprehensive services that go beyond our Customers expectations. C3

36 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS STARTS WHEN YOU NEED IT. STOPS AT NOTHING.

37 LIFTMASTER COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators are engineered with strength and durability, providing Customers with the reliability of knowing their doors will withstand heavy industrial usage several times an hour. Our Elite Series contains our next generation of commercial door operators, all equipped with MyQ Technology. Now Customers can monitor their properties and operate their doors from any smartphone, tablet or computer. LiftMaster guarantees a high level of quality and performance in all our commercial door operators by staying true to our unique features throughout our product line: CONNECTIVITY LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators help you stay connected with your business while you re away, giving you greater control, information and access. P3 MOTORS LiftMaster designs our own purpose-built motor to meet the exact requirements needed to open and close your business s commercial doors. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS SAFETY AND SECURITY LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators have security features designed to help safeguard your business, giving you greater peace of mind. Our line of commercial door operators provides a variety of access solutions that best serve specific needs while never compromising safety and security. C5

38 SAFETY INFORMATION COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS WARNING To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, the following should be read by ANYONE involved in the design, specification, selection or purchase of an industrial door operator or automated door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Automated Door Systems For the purposes of this Safety Information, an automated door system consists of a vehicular door, an electric door operator, control equipment to interface with the door operator and safety equipment to protect people and property. Vehicular Doors A vehicular door is a large, heavy object that moves with the help of a counterbalance and electric motor. A moving door can cause SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! The safety and well-being of others depends on properly selecting products appropriate for the application and installing the products per the manufacturer s recommendations. In addition, it is imperative that all door components, including the door operator, be installed and serviced by a trained door systems technician. The door itself must be properly balanced and aligned and work freely and smoothly by hand. The door operator is not intended to operate a poorly installed, improperly balanced or worn-out door. The use of a door operator to attempt to compensate for any door defect can result in a dangerous situation. Door Operator Selection The proper door operator must be selected for the application. Pay attention to all application information in this catalog, including door type, size, voltage and control wiring. IMPROPER SELECTION CAN RESULT IN A DANGEROUS SYSTEM. Be sure you understand the application and limitations of the model door operator you select for your door. If you are in doubt, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Control Accessories Door operators can present serious hazards to persons in the immediate area when not controlled in a safe manner or by responsible persons. Choose one or more controls that together will allow complete control of the door. Most importantly, THE DOOR MUST BE ABLE TO BE STOPPED at all times in case of emergency, and the control for stopping should be conveniently located and clearly marked and visible. All controls should be located OUT OF REACH OF SMALL CHILDREN. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH CAN RESULT FROM CHILDREN PLAYING WITH CONTROLS. ALL CONTROLS SHOULD BE LOCATED SO THAT THE PERSON OPERATING THEM CAN SEE THE FULL AREA OF DOOR MOVEMENT, but should not be so close that a person starting the door could be injured due to his/her proximity to the door. Be especially careful in designing systems with automatic controls, that is, controls that can cause the door to operate without warning to persons in the immediate door area. Such controls include, but are not limited to, radio controls, remote mounted access controls, telephone access systems and timing devices. SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SIGNS WARNING OF THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION ARE A MUST IN THE DESIGN OF SUCH A SYSTEM. Entrapment Protection Devices Any commercial/industrial door operator manufacturer wishing to list and label product to UL 325 on or after August 29, 2010, must be fully compliant with the requirements mandated by the new UL 325 regulations. The UL 325 standard requires continuous monitoring of primary entrapment devices if the door operator is used with any operating mode or feature other than constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door. These types of primary entrapment devices can be either monitored photo eyes or a 2- or 4-wire monitored edge sensor. Other entrapment protection devices will be treated as ancillary. Installation of these types of entrapment protection devices is optional. Examples of these devices are 2-wire non-monitored and pneumatic edge sensors. These devices cannot be substituted for primary entrapment protection devices; instead, these devices may be used to supplement the primary devices or constant-pressure-to-close. Such devices can be attached to UL 325 compliant Logic 5.0, Logic 4.0 and Medium-Duty Logic Operators but cannot be used to replace the primary safety devices. There are many types of primary and ancillary entrapment devices available, but LiftMaster Door Operators are designed to communicate with LiftMaster brand Monitored Primary Entrapment Protection Devices only. Types of LiftMaster photo eyes are the standard commercial/industrial CPS-U, NEMA 4 rated CPS-OPEN4 and CPS-UN4, and Retro Reflective CPS-RPEN4 may be installed on a LiftMaster Door Operator in order to achieve any operating mode or feature beyond constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door. In addition, LiftMaster also offers the Optical Edge System (OES), CPS-MEI and CPS-EI Edge Interfaces, which permit the attachment of a 2-wire or 4-wire monitored sensing edge to satisfy the requirement for primary entrapment protection. For easy reference, all UL 325 compliant LiftMaster Door Operator installation manuals provide a reference chart stating which entrapment protection devices have been approved for each door operator. The UL 325 listing is dependent on testing each door operator with each of the approved entrapment protection devices. Only those entrapment protection devices approved by UL for use with the door operator as primary entrapment protection devices are referenced in the instruction manual. While LiftMaster Door Operators provide basic constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door without a primary entrapment device, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT AN ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION DEVICE BE USED WITH EVERY DOOR OPERATOR. There are many types of safety entrapment protection devices available; photo eyes, edge sensors, motion detectors and vehicle detectors are some of the more common types of primary and ancillary entrapment protection devices shown in the Accessories Section of the Commercial Door Operators and Accessories Price List. Audible and/or visible warning devices are recommended when automatic controls are used in the door operating system. A variety of warning signs and labels are also offered in this section. WITHOUT ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION DEVICES, THE DOOR COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! C6 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

39 Safe Installation Instructions Door operators and associated control equipment should only be installed and serviced by qualified professionals. Professional Installers should observe the following safe installation procedures. To ensure that this is the case, provide a copy of this Safety Information Section to the Installer. 1. Read and follow all warnings and instructions within the installation manual. 2. Install the door operator only on a properly balanced and lubricated door. An improperly balanced door may not reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 3. All repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware MUST be made by a trained door technician BEFORE installing the door operator. 4. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to the door before installing the door operator to avoid entanglement. 5. Install door operator 8 ft. or more above floor. Operators installed below this height must be enclosed with an operator cover. 6. NEVER connect the door operator to a power source until instructed within the manual to do so. 7. Installation and wiring must be in compliance with all applicable local building and electrical codes. 8. NEVER wear watches, rings or loose clothing, which could become caught within the door or operator mechanisms, while installing or servicing the door operator. 9. Install control station: Within sight of the door Out of reach of children at a minimum height of 5 ft. Away from ALL moving parts of the door 10. Install the control station far enough from the door to prevent the user from coming in contact with the door while operating the controls. 11. Install the entrapment warning placard on the wall next to the control station in a prominent location that is visible from the door. 12. Place manual release/safety reverse test label in plain view on inside of door. 13. Upon completion of installation, test entrapment protection device. 14. The operation of the door, controls and primary entrapment protection devices should be reviewed with the owner and/or end user of the automated door system. Owner should also be informed of the need to maintain control and entrapment protection on a regular basis. Entrapment protection device should be checked at least once monthly to ensure that they are working properly. All installation manuals, instructions and safety information should be left with the owner. UL 325 requires all commercial door operators to be either constant pressure to close or be equipped with a primary external Monitored Entrapment Protection Device. Failure to use an appropriate sensor, or failure to install the sensor properly, may expose the Installer and Customer to liability, should an accident occur. LiftMaster offers a wide range of photo eyes and edge sensors that protect people and property while meeting this UL 325 requirement. An automated vehicular door system includes several components, all of which must be selected in concert with each other and with the requirements of the job if the system is to be a successful one. In addition to the door itself, a system consists of a door operator, entry control equipment to interface with the door operator and safety equipment to protect people and property from hazards of an electrically powered door. As a general rule, a medium duty operator is not recommended for applications requiring more than 50 cycles per day. An industrial belt drive operator should be used in applications with cycles of up to per day. High cycle modifications and/or Gearhead Operators should be used for applications requiring cycles in excess of 90 per day. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C7

40 HOW TO PLACE YOUR ORDERS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Building a Complete Model Number 1 Select the proper model type for your door based on your door type. A brief description of the door type(s) for which a model is intended to be used is included at the beginning of each model page. If you are not sure of the proper model for your door, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. The model type will become the first part of the complete model number. Example: H (Hoist) Select the horsepower rating of your door operator by studying the Door Size Selection Guide for the model type you have chosen. This guide is based on the 2 overall area of the door and is a general guideline only for new and properly installed doors. Light duty and medium duty model types are only available in one horsepower rating. If your door size is beyond the range on the guide for one of these models, go to the standard duty or heavy duty operator of the same type. The ORDERING CODE for Horsepower Rating is as follows: 1/3 HP 33 1/2 HP 50 3/4 HP 75 1 HP /2 HP 15 2 HP 20 3 HP 30 5 HP 5HP The Horsepower Rating code will become the second part of the complete model number. Example: H50 (Hoist 1/2 HP) Select the voltage, phase and frequency according to your installation requirement. The power available at the job site must be of the same voltage, 3 phase and frequency as ordered for the door operator. A MISMATCH CAN CAUSE A DANGEROUS SITUATION AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE OPERATOR AND/OR INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY. The ORDERING CODE for Voltage, Phase and Frequency is as follows: Voltage Phase Hz...Code 115V/230V /230/460V V The Voltage, Phase and Frequency code will become the third part of the complete model number. Example: H501L5 (Hoist 1/2 HP 115/230V Single Phase Logic 5.0) Additional Information Required On all orders, please specify the door TYPE, WIDTH and HEIGHT, and VERTICAL or HIGH LIFT applications. On all side-mount operators (models MJ, J, MGJ, MH, H and GH), please specify HANDING, DOOR SHAFT DIAMETER AND KEYWAY SIZE. All door operators meeting UL 325 include the CPS-U Commercial Photo Eyes as part of the door operator standard package price. It is possible to upgrade the door operator to other safety devices at time of ordering. Please list the safety device on the order. Please list any Modifications, Accessories and Omissions as separate line items. Please indicate any markings required on packing cartons. How to Choose the Proper Handing for Your Commercial Operator Please note when ordering any hoisted operator, knowing the handing of the operator is important. When ordering any hoisted operator with a modification, such as the M102, M103 or a GH operator at 3 HP, this information is critical since the drive sprocket cannot be repositioned after production. On all belt drive hoist operators (models MHS, MH and H), please specify the HOIST LOCATION (see graphic below). This is needed to ensure that the door operator is built with the manual hoist on the correct side of the door operator for your installation. The Model GH has a quick-change hoist design which allows the hoist wheel to be moved from one side to another in minutes in the field. These units will be supplied with the hoist wheel on the right side standard. It is not necessary to specify left or right when ordering a standard GH model. For GH 3 HP models or models with C/N4/N4X prefixes, the drive sprocket is not movable in the field. For these models, please specify the hoist and drive sprocket location at the time of order placement. For Front of Hood Mount applications, with 3 HP and C/N4/N4X models, please clearly define the location of the hoist and drive sprocket. Hoist Drive Sprocket Wall Mount Example: H501L5R (shown mounted with door) NOTE: On all slide door operators (models SD and GSD), please specify RIGHT or LEFT TO OPEN. (View from inside structure looking out.) C8 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

41 DOOR OPERATOR MODELS Usage Light Duty: 7 8 cycles/hr. Medium-Duty: 12 cycles/hr.; < 50 cycles/day Standard-Duty: Up to 25 cycles/hr.; at peak periods Up to cycles/day Heavy-Duty: 25 cycles/hr.; constant high loading in excess of 90 cycles/day DOOR OPERATOR MODELS Standard Lift Sectional High or Vertical Lift Sectional Rolling Doors and Grilles Rolling Sheet Doors Sliding Doors ATS MT MJ, MGJ MGJ, MH MHS T H, DHJ, J, DJ H, DHJ, J, DJ SD GT GH GH GSD Special Application APT Operating Amp Rating (Full Workload) Heavy-Duty Logic 5.0 Operators: GT, GH, GSD OPERATING AMP RATING (FULL WORKLOAD) HP 1/2 3/ /2 2 3 VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz 115-1Ø N/A N/A 230-1Ø N/A N/A 208/230-3Ø Ø Ø N/A Industrial-Duty Logic 5.0 Operators: T, H, DHJ, J, DJ, SD OPERATING AMP RATING (FULL WORKLOAD) HP 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz Medium-Duty Operators: MT, MH, MHS, MJ, MGJ VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz Light Duty Operators: ATS, 3900, 3950 VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz 115-1Ø Ø /230-3Ø Ø Ø OPERATOR AMP RATING (FULL LOAD) 115-1Ø 6.6 OPERATOR AMP RATING (FULL LOAD) 1/2 HP ATS2113X 3900, Ø Power supply will need to be delivered to meet product requirements. DETERMINE AND SET WIRING TYPE LiftMaster Logic 5.0 Operators are equipped with seven field selectable operating wiring formats, allowing for customization of the door operator functionality in order to meet the commercial environment needs and requirements. This is accomplished through the positioning of the selectable dial on the desired type. See below for an explanation of these types. CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION SWITCHES Allows for the selection of various control functions by positioning selector dial as indicated. The control functions which may be selected are as follows: C2 Momentary contact to open and stop with constant pressure to close, open override, plus wiring for sensing device to reverse. B2 Momentary contact to open, close and stop, plus wiring for sensing device to reverse and auxiliary devices to open and close with open override. D1 Constant pressure to open and close with wiring for sensing device to stop. E2 Momentary contact to open with override and constant pressure to close. Early release of CLOSE button will cause door to reverse (rollback feature), plus wiring for sensing device to reverse. F2 Fail-safe wiring can be selected with the addition of a CPS-U, CPS-UN4 or failsafe edge and CPS3 card, or other approved LiftMaster Monitored Entrapment Protection Device (LMEP). T Momentary contact to open, close and stop, with open override and Timer to Close. OPEN button may be connected to activate timer if desired. Auxiliary controls may be connected to open and activate Timer to Close, or to open and close without activating timer. If timer has been activated, all opening devices will recycle timer. Includes wiring for sensing devices to reverse, which will not activate timer. Timer will also work from mid-stop position. TS Momentary contact to open, close and stop, with open override and Timer to Close. Every momentary contact (open, close and stop) with device that causes the door to open will activate Timer to Close, including sensing devices to reverse. Timer may be deactivated until next opening signal is received by depressing STOP button after door has reached open position. Timer will also work from mid-stop position. FSTS Ideal for Fire Stations Momentary contact to open, close and stop, with open override. A single-button station (panic button) can be used to activate the open cycle and the Timer to Close. Only the single-button control will activate the timer. NOTE: All control functions require the use of a LiftMaster Monitored Entrapment Protection Device (LMEP). See commercial door operator pages for approved LMEP devices. In order to access the complete feature set of the Logic 5.0 control board. The Logic 5.0 Operator may be used without such safety devices; however, operation will be limited to C2 (with ability to use the Programmable Mid-Stop option), D1 or E2 operation only. LiftMaster safety options are mandatory for T, TS and FSTS control functions. IMPORTANT NOTES 1. External interlocks may be used with all functional modes. 2. Auxiliary devices are any devices that have only dry contacts. Examples: photo eyes, loop detector, pneumatic or electrical treadles, radio controls, one-button stations, pull cords, etc. 3. Open override means that the door may be reversed while closing by activating an opening device without the need to use the STOP button first. 4. When the door is in a stopped position other than fully closed, and a safety input is activated (LMEP or EDGE), the Restricted Close (RC) feature will allow a CLOSE command when the CLOSE button is pressed and held. The door operator will begin closing after 5 seconds. If the CLOSE button is released, the door will stop. When in E2 mode, the door will move to the fully open position. C9 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS

42 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Gearhead Trolley Operator (GT) OUR COMPLETELY UPGRADED ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS WORK HARDER SO YOU CAN WORK SMARTER. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LiftMaster Logic 5.0 Operators feature our most advanced features, including MyQ Technology and Security+ 2.0, to help you keep your facility running smoothly and safely at all times. CONNECTIVITY Gearhead Trolley Operators employ lubricated gears and are optimal for heavy, industrial, high-cycle applications. PERFORMANCE MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind (when paired with the Internet Gateway 828LM). Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications on a mobile device, ensuring the status of your commercial door. MyQ Mobile App is a free download with no annual activation fee. Dual Voltage Connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Control Function Selector Dial enables easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Continuous-Duty High-Starting Torque Motor performs in demanding industrial overhead and rolling door applications. Motor Removable without Affecting Limit Switch Settings saves time and money for maintenance. Mid-Stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. C10 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

43 Trolley Operator (T) Gearhead Hoist Operator (GH) Hoist Operator (H) Trolley Operators are optimal for use on industrial sectional overhead doors with standard lift. Gearhead Hoist Operators employ lubricated gears for heavy, industrial, high-cycle applications. Hoist Operators are optimal for industrial applications, providing a fl oor-level chain hoist for ease of manual operation. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS SAFETY Maximum Run Timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-Reverse Circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. With a powder-coated finish, the NEMA 1 rated electrical box construction is durable enough for most applications. Warranty: 2 Years. Our built-in Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference so properties are secure and only designated remote controls will open and close your commercial door. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. Approved LiftMaster Monitored Entrapment Protection Devices must be added in order to keep UL 325 standards for momentary contact to close operation. Additional monitored and secondary entrapment devices can be added to suit the needs of the commercial environment. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. C11

44 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS GT Gearhead Trolley Operator LOGIC 5.0 GEARHEAD TROLLEY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS EMPLOY LUBRICATED GEARS AND ARE OPTIMAL FOR HEAVY INDUSTRIAL, HIGH-CYCLE APPLICATIONS. Suspended from the ceiling, the door operators are used on sectional overhead doors with standard lift. GT Operators are directly attached to drive and control the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty wormgear-in-oil gear reducer delivers performance for heavy industrial, high-cycle applications. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, 10:1 first stage using heavy-duty gears running in oil bath, cast iron housing; #41 chain second stage; #41 output chain on trolley. Bearings: sealed roller bearings in gear reducer; flange-mount industrial ball bearings on drive shaft. Brake: standard on all GT operators. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. #41 trolley roller chain standard on GT operators. Door speed: in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 160 lbs. shipping weight STANDARD SECTIONAL HP MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel Fiberglass Alum. Doors Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / / C12 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

45 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GT501L / GT503L /230/ GT505L5* /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GT751L / GT753L /230/ GT755L5* HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GT101L / GT103L /230/ GT105L5* /2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GT151L / GT153L /230/ GT155L5* Models listed above are equipped for doors up to 12 ft. Track is available for doors up to the following: 14 ft., 16 ft., 18 ft., 20 ft., 24 ft. *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C13

46 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS T Trolley Operator LOGIC 5.0 TROLLEY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE OPTIMAL FOR GENERAL INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS. Suspended from the ceiling, the operators are used on sectional overhead doors with standard lift. T Operators are directly attached to drive and control the door. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second #41 chain; #48 (for 1/3 and 1/2 HP) and #41 (for 3/4 and 1 HP) output chain on trolley. Bearings/ bushings: industrial ball bearings on output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on 3/4 and 1 HP Operators (optional on 1/2 HP, not available on 1/3 HP). Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Trolley roller chain #48 on 1/3 HP and 1/2 HP, #41 on 3/4 and 1 HP. Door speed: in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 130 lbs. shipping weight STANDARD SECTIONAL HP MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel Fiberglass Alum. Doors Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / / NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. If a heavier back panel is supplied, use the next higher HP rating. A dual trolley modifi cation is recommended for doors 22 ft. or wider. See Modifi cations at a Glance Section. *For models with brakes, add 3.5". (Brake standard on 3/4 HP and 1 HP, optional on 1/2 HP) * C14 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

47 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/3 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz T331L / T333L /230/ (For 1/3 HP options not shown, use 1/2 HP operator.) 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz T501L / T503L /230/ T505L5* /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz T751L / T753L /230/ T755L HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz T101L / T103L /230/ T105L5* Models listed above are equipped for doors up to 12 ft. Track is available for doors up to the following: 14 ft., 16 ft., 18 ft., 20 ft., 24 ft. 1/3 and 1/2 HP operators come equipped with #48 Roller Chain. 3/4 HP and greater come equipped with #41 Roller Chain. *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C15

48 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS APT Trolley Operator LOGIC 5.0 APARTMENT TROLLEY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE OPTIMAL FOR HIGH-CYCLE APARTMENT HOUSE APPLICATIONS. These operators employ an auto-reconnect trolley with nylon inserts and a resilient-mount motor for quiet operation. Suspended from the ceiling, the operators are used on sectional overhead doors with a standard lift. APT Operators are directly attached to drive and control the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Resilient-mount motor provides quiet operation. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second and third stages #41 chain; #48 output chain on trolley. Bearings: industrial ball bearings on output and first reduction shafts; bearings on second reduction shaft. Brake: standard on APT. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. #41 trolley roller chain standard with APT operators. Door speed: 7 8 in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect with auto-reconnect, disconnects operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency and automatically reconnects for convenience. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 130 lbs. shipping weight STANDARD SECTIONAL SQ. FT. MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel Alum. Doors Wood Doors Fiberglass Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul " (includes brake) C16 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

49 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz APT501L / Models listed above are equipped for doors up to 12 ft. Track is available for doors up to the following: 14 ft.,16 ft., 18 ft., 20 ft., 24 ft. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)* Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)* Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)* Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. *Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C17

50 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS GH Gearhead Hoist Operator LOGIC 5.0 GEARHEAD HOIST COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS EMPLOY LUBRICATED GEARS FOR HEAVY INDUSTRIAL, HIGH-CYCLE APPLICATIONS. These operators include a fl oor-level chain hoist for ease of manual operation in an emergency or power outage. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty wormgear-in-oil gear reducer delivers performance for heavy industrial, high-cycle applications. Floor-level chain hoist with electrical interlock provides easy disconnect and manual operation in an emergency. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, 45:1 first stage using heavy-duty gears running in oil bath, cast iron housing. Special all climate synthetic gear oil for greater low temperature performance; #50 output sprocket chain. Bearings: sealed roller bearings in gear reducer. Brake: standard on all GH door operators. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 125 lbs. shipping weight HP ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / / Call your LiftMaster Sales Representative for specifi cations WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. C18 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

51 OPERATORS 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH501L / GH503L /230/ GH505L5* /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH751L / GH753L /230/ GH755L5* HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH101L / GH103L /230/ GH105L5* /2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH151L / GH153L /230/ GH155L5* HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH203L /230/ GH205L5* HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GH303L5 (L/R)...208/230/ NOTE: 3 HP must be ordered Right or Left. *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. 5 HP 5 HP GH Operator not offered in Logic 5.0, mechanical only. Please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative for more information. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 CPS-RPEN4 CPS-OPEN4 CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CONT. OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C19

52 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS H Hoist Operator LOGIC 5.0 HOISTED COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE OPTIMAL FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS. These operators include a fl oor-level chain hoist to ease manual operation in an emergency or power outage. The door operators are typically mounted to the wall when used with larger sectional overhead doors with vertical or high lift and mounted to the wall or the front of the hood when used with rolling doors and grilles. H Operators are attached to the door jackshaft to indirectly drive the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Floor-level chain hoist with electrical interlock provides easy disconnect and manual operation in an emergency. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second, third and fourth stages #48 chain; #50 output sprocket chain. Bearings/bushings: industrial ball bearings on 1 in. output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on 3/4 and optional on 1/2 HP. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 110 lbs. shipping weight HP ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / / * Logic *For models with brakes, add 2". (Brake standard on 3/4 HP and 1 HP, optional on 1/2 HP) NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. If a heavier back panel is supplied, use the next higher HP rating. For doors 22 ft. wide by 20 ft. high and larger, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. C20 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

53 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/3 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz H331L5 (L/R)...115/ H333L5 (L/R)...208/230/ (For 1/3 HP options not shown, use 1/2 HP operator.) 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz H501L5 (L/R)...115/ H503L5 (L/R)...208/230/ H505L5* (L/R) /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz H751L5 (L/R)...115/ H753L5 (L/R)...208/230/ H755L5* (L/R) HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz H101L5 (L/R)...115/ H103L5 (L/R)...208/230/ H105L5* (L/R) *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 50B18 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for sectional doors. 50B40 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, recommended for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C21 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS

54 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS DHJ Door Lock Hoist Jackshaft Operator LOGIC 5.0 DOOR LOCK HOIST/JACKSHAFT COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE IDEAL FOR SHOPPING MALL APPLICATIONS WITH HEAVIER ROLLING DOORS AND GRILLES. The door operators provide a fl oor-level chain hoist to ease manual operation in an emergency or power outage. These operators include a door lock sensor to prevent damage to the door and operator caused by attempts to automatically open a locked door. The door operators are typically mounted to the wall when used with larger sectional overhead doors with vertical or high lift and mounted to the wall, or the front of the hood, when used with rolling doors and grilles. DHJ Operators are attached to the door jackshaft to indirectly drive the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Internal door lock sensor eliminates jamming and damage to door and operator if door is opened when locked. Floor-level chain hoist with electrical interlock provides easy disconnect and manual operation in an emergency. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second, third and fourth stages #48 chain; #50 output sprocket chain. Bearings/bushings: industrial ball bearings on 1 in. output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on 3/4 and optional on 1/2 HP. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 110 lbs. shipping weight Logic HP ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / *For models with brakes, add 2". (Brake standard on 3/4 HP, optional on 1/2 HP) * NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. If a heavier back panel is supplied, use the next higher HP rating. For doors 22 ft. wide by 20 ft. high and larger, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. C22 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

55 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz DHJ501L5 (L/R)...115/ DHJ503L5 (L/R)...208/230/ DHJ505L5* (L/R) /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz DHJ751L5 (L/R)...115/ DHJ753L5 (L/R)...208/230/ DHJ755L5* (L/R) *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 50B40 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, recommended for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C23

56 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS J Jackshaft Operator LOGIC 5.0 JACKSHAFT COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE OPTIMAL FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS. Doors used with this operator should be balanced with the ability to be manually lifted by hand in an emergency or power outage. The door operators are typically mounted to the wall when used with smaller sectional overhead doors with a vertical or high lift and mounted to the wall or the front of the hood when used with rolling doors and grilles. J Operators are attached to the door jackshaft to indirectly drive the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction: first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second, third and fourth stages #48 chain; #50 output sprocket chain. Bearings/bushings: industrial ball bearings on 1 in. output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on 3/4 and 1 HP operators (optional on 1/2 HP, not available on 1/3 HP). Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 95 lbs. shipping weight HP ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / / * Logic *For models with brakes, add 2". (Brake standard on 3/4 HP and 1 HP, optional on 1/2 HP) NOTE: The J Operator is not recommended for use on large or high rolling doors without chain hoist modifi cation (see Model H). On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. If a heavier back panel is supplied, use the next higher HP rating. For doors 22 ft. wide by 20 ft. high and larger, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. C24 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

57 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/3 HP (FOR 1/3 HP OPTIONS NOT SHOWN, USE 1/2 HP OPERATOR.) Model...Voltage Phase Hz J331L / J333L /230/ (For 1/3 HP options not shown, use 1/2 HP operator.) 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz J501L / J503L /230/ J505L5* /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz J751L / J753L /230/ J755L5* HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz J101L / J103L /230/ J105L5* *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 50B18 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for sectional doors. 50B40 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, recommended for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C25 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS

58 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS DJ Door Lock Jackshaft Operator LOGIC 5.0 DOOR LOCK JACKSHAFT COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE IDEAL FOR SHOPPING MALL APPLICATIONS WITH LIGHTER ROLLING DOORS AND GRILLES. Doors used with this operator should be small and light enough to be manually lifted by hand in an emergency or power outage. These door operators include a door lock sensor to prevent damage to the door and operator caused by attempts to automatically open a locked door. The door operators are typically mounted to the wall when used with smaller sectional overhead doors with vertical or high lift and mounted to the side or the front of the hood when used with rolling doors and grilles. DJ Operators are attached to the door jackshaft to indirectly drive the door. CONNECTIVITY COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Internal door lock sensor eliminates jamming and damage to door and operator if door is opened when locked. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction: first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second, third and fourth stages #48 chain; #50 output sprocket chain. Bearings/bushings: industrial ball bearings on 1 in. output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on 3/4 and optional on 1/2 HP. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 95 lbs. shipping weight HP ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. 1/ / * Logic *For models with brakes, add 2". (Brake standard on 3/4 HP, optional on 1/2 HP) NOTE: The Model DJ Door Operator is designed for use on rolling doors and grilles. It features an internal door lock sensor which detects if the door lock is engaged, stopping operation to eliminate jamming and damage to the door and operator. There is no longer any need for wiring guide-mounted interlocks. C26 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

59 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz DJ501L / DJ503L /230/ DJ505L5* /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz DJ751L / DJ753L /230/ DJ755L5* *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 50B40 Sprocket, 1 in. Bore, 1/4 in. keyway, recommended for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C27

60 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS GSD Gearhead Slide Door Operator LOGIC 5.0 GEARHEAD SLIDING COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS EMPLOY LUBRICATED GEARS FOR HEAVY INDUSTRIAL, HIGH-CYCLE APPLICATIONS. These operators offer functionality that is similar to GT Operators, but are used on single and bi-parting sliding doors. These door operators are directly attached to drive and control the door. GSD Operators are mounted directly above the door and open the door in the direction of the operator. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty wormgear-in-oil gear reducer delivers performance for heavy industrial, high-cycle applications. Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, 10:1 first stage using heavy-duty gears running in oil bath; cast iron housing; #41 chain second stage; #41 output chain on trolley. Bearings: sealed roller bearings in gear reducer, flange-mount industrial ball bearings on drive shaft. Brake: standard on all GSD operators. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish, all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. #41 trolley roller chain standard on GSD operators. Door speed: in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 180 lbs. shipping weight (Left Hand Mount Shown) HP DOOR SIZE SELECTION GUIDE Maximum Door Weight (lbs.) Maximum Door Area (sq. ft.) 1/2 1, /4 2, , /2 3, NOTE: For bi-parting doors, total weight and total area of both doors combined must be considered. Specify door widths when ordering. C28 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

61 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GSD501L5 (L/R)...115/ GSD503L5 (L/R)...208/230/ GSD505L5* (L/R) /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GSD751L5 (L/R)...115/ GSD753L5 (L/R)...208/230/ GSD755L5* (L/R) HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GSD101L5 (L/R)...115/ GSD103L5 (L/R)...208/230/ GSD105L5* (L/R) /2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz GSD151L5 (L/R)...115/ GSD153L5 (L/R)...208/230/ GSD155L5* (L/R) Models listed above are equipped for doors up to 12 ft. Track is available for doors up to the following: 14 ft.,16 ft., 18 ft., 20 ft., 24 ft. *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C29

62 ELITE SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS SD Slide Door Operator LOGIC 5.0 SLIDING DOOR COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ARE FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS. These operators have functionality that is similar to T Operators, but they are used on single and bi-parting sliding doors. These operators are directly attached to drive and control the door. SD Operators are mounted directly above the door and open the door in the direction of the operator. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely monitor and control your facility door operator and lights with your smartphone, tablet or computer for greater peace of mind. Alerts can be received as or pop-up (push) notifications. PERFORMANCE Control function selector dial allows for easy selection and programming of (7) wiring types, from constant pressure to close to specialized Timer-to-Close functionality to meet end user needs. Timer-to-Close conveniently and confidently closes the commercial door automatically after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed for added security and peace of mind. Mid-stop enables partial opening of door to a preprogrammed position for energy savings, time savings and convenience. Dual voltage connections increase flexibility by enabling the Installer to select the required voltage within phase to meet job-site requirements. Within phases, voltage is selectable at the time of installation with the placement of a connector. Continuous-duty high-starting torque motor with instant reverse and overload protection. Capacitor start with single phase, removable without affecting limit switches. Adjustable friction clutch helps to protect door and operator from damage should the door meet an obstruction. Maximum run timer reverses or stops door if closing time exceeds expected time frame to limit damage to door and operator. Delay-on-reverse circuit prevents abrupt reversal of door, reducing wear on the door and operator system. 3-Button Control Station with Maintenance Alert System (MAS). Drive reduction, first stage heavy-duty 5L V-belt; second stage #41 chain; #41 output chain on trolley. Bearings/bushings: industrial ball bearings on output shaft; heavy-duty oil-filled bushings on reduction shafts. Brake: standard on SD operators. Construction: NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Trolley roller chain, #41 on all SD operators. Door speed: in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Security+ 2.0 radio receiver is standard on-board with Logic 5.0 Operators and virtually eliminates radio frequency interference. Accepts up to (90) 1-button or (30) 3-button remote controls plus up to (30) wireless keypads or an unlimited number of DIP switch remote controls. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. LiftMaster offers a variety of entrapment protection devices for every commercial application. Emergency Disconnect, disconnects door operator from door for manual lifting in an emergency. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 5VDC NEC Class 2 control circuit Approximate 130 lbs. shipping weight (Left Hand Mount Shown) HP DOOR SIZE SELECTION GUIDE Maximum Door Weight (lbs.) Maximum Door Area (sq. ft.) 1/2 1, /4 1, , NOTE: For bi-parting doors, total weight and total area of both doors combined must be considered. Specify door widths when ordering C30 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

63 OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz SD501L5 (L/R)...115/ SD503L5 (L/R)...208/230/ SD505L5* (L/R) /4 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz SD751L5 (L/R)...115/ SD753L5 (L/R)...208/230/ SD755L5* (L/R) HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz SD101L5 (L/R)...115/ SD103L5 (L/R)...208/230/ SD105L5* (L/R) Models listed above are equipped for doors up to 12 ft. Track is available for doors up to the following: 14 ft., 16 ft., 18 ft., 20 ft., 24 ft. *When ordering a 575V, three phase operator, the ORDERING CODE for voltage/phase in the model number is designated as a 5. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. If two LMEP devices are utilized, CPS3CARD is required (see Accessories section). Internet Gateway (828LM)** Receive alerts or monitor and activate your commercial door from anywhere via an Internet-enabled device. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close up to four commercial doors from any room in your facility. Remote Light Control (825LM)** Control any lamp with a commercial door operator remote control or smartphone via the Internet Gateway. Mushroom Button Control Station (02401M) Provides single button to activate opening one or more commercial doors. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW5/KPW250) Durable, weather tight design features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (rated for Water Protection Requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. KPW250 provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a commercial door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. (TLS1CARD is recommended.) 3-Button Remote Control (813LM) Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control with Security+ 2.0 narrow band on 310/315/390 MHz tri-band. Red/Green/ Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS available as an extra power source.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. **Internet Gateway Accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ Enabled commercial door operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of building materials. A general range estimate between the Internet Gateway and the commercial door operator is 300 ft. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC C31

64 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Medium-Duty Series Logic Trolley Operator (MT) COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS The Medium-Duty line of Commercial Door Operators is designed to deliver exceptional performance for a variety of commercial applications with lower operational cycle requirements. The complete line meets UL 325 requirements for Monitored Entrapment Protection and includes an integrated Security+ radio receiver to keep your facility safe and secure. PERFORMANCE This low-profi le-designed trolley operator was developed for use on standard-lift sectional doors up to 14 ft. high. Medium-Duty Series Logic Gear-Reduced Operator (MGJ) This gearhead jackshaft operator is designed for use on industrial sectional doors with high or vertical lift and on small rolling doors and grilles. Powerful 1/2 HP, single-phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Programmable C2 wiring providing momentary contact to open and stop, with constant contact to close. Momentary contact to close (B2 wiring) can be easily set with the addition of a Monitored Entrapment Protection Device. UL 325 compliant Medium-Duty Logic programmable integrated circuit board. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. Warranty: 2 Years. C32 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

65 Medium-Duty Series Logic Hoist Operator (MH) Medium-Duty Series Logic Slow-Speed Hoist Operator (MHS) Medium-Duty Series Logic Jackshaft Operator (MJ) This compact-designed operator includes an emergency chain hoist with an electric interlock for use on small rolling doors, grilles and industrial sectional doors with high or vertical lift. This slow-speed hoist operator is designed for use on rolling sheet doors. This jackshaft operator is compact in design, for use on industrial sectional doors with high or vertical lift and on small rolling doors and grilles. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) allows programming from 5 60 seconds in 5-second increments. Allows for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position (requires Monitored Primary Entrapment Protection Device). LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards. Approved LiftMaster Monitored Entrapment Protection Devices must be added in order to comply with UL 325 standards for momentary contact-to-close operation. Secondary entrapment devices can be added to suit the needs of the commercial environment. C33

66 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT Medium-Duty Series Logic Trolley Operator COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS THE MT DOOR OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON STANDARD LIFT SECTIONAL DOORS UP TO 14 FT. HIGH AND UP TO 12 CYCLES PER HOUR. PERFORMANCE High-strength dual L-rail track with exclusive nylon quiet-gliding chain guides on rail spacers for quiet, smooth operation. Quick-mount header bracket, which provides fast, swing-up installation. Programmable C2 or B2 wiring options (B2 requires installed Monitored Entrapment Protection Device) to meet business requirements for commercial door operator control. Powerful high-starting torque 1/2 HP, single-phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Adjustable friction clutch helps protect against major damage to door and operator should the door meet an obstruction. Drive Reduction: First stage heavy-duty 4L V-belt; second stage and third stages #48 chain. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. Heavy-duty solenoid actuated brake standard on model BMT5011U. Heavy-duty oil-filled bushings. NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Spring-loaded disconnect for emergency manual operation. Operator/Motor Control: Solid-State Medium-Duty circuit board. 3-Button Station for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions is standard for all door operators. Door speed: 8 10 in. per second. Warranty: 2 Years. SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position for added security and peace of mind. Programmable from 5 60 seconds in 5-second increments. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards for Monitored Entrapment Protection. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 24V NEC Class 2 control circuit MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel STANDARD SECTIONAL SQ. FT. Fiberglass Alum. Doors Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 12 cycles per hour. C34 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

67 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz MT5011U UNITS WITH SOLENOID BRAKE Order Model BMT Model...Voltage Phase Hz BMT5011U Solenoid brake cannot be added in the field. ADDITIONAL TRACK Required for doors higher than 12 ft. For doors up to 14 ft. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. 3-Button Control Station (02103) Indoor surface mount, NEMA 1 rated. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators. Controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Operators.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C35

68 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MH Medium-Duty Series Logic Hoist Operator THE MH DOOR OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON SMALL ROLLING DOORS, GRILLES AND INDUSTRIAL SECTIONAL DOORS WITH HIGH OR VERTICAL LIFT. PERFORMANCE COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Easy emergency manual operation using the floor-level chain hoist and disconnect with electrical interlock. Programmable C2 or B2 wiring options (B2 requires installed Monitored Entrapment Protection Device) to meet business requirements for commercial door operator control. Powerful high-starting torque 1/2 HP, single-phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Adjustable friction clutch helps protect against major damage to door and operator should the door meet an obstruction. Drive Reduction, first stage heavy-duty 4L V-belt; second and third stages #48 chain. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. Heavy-duty solenoid actuated brake standard. Heavy-duty oil-filled bushings. NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Operator/Motor Control: Solid-State Medium-Duty circuit board. 3-Button Station for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions is standard for all door operators. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 24V NEC Class 2 control circuit SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position for added security and peace of mind. Programmable from 5 to 60 seconds in 5-second increments. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards for Monitored Entrapment Protection. ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. SQ. FT NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 12 cycles per hour. C36 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

69 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz MH5011U (L/R) DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 41B48 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for rolling doors. 41B32 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, recommended for sectional doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. 3-Button Control Station (02103) Indoor surface mount, NEMA 1 rated. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators, controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Operators.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C37

70 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MHS Medium-Duty Series Logic Slow-Speed Hoist Operator THE MHS DOOR OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON ROLLING SHEET DOORS. It features an adjustable friction clutch, high-starting torque motor with overload protection, emergency chain hoist with electric interlock and emergency disconnect chain. PERFORMANCE COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Easy emergency manual operation using the floor-level chain hoist and disconnect with electrical interlock. Programmable C2 or B2 wiring options (B2 requires installed Monitored Entrapment Protection Device) to meet business requirements for commercial door operator control. Powerful high-starting torque 1/2 HP, single-phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Adjustable friction clutch helps protect against major damage to door and operator should the door meet an obstruction. Drive Reduction, first stage heavy-duty 4L V-belt; second and third stages #48 chain. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. Heavy-duty oil-filled bushings. NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Operator/Motor Control: Solid-State Medium-Duty circuit board. 3-Button Station for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions is standard for all door operators. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 24V NEC Class 2 control circuit Heavy-duty solenoid actuated brake is not available due to the design and application of the MHS operators. MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position for added security and peace of mind. Programmable from 5 60 seconds in 5-second increments. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards for Monitored Entrapment Protection. ROLLING SQ. FT. 24 ga. Steel 22 ga. Steel 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Alum. Doors Steel Grilles NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. C38 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

71 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz MHS5011U (L/R) DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 41B60 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please call your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. 3-Button Control Station (02103) Indoor surface mount, NEMA 1 rated. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators, controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Operators.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C39

72 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MJ Medium-Duty Series Logic Jackshaft Operator THE MJ IS A MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC JACKSHAFT OPERATOR FEATURING A COMPACT DESIGN FOR USE ON INDUSTRIAL SECTIONAL DOORS WITH HIGH OR VERTICAL LIFT AND ON SMALL ROLLING DOORS AND GRILLES. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS PERFORMANCE Programmable C2 or B2 wiring options (B2 requires installed Monitored Entrapment Protection Device) to meet business requirements for commercial door operator control. Powerful high-starting torque 1/2 HP, single-phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Floor-level disconnect provides emergency manual operation. Adjustable friction clutch helps protect against major damage to door and operator should the door meet an obstruction. Drive Reduction, first stage heavy-duty 4L V-belt; second stage and third stages #48 chain. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. Heavy-duty solenoid actuated brake standard. Heavy-duty oil-filled bushings. NEMA 1 rated electrical box; heavy-duty 11-gauge steel frame with durable powder-coated finish; all reduction sprockets drilled and pinned to shafts. Easily field converted for right or left mounting. Operator/Motor Control: Solid-State Medium-Duty circuit board. 3-Button Station for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions is standard for all door operators. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit: 24V NEC Class 2 control circuit SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position for added security and peace of mind. Programmable from 5 60 seconds in 5-second increments. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards for Monitored Entrapment Protection. ROLLING SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. SQ. FT NOTE: 1. The MJ Operator is not recommended for use on large or high rolling doors without chain hoist modifi cation (see Model MH). 2. On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 12 cycles per hour. C40 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

73 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz MJ5011U For hoist capability see Model MH. DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 41B32 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for sectional doors. 41B48 Sprocket (specify bore or keyway) recommended for rolling doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, please call your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. 3-Button Control Station (02103) Indoor surface mount, NEMA 1 rated. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators, controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Operators.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C41

74 MEDIUM-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MGJ Medium-Duty Series Logic Gear-Reduced Operator THE MGJ MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC GEAR-REDUCED JACKSHAFT OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE WITH ROLLING GRILLES AND SHUTTERS. It features a compact design, a fl oor-level disconnect, a high-starting torque motor and a heavy-duty wormgear reducer. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty wormgear-in-oil-bath speed reducer for lasting performance. Programmable C2 or B2 wiring options (B2 requires installed Monitored Entrapment Protection Device) to meet business requirements for commercial door operator control. Powerful 1/2 HP, single phase motor with internal automatic reset thermal overload is removable without affecting limit switch settings. Floor-level disconnect provides emergency manual operation. Integrated 90-second maximum run timer. NEMA 1 rated electrical box with baked-on powder-coated finish. Sealed roller bearings in gear reducer. Operator/Motor Control: Solid-State Medium-Duty circuit board. 3-Button Station for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions is standard for all door operators. Door speed: 8 9 in. per second (typical). Warranty: 2 Years. TECHNICAL INFORMATION Control circuit, 24V NEC Class 2 control circuit ROLLING SECTIONAL SQ. FT. MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga. Steel Alum. Grilles Fiberglass 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel Alum. Doors 20 ga. Steel Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga., 18 ga. Steel Steel Grilles 16 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 12 cycles per hour. SAFETY Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts up to (20) LiftMaster Security+ or unlimited DIP switch remote controls. 3-button remote controls can be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP operation. Integrated Timer-to-Close (TTC) for timed automatic door closure after the door reaches the full open position for added security and peace of mind. Programmable from 5 60 seconds in 5-second increments. LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators comply with UL 325 standards for Monitored Entrapment Protection. For model MGJ, the term handed refers to the side of the operator where the drive sprocket is located. (See drawing below Drive sprocket on left and handed left. Drive sprocket on right and handed right.) DRIVE SPROCKET MOUNTING LOCATION OPTIONS Ordering Code: Drive Sprocket (Right or Left) Drive Sprocket Drive Sprocket For MGJ C42 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

75 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP SOLENOID BRAKE INCLUDED Model...Voltage Phase Hz MGJ5011U (L/R) OPERATOR HANDING Side of Door Hood-Mount Wall-Mount Left MGJ5011UL MGJ5011UL Right MGJ5011UR MGJ5011UR DOOR SPROCKET SUBSTITUTIONS Sprocket Description 41B32 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for rolling doors. 41B32 Sprocket, non-standard bore and keyway for rolling doors. 41B20 Sprocket, 1 in. bore, 1/4 in. keyway, standard for sectional doors. For all other sprocket substitutions, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. MOUNTING OPTIONS Description Hood-Mount Bracket (may be welded) Hood-Mount Bracket (cast) MONITORED ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION OPTIONS (LMEP) CPS-UN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. CPS-RPEN4 Retro-reflective, single sided monitored photo eye and reflector, polarized beam technology, 50 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-OPEN4 Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, flexible rubber housing, polarized beam technology, 45 ft. range, NEMA 4X rated. CPS-U Thru-beam, dual-sided infrared monitored photo eyes, 30 ft. range, NEMA 1 rated (default primary entrapment protection device). OES Optical Edge System, thru-beam infrared optical sensors, premium rubber door edge that can be cut to length for exact fit, NEMA 6 rated. CPS-EI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 4-wire electric monitored edge. CPS-MEI Direct connection edge interface device for use with 2-wire electric monitored edge. NOTE: Safety Device (LMEP) must be chosen at the time of order entry. 3-Button Control Station (02103) Indoor surface mount, NEMA 1 rated. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/ STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators, controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. Light Curtain (LC-36A) 36 in. of cross-beam coverage, 33 ft. range, NEMA 4 rated. Must be used with Primary Monitored Entrapment Protection. (100MAPS required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Operators.) FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C43

76 LIGHT-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator (3900) COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS The Light-Duty line of Commercial Door Operators is designed to deliver safety and reliability for commercial door applications with light operational cycle requirements. The complete line meets UL 325 requirements for Monitored Entrapment Protection and includes an integrated Security+ radio receiver to keep your facility safe and secure. Model 3900 is a Light-Duty jackshaft operator for commercial sectional applications only. It features a compact design ideal for limited height, cathedral or obstructed ceiling installations. Light-Duty Operators are UL 325 compliant and come equipped with LiftMaster Safety Sensors. Built-in 3-channel, 315 MHz radio receiver accepts LiftMaster Security+ Remote Controls. Single-Button Control Station allows for OPEN and CLOSE control with type B2 control wiring. Warranty: 1 Year. C44 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

77 Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator for Rolling Sheet Doors (3950) Light-Duty Series Trolley Operator (ATS) Model 3950 is a jackshaft operator for commercial rolling sheet door applications. The compact design of this system makes it ideal for public, boat and RV storage facilities. This Advanced Trolley System model operator is designed for use on residential or light-duty commercial door applications with standard lift doors. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C45

78 LIGHT-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS 3900 Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator THE 3900 IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON LIGHT-DUTY COMMERCIAL STANDARD AND HIGH LIFT (5 FT. HIGH LIFT MAX) SECTIONAL DOORS. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty 24VDC motor provides quiet operation and a smooth start and stop. Mounts on the left or right side of the door attaches directly to door torsion bar. Absolute Positioning Technology limit system enables ease of installation and adjustment to ensure accuracy even after a power failure. Security+ radio technology accepts (20) remote controls and unlimited DIP switch remote controls. Smart radio receiver for one-touch security code programming. Quick-Connect terminals for faster wire installation. 6 ft. power cord. Lifetime motor warranty. TECHNICAL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES For doors up to 14 ft. high or 18 ft. wide or 180 square ft. maximum and measuring up to a maximum high lift of 5 ft. Maximum allowable door weight is 650 lbs. Maximum recommended duty cycle: 10 cycles per hour. SAFETY The Protector System Safety Sensors included. Meets all UL 325 requirements. Provides an easy disconnect to allow door to be manually operated in an emergency. C46 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

79 OPERATORS Model...Voltage Phase Hz INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1 Push-Button Control Station (APBS1) Cable Tension Monitor (41A6104) Eliminates cable throw and will reverse the door when excessive slack is detected. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Power Door Lock (41A6102) Prevents the door from being manually forced open once fully closed. Battery Backup (475LM) Powers up even when the power is out. Alternate Mounting Kit (480LM) Designed for doors with low headroom (less than 3 in.) or obstructions near the end of the torsion bar, like a beam. Remote Work Light (380LM) Commercial space is lit up by placing this in any location within 6 ft. of an outlet. Provides 200 watts of light with 1/2 to 4 1/2 minute timer. 1-Button Remote Control (371LM) Program one commercial door operator with this remote control. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators. Controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. C47

80 LIGHT-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS 3950 Light-Duty Series Jackshaft Door Operator for Rolling Sheet Doors THE 3950 DOOR OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON COMMERCIAL ROLLING SHEET DOOR APPLICATIONS ONLY. It may be used on commercial rolling sheet doors with live or dead shaft measuring up to 12 ft. high and up to 14 ft. wide, but not exceeding 650 lbs. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS PERFORMANCE Heavy-duty 24VDC motor provides quiet operation and a smooth start and stop. Mounts on the left or right side of door using standard mounting brackets. An optional mounting bracket (3950MB) provides additional mounting flexibility either outside or inside the door opening. Absolute Positioning Technology limit system enables ease of installation and adjustment to ensure accuracy even after a power failure. Security+ radio technology accepts (20) remote controls and unlimited DIP switch remote control. Smart radio receiver for one-touch security code programming. Single-button control (SBC) allows for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP sequencing for all your door operation needs. Compact design ideal for storage facilities with limited side room; applications include public, boat and RV storage facilities. Includes both live and dead shaft door sprockets. Push button limit settings. 6 ft. power cord. Maximum door height 12 ft. Maximum door width 14 ft. Maximum allowable door weight is 650 lbs. Lifetime motor warranty. TECHNICAL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 10 cycles per hour. SAFETY The Protector System Safety Sensors included. Meets all UL 325 requirements Provides an easy disconnect to allow door to be manually operated in an emergency. C48 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

81 OPERATORS Model...Voltage Phase Hz INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1 Push-Button Control Station (APBS1) COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Chain Guard with Mounting Clip (3950CG) Required for applications where the 3950 is mounted less than 8 ft. from the floor, providing added safety. Mounting Bracket (3950MB) Provides further installation flexibility for new or retrofit applications. Dead Shaft Sprocket Kit for #41 Chain ( DS) Provides heavier #41 chain in place of standard #48 chain. Battery Backup (475LM) Powers up even when the power is out. Remote Work Light (380LM) Commercial space is lit up by placing this in any location within 6 ft. of an outlet. Provides 200 watts of light with 1/2- to 4 1/2-minute timer. 1-Button Remote Control (371LM) Program one commercial door operator with this remote control. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators. Controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. C49

82 LIGHT-DUTY SERIES COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS ATS Light-Duty Series Trolley Operator COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS THE ATS (ADVANCED TROLLEY SYSTEM) DOOR OPERATOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE ON RESIDENTIAL OR LIGHT-DUTY COMMERCIAL DOOR APPLICATIONS WITH STANDARD LIFT. For doors up to 14 ft. high. PERFORMANCE High-torque 1/2 HP, 115V single-phase motor with instant reverse. Heavy-duty steel I beam configured trolley track for doors up to 8 ft. high standard; 10 ft., 12 ft. and 14 ft. optional. Security+ radio technology accepts (20) remote controls and unlimited DIP switch remote controls. Smart radio receiver for one-touch security code programming. Auto-reconnect trolley. Motor overload protection. Automatic light delay. Door speed: approximately 5 7 in. per second. Warranty: 1 Year. SAFETY Automatic safety reverse/automatic door stop. The Protector System non-impact infrared safety device. Meets all UL 325 requirements. Provides easy, emergency manual operation using an easily accessible disconnect. TECHNICAL INFORMATION STANDARD SECTIONAL MAXIMUM DOOR AREA (SQ. FT.) 24 ga., 22 ga. Steel 20 ga. Steel 16 ga. Steel Fiberglass Alum. Doors Wood Doors 24 ga. Steel Insul. 20 ga. Steel Insul. 16 ga. Steel Insul. VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz OPERATOR AMP RATING (FULL LOAD) HP 1/ Ø 5.0 SQ. FT NOTE: On steel-insulated doors, a 24 ga. back panel is assumed. RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Maximum recommended duty cycle: 8 cycles per hour. C50 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

83 OPERATORS INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP Model...Voltage Phase Hz ATS2113X ATS2113X ATS2113X ATS2113X Extra Center Support Bracket, 1 each Door Control Button (41A4166) Push-button station provides momentary contact to open and close. COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Light Lens Cover (108D36) 3-Button Remote Control, Tri-Colored (333LM) Accommodates commercial operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions, Security+ Rolling Code Technology, with easy code selection, 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. 3-Button Remote Control (373LM) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators and commercial door operators. With Security+ Rolling Code Technology, users are assured of a new code with every use. 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Provides Security+ 2.0 Technology and also works with Security+ Technology found in the LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Operators. Controls up to three LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Must access Security+ Technology through Program mode in remote control. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. WARNING: This door operator is intended for use on vehicular doors. MOTORIZED VEHICULAR DOORS CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Use entrapment protection equipment and other safety accessories on every door system. C51

84 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MODIFICATIONS AT A GLANCE COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD Part No. Description Suffix Part I LOGIC ARK Auto-Reconnect Trolley Kit 1/3 and 1/2 HP Only M1 B Model No. Solenoid Brake M2 B Model No. Solenoid Brake, Hoisted Operators M3 NO LONGER APPLICABLE, SEE M2 B Model No. Solenoid Brake, Gearhead Operators M Friction Clutch 4 M Manual Hoist (#48 Chain) Modification M Manual Hoist (#41 Chain) Modification M Manual Hoist, Model GT BN M9 HJ/DHJ Manual Hoist, Models J and DJ M Manual Hoist, Center Mount M Auxiliary Trolley (#48 Chain) M Auxiliary Trolley (#41 Chain) M Dual Auxiliary (H and J #48 Chain) M Dual Auxiliary (H and J #41 Chain) M Dual Trolley Drive (#48 Chain) M Dual Trolley Drive (#41 Chain) M Minimum Depth Modification CA M Center Mount (Model J) M Center Mount (Model GH) CD M Slow-Speed Door, Belt BQ (Models T and SD) M Slow-Speed Door, Gear DT (Models GT and GSD M High-Cycle Mod. (Models T and SD) BH M Roller Bearing, 3/4 in. CS (Models T and SD) M A Roller Bearing (Models APT, T and SD) EC M Roller Bearing, 1 in. (Models J and H) BZ M Dual V-Belt Modification BI M Emergency Egress, Flush, 15 ft. M Emergency Egress, Flush, 30 ft. M Emergency Egress, Extended, 15 ft. M Emergency Egress, Extended, 30 ft. M Hand Crank (Models H and DHJ) AZ M Hand Crank (Model GH) AZ M Bi-Part Sliding Door Modification M Fusible Link, Single Slide M Fusible Link, Bi-Part Slide M35 See M39 Limit and Sprocket Modifications M39 90-MOTIONLADA Door-in-Motion Circuit Horn/Strobe 7 M40 65-LIMIT16 Limit and Sprocket Mod. for MDL KM M42 See M43 Horizontal Mount for GH AJ M43 Ref. No. C52 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

85 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MODIFICATIONS AT A GLANCE Part No. Description MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD Suffix Ref. No. POWER TRANSMISSION Part I LOGIC TEFC Motor 3 M Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure 9 M101 C Model No. Damp Environment Modification M102 N4 Model No. Watertight/Oiltight (NEMA 4,12) M103 N4X Model No. Corrosion-Resistant (NEMA 4X) M104 Part II MECHANICAL Dynamic Brake Modification AC M5 V Model No. Variable Speed M Decel. at Full Open/Close (with M37) AV M38 90-MOTIONMADA Door-in-Motion Circuit Horn/Strobe AY M40 90-MOTION Door-in-Motion Circuit AR M41 N7 Model No. Hazardous Area Mod. (NEMA 7/9) M JIC Specifications EN M Automotive Specifications BY M Automotive Specifications AP M Self-Reg. Heater 115V Plug CV M108 See M108 Self-Reg. Heater 230/460V Plug M109 PLEASE NOTE: Prices Are Added to List Price of Door Operator: Modifications must be ordered at the same time the door operator is ordered unless a kit part number is shown on the description page. The modification prices shown are published as an add to the list price of the door operator and do not reflect the cost of a modification purchased without an operator (for field installation where available), such as a Combination Reversing Starter (CRS). Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for specific details on a particular modification. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Costly and Prohibited Combinations: Certain combinations of modifications may together cost more than the sum of the costs for the individual modifications, or may not even be possible. This may also be true when combining certain modifications and accessories. Please carefully read the detailed description of the modifications being considered. If you have any questions, consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Modifications are not available for GH 5 HP Door Operators. C53

86 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MODIFICATIONS AT A GLANCE Part No. Description MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD Suffix Ref. No. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS CONTROL WIRING Part I LOGIC 90-MLMotion Door-in-Motion Circuit for MDL EX M46 71-MLMotion Door-in-Motion Field Kit for MDL M ML Non-Resettable Ctr. Mod. for MDL M ML Non-Resettable Counter Field Kit M47 90-MLAFCB Int. Har. for AFCB Rel. Dev. for MDL KN M48 90-MLSBC Single Button Cont. for MDL JA M49 71-MLSBC Single Button Cont. Field Kit M49 AUXCARD Auxiliary Contact Option Board M51 TLS1CARD Timer Light Status Option Card M MOC Aux. Mini, Limit Sws. (Wire Leads) 2 M MTOC Aux. Mini, Limit Sws. (Term. Conn.) 5 M63 65-ID Two-Door Interlock System M66 90-RL Reverse Limits 6 M67 FDRCARD FDR Plug-In Option Card M Non-Resettable Counter 1 M VAL 40VA Transformer CM M71 Part II MECHANICAL 90-TS TS Wiring Type AD M53 90-T T Wiring Type KJ M54 90-T1 T1 Wiring Type GJ M55 90-T2 T2 Wiring Type KT M56 90-D1 D1 Wiring Type KQ M57 90-E2 E2 Wiring Type KR M58 90-F2 F2 Wiring Type AE M Delay-on-Reverse Modification M M Mid-Stop Modification DS M Mid-Stop Field Kit M K Aux. Con. Blk., K Line (Wire Leads) GA M KT Aux. Con. Blk., K Line (Term. Conn.) GB M Long Dist. Cont. Wiring, 24VAC BM M Long Dist. Cont. Wiring Field Kit M68 90-EI Electrically Interlocked Contactor KP M Courtesy Light, Standard Operator CX M Courtesy Light Field Kit, Std. Operator M76 PLEASE NOTE: Prices Are Added to List Price of Operator: Modifications must be ordered at the same time the door operator is ordered unless a kit part number is shown on the description page. The modification prices shown are published as an add to the list price of the door operator and do not reflect the cost of a modification purchased without an operator (for field installation where available), such as a Combination Reversing Starter (CRS). Consult your Liftmaster Sales Representative for specific details on a particular modification. Costly and Prohibited Combinations: Certain combinations of modifications may together cost more than the sum of the costs for the individual modifications, or may not even be possible. This may also be true when combining certain modifications and accessories. Please carefully read the detailed description of the modifications being considered. If you have any questions, consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Modifications are not available for GH 5 HP Door Operators. C54 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

87 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MODIFICATIONS AT A GLANCE MT/BMT T GT APT MJ Ref. Part No. Description Suffix No. Part II MECHANICAL CONTROL WMS, NEMA 1, Screw Cover BA M WMS, NEMA 1 rated, Hinged Cover B M WMS, NEMA 4 rated, Hinged Cover AA M WMS, NEMA 12 rated, Hinged Cover BL M132A CRS, NFDS, NEMA 1 rated, Size 0 AQ M CRS, NFDS, NEMA 4 rated, Size 0 DK M CRS, NFDS, NEMA 12 rated, Size 0 M CRS, FDS, NEMA 1 rated, Size 0 BW M CRS, FDS, NEMA 4 rated, Size 0 CP M CRS, FDS, NEMA 12 rated, Size 0 BX M CRS, CB, NEMA 1 rated, Size 0, 250V FA M CRS, CB, NEMA 1 rated, Size 0, 480V EG M CRS, CB, NEMA 1 rated, Size 0, 600V EP M CRS, CB, NEMA 4 rated, Size 0, 250V HO M CRS, CB, NEMA 4 rated, Size 0, 480V DL M CRS, CB, NEMA 4 rated, Size 0, 600V HP M CRS, CB, NEMA 12 rated, Size 0, 250V GC M CRS, CB, NEMA 12 rated, Size 0, 480V EH M CRS, CB, NEMA 12 rated, Size 0, 600V GD M CRS, CB, NEMA 7/9 rated, Size 0, 250V HQ M CRS, CB, NEMA 7/9 rated, Size 0, 480V HR M CRS, CB, NEMA 7/9 rated, Size 0, 600V LE M External Reset OL, NEMA 1, 4, 12 EN M Size 1 Starter, NEMA 1, 4, 12 AG M Size 1 Starter, NEMA 7/9 LC M VA Transformer, NEMA 1, 4, 12 BD M155 J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C55

88 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M1 AUTO-RECONNECT TROLLEY (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) ARK Spring-loaded trolley features nylon inserts for quiet operation. Auto-reconnect feature eliminates the need to manually reattach the door arm to the trolley after emergency disconnect. For use on model MT and model T #48 roller chain (1/3 and 1/2 HP only). Standard on APT operators; cannot be used with manual hoist, auxiliary trolley, dual trolley or high-cycle modifi cations. NOTE: Internal-mounted brake is shown. External-mounted brake is installed outside the pulley belt. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M2 SOLENOID BRAKE FOR 1/2 HP T, J, H, DJ, DHJ (MAY BE INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL-MOUNTED) Model 65-1/2BRAKE Add a B prefi x to your operator model number to have a brake factory installed. Field Installation Kits: 71-EB1PH External-Mounted Brake Kit for single phase operators 71-EB3PH External-Mounted Brake Kit for three phase 208V, 230V and 460V operators 71-EB575-1 External-Mounted Brake Kit for three phase 575V operators Internal-mounted brakes are mounted behind the pulley. Internal brakes are a factory modification only. External-mounted brakes are mounted in front of the pulley. External brakes may be factory or field installed. To service the belt on an operator with an external-mounted brake, the brake must be removed. Brake provides up to 5 ft.-lb. of braking 1725 RPM motor shaft. Cannot be used with manual hoist, auxiliary trolley, dual trolley or high-cycle modifi cations. No factory-installed brake kits available on 1/3 HP operators. Brake standard on APT, SD and all Gearhead Logic 5.0 Operators. Brake standard on all 3/4 HP and higher Logic 5.0 Operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M3 AND M4 (NO LONGER APPLICABLE), SEE M2 All Logic 5.0 Gearhead Operators have factory installed brakes as standard on all models. C56 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

89 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M6 FRICTION CLUTCH MODIFICATION Used to adjust transmission of torque from motor to gear reducer for slip during starting. Mounted between motor and gear reducer; therefore, it does not provide protection for overloading of gear reducer, nor will it slip if door encounters an obstruction during travel. Must be factory installed. Not available on 3 HP, NEMA 4X or with the NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Area Modification (M105). NOTE: Not recommended for NEMA 4 rated door operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M7 MANUAL HOIST MODIFICATION #48 CHAIN 1/3 AND 1/2 HP TROLLEY OPERATORS (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) Provides hand chain operation for manually opening/closing the door. A chain wheel is coupled to a cross-header shaft, which in turn is coupled to the front idler of the drawbar. The front idler pulley is replaced by a #48 sprocket, thus allowing the chain wheel to drive the door arm. For use with door operators with #48 drive chain only. Brake release cable included. NOTE: Indicate door width and height when ordering. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M8 MANUAL HOIST MODIFICATION #41 CHAIN 3/4 AND 1 HP TROLLEY OPERATORS (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) Identical to (M7) except a #41 sprocket replaces the front idler pulley, allowing this version to be used with door operators with #41 drive chain. Includes floor-level brake release cable. Also for 1/3 and 1/2 HP trolley door operators with upgraded #41 chain. NOTE: Indicate door width and height when ordering. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M9 MANUAL HOIST FOR GT OPERATORS #41 CHAIN Identical to (M8) except a power train disconnect mechanism is provided in the door operator. This is necessary on gear-reduced door operators (model GT) because the gear reducer cannot be back-driven from the output. A power train release cable is included. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Indicate door width and height when ordering. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C57

90 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M10 MANUAL HOIST MODIFICATION FOR MODEL J J/DJ Model No. Order Operator Model HJ or DHJ Provides hand chain operation for manually opening or closing the door. For use with door operators that will be used on rolling grilles and doors where an emergency egress is required and where a chain hoist is necessary for emergency manual operation. The door disconnect mechanism for manual push-up, already built into the model J, is retained as well. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M12 MANUAL HOIST MODIFICATION FOR CENTER MOUNT (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) Provides reduced-drive disconnect hand chain hoist for manually opening or closing doors. May be used with or without a commercial door operator and connected to the door shaft with sprocket and chain drive. Since the door shaft rotates when the door is moved, the chain wheel is engaged or disengaged by a floor-level disconnect chain. Includes an interlock switch for commercial door operator control circuit. NOTE: See M7, M8 and M9 Modifications for use with MT, T, APT and GT. NOTE: Bearing plate and door shaft are not supplied with this modification. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M13 AUXILIARY TROLLEY MODIFICATION #48 CHAIN AND #41 CHAIN (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) #48 Chain #41 Chain If a side-mount door operator is used on a standard lift door without this modification, door cables may unravel and jump off cable drums, allowing the door to fall. This modification provides drawbar-type operation on standard lift doors where a side-mount door operator is preferred over a drawbar operator. The output shaft of the side-mount operator is connected to the cross-header shaft (supplied) at the front end of a drawbar arrangement. Includes up to 12 ft. track. For operators utilizing #48 chain, typically 1/3 and 1/2 HP operators, use model ( ). For 3/4 HP and higher operators, use model ( ). If the door is 22 ft. or wider, use a Dual Auxiliary Trolley Modification (M15). NOTES: 1. Requires that limits be reversed on door operator when ordered with a Logic 5.0 Door Operator. When ordering with Mechanical Powerheads, the (M67) Reverse Limits Modification should also be ordered. 2. Door width required when ordering. 3. Indicate door height when ordering. For doors over 12 ft. high, add rail and chain upcharge. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) NOTE: Bearing plate and door shaft are not supplied with this modification. MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ T J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C58 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

91 Be sure shaft is flush with sprocket. Do not let shaft protrude beyond sprocket. CHAIN COUPLING 48B14 Sprocket 1" BORE Drill 1/4" Hole - Pin with 1/4" X 1-1/2 Roll Pin 1" Diameter Shaft Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M15 DUAL AUXILIARY TROLLEY MODIFICATION #48 CHAIN AND #41 CHAIN (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) #48 Chain #41 Chain #41 Chain GH 1-1/2 and 2 HP only #41 Chain GH 3 HP only CONNECTING SHAFT DOUBLE IDLER ASSEMBLY EXTENSION SHAFT If a side-mount door operator is used on a standard lift door without this modification, door cables may unravel and jump off cable drums, allowing the door to fall. This modification provides drawbar-type operation on very wide (over 22 ft.) standard lift sectional doors where a side-mount door operator is preferred over a drawbar operator. The output shaft of the side-mount operator is connected to a cross-header shaft, which in turn is coupled to the drive shafts of two auxiliary trolley systems. Includes up to 12 ft. of track. For door operators utilizing #48 chain, typically 1/3 and 1/2 HP door operators, use model ( ). For 3/4 HP and higher door operators, use model ( ). GH, H, J OPERATOR DISCONNECT BRACKET NOTES: 1. Requires limits be reversed on operator when ordered with a Logic 5.0 Operator. When ordering with Mechanical Powerheads, the (M67) Reverse Limits Modification should also be ordered. 2. Requires Delay-on-Reverse feature, which is standard with Logic 5.0 Operators. When ordered with Mechanical Powerheads, the (M60) Delay-on-Reverse Modification should also be ordered, see (Part II). 3. Door width required when ordering. 4. Indicate door height when ordering. For doors over 12 ft. high, add rail upcharge. ADDITIONAL TRACK Required for doors higher than 12 ft. ft. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH M17 DUAL TROLLEY DRIVE MODIFICATION #48 CHAIN AND #41 CHAIN (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) #48 Chain #41 Chain SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS This model provides stabilization of drive system on very wide (over 22 ft.) standard lift sectional doors utilizing drawbar door operators. Will also greatly minimize the risk of damage to the top section of the door, which might otherwise occur on very wide doors driven by a single, centered drawbar system. The front idler pulley of the drawbar operator is replaced by a #48 sprocket, which acts as the drive for the second drawbar system. The two drawbar systems are coupled together by a cross-header shaft. Includes up to 12 ft. of track. For door operators utilizing #48 chain, typically 1/3 and 1/2 HP door operators, use model For 3/4 HP and higher and GT Door Operators, use model ( ). NOTES: 1. Door width required when ordering. 2. Indicate door height when ordering. For doors over 12 ft. high, add rail upcharge. 3. Requires Delay-on-Reverse feature, which is standard with Logic 5.0 Door Operators. When ordered with Mechanical Powerheads, the (M60) Delay-on-Reverse Modification should also be ordered. See Part II. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C59

92 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M19 MINIMUM DEPTH MODIFICATION Allows the powerhead unit of a drawbar door operator to be mounted at the side of the rail instead of on the end. Reduces the overall length dimension of a standard drawbar door operator by 18 in. If used in conjunction with a Damp Environment Modification (M102) or Watertight/Oiltight Modification (M101), the overall length is reduced by only 12 in. For standard overall length dimension, refer to drawbar product sheet. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M20 CENTER-MOUNT MODIFICATION FOR MODEL J (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) An additional stage of speed reduction is provided in the door operator to reduce the output speed to 24 RPM. This allows the unit to be directly coupled in the center of the door shaft. NOTE: Used only on sectional doors. Shaft coupling is not provided with this modification. Typically used with (M12) manual hoist modification. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ M21 CENTER-MOUNT MODIFICATION FOR MODEL GH Modifications to the chain hoist assembly allow the GH Door Operator to be vertically mounted over the center of the door shaft and the chain hoist to be rerouted to the side jamb. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Used only on sectional doors and must be ordered right- or left-handed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT J DJ DHJ T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M22 SLOW-SPEED DOOR MODIFICATION FOR MODELS T AND SD Required on belt drive drawbar or slide door operators to slow the door speed down from 1 ft./sec. to about 0.6 ft./sec. A third sprocket/ chain reduction is provided in the powerhead. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C60 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

93 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M23 SLOW-SPEED DOOR MODIFICATION FOR MODELS GT AND GSD Required on gear-reduced drawbar or slide door operators to slow the door speed down from 1 ft./sec. to 0.6 ft./sec. The speed reduction is achieved within secondary reduction of the door operator. The door operator powerhead is mounted in the normal manner. Must be factory installed. NOTE: The slower door speed allows a proportional increase in door size for the same HP model. With this modification, a GT50 will operate the same size door as a GT75 will at normal speed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ M24 HIGH-CYCLE MODIFICATION FOR MODEL T AND SD Helps to extend the life of 1/2 HP belt drive door operator that are used on doors where frequency of use is expected to be more than 100 cycles per day. Consists of heavy duty roller bearings on all shafts and upgrades to #41 drive chain. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Not necessary on gear-reduced operators. Not available on side-mount belt drive door operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ M25 ROLLER BEARING MODIFICATION FOR MODELS T AND SD Helps to extend the life of the drive system of T and SD Door Operators. Consists of heavy duty roller bearings on both shafts in the operator frame. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M26 ROLLER BEARING MODIFICATION FOR SLOW SPEED MODELS T, APT AND SD A Helps to extend the life of the drive system of slow speed T, APT and SD Door Operators. Consists of heavy duty roller bearings on all 3 shafts in the operator frame. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C61

94 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M27 ROLLER BEARING MODIFICATION FOR MODELS J AND H HL Model H Left Hand HR Model H Right Hand J Model J Helps to extend the life of the drive system of belt drive side-mount door operators. Consists of heavy-duty roller bearings on all shafts. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M28 DUAL V-BELT MODIFICATION Provides a second belt to increase belt life and meet architectural specifi cations. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M29 EMERGENCY EGRESS MODIFICATION FLUSH HANDLE PANIC RELEASE (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) ft. of Cable ft. of Cable Provides a public means for manual operation of a storefront grille. Attractive faceplate mounts fl ush on store wall and contains pullhandle to disconnect the door operator from the grille, thereby allowing the grille to be opened manually or by spring tension. Faceplate is silk-screened with user instructions. Comes with 15 ft. or 30 ft. of cable. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD M30 EMERGENCY EGRESS MODIFICATION EXTENDED HANDLE PANIC RELEASE (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) ft. of Cable ft. of Cable Provides a public means for manual operation of a storefront grille. Attractive faceplate mounts fl ush on store wall and contains an EXTENDED pull-handle to disconnect the door operator from the grille, thereby allowing the grille to be opened manually or by spring tension. Faceplate is silk-screened with user instructions. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C62 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

95 Available Modifi cation (See specifi c item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M31 HAND CRANK MODIFICATION FOR MODELS H AND DHJ Replaces operator hand chain wheel and chain with hook-and-eyelet connection for extended fl oor-level hand crank. In addition to door operator modifi cation, crank and connecting hardware are provided. Requires 1/2 in. electrical conduit or pipe (not supplied) in a length suffi cient to allow fl oor-level operation. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Cannot be used if door operator is mounted horizontally. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M32 HAND CRANK MODIFICATION (GH SERIES) V Vertically Mounted Operator H Horizontally Mounted Operator Replaces operator hand chain wheel and chain with hook-and-eyelet connections for extended fl oor-level hand crank. In addition to door operator modifi cation, crank and connecting hardware are provided. Requires 1/2 in. electrical conduit or pipe (not supplied) in a length suffi cient to allow fl oor-level operation. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Must specify vertical or horizontal mount at time of order. (Horizontal mount pictured.) FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH M33 BI-PART SLIDING DOOR MODIFICATION (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) Required on slide door operators where one door operator is used to open two bi-parting doors, one sliding left and the other sliding right to open. Includes a modifi ed second slider and a second door bracket mechanism. Door operator powerhead is not affected. However, door operator horsepower must be selected using the area (in square feet) of the entire door opening. On narrow openings, it may be necessary to speed up the limit shaft for proper operation. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for additional cost. NOTE: Overall width of door opening must be provided. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M34 FUSIBLE LINK MODIFICATION FOR SINGLE SLIDE DOOR (FIELD INSTALLED HARDWARE KIT) Used to mechanically release a sliding fi re door from the door operator. A fusible link holds a cylindrical weight attached to the manual door release of a slide door operator. When the fusible link melts, the weight drops and releases the door. The door can then close by means of gravity (inclined track design) or by counterweight (by others). May not meet all building or regulatory codes; please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for additional specifi cations. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C63

96 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M35 FUSIBLE LINK MODIFICATION FOR BI-PARTING SLIDE DOOR Identical to (M34) except two release mechanisms are provided, one for each door of a bi-part sliding fire door. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M39 LIMIT AND SPROCKET MODIFICATIONS Many applications require non-standard door speeds or limit travel. By changing the door, operator or limit sprockets supplied with a commercial door operator, we are able to adjust the speed at which a door opens and closes. Also, by modifying limit sprockets, larger doors that require longer limit travel may also be addressed. Most commonly requested limit modification is the (65-LIMIT18). Please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative with your specific application for pricing and specifications. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M40 DOOR-IN-MOTION CIRCUIT-LOGIC 90-MOTIONLADA Logic Operators with Horn/Strobe The motion modification is to be used when the installation requires an ADA-compliant horn/strobe when door is in motion for Mechanical/Logic Door Operators. This is usually specification-driven. This provides 24VDC power when the operator is running. As only 10VA extra capacity has been provided for with the included transformer upgrade, the number of horn/strobe devices that can be connected is limited to one (1). Horn/Strobe (LMHS2475WPADA, white) included. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD M43 HORIZONTAL MOUNT MODIFICATION FOR GH R HORIZONTAL MOUNT 1 HP (RH) L HORIZONTAL MOUNT 1 HP (LH) NR HORIZONTAL MOUNT NEMA 4 1 HP (RH) NL HORIZONTAL MOUNT NEMA 4 1 HP (LH) R HORIZONTAL MOUNT 2 HP (RH) L HORIZONTAL MOUNT 2 HP (LH) NR HORIZONTAL MOUNT NEMA 4 2 HP (RH) NL HORIZONTAL MOUNT NEMA 4 2 HP (LH) Note: Left (LH) and Right (RH) indicate the hoist and drive sprocket handing. This modification alters the orientation of the electrical box on a GH Door Operator. This modification is used when the GH Door Operator is to be shelf mounted (motor and reducer are mounted horizontally instead of mounting vertically) and there will be insufficient room above the operator to access the electrical box. The electrical box orientation changes so that it faces into the room, instead of the ceiling, providing easy access. A D B Y C X HP Phase DIMENSIONS Dimension A B C D 1/ / / / / / NOTES: 1) Output Shaft: 1 in. dia. with 1/4 in. key for 1/2 through 1 HP door operators 1-3/16 in. dia. with 5/16 in. key for 1/2 through 1-1/2 and 2HP door operators 2) Mounting Centers: X = 4-3/4 in. Y = 5-1/2 in. for 1/2 through 2 HP door operators X = 3-17/32 in. Y = 9-1/16 in. for 3 HP door operators C64 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

97 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M42 LIMIT AND SPROCKET MODIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC 65-LIMIT16 Alternative limit sprocket with 16 teeth in lieu of 9-tooth sprocket. Many applications require non-standard door speeds or limit travel. By modifying limit sprockets, larger doors that require longer limit travel may also be addressed. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M47 NON-RESETTABLE COUNTER MODIFICATION FOR MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC ML ML M48 INTERFACE HARNESS FOR AFCB RELEASE DEVICE FOR MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC 90-MLAFCB Provides a point-to-point interface for connecting a Medium-Duty Logic Door Operator to the LM21AFCB fire door release mechanism. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT Non-Resettable Counter Field Kit A 6-digit non-resettable 24VAC electromechanical counter is mounted in the door operator control enclosure. The device counts the number of times the CLOSE coil is energized (M wiring) or whenever the operator reaches an auxiliary open limit switch (medium duty wiring). This corresponds to the number of complete door cycles of use (counts both partial or complete cycles as one cycle). This modification, when combined with other modifications, may not fit inside a standard door operator s electrical box and an upgraded electrical enclosure may be required. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions or if the door operator has 120V control circuits. May be factory or field installed. To order a kit for field installation on an existing door operator, use kit part number shown. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M49 SINGLE-BUTTON CONTROL FOR MEDIUM-DUTY LOGIC 90-MLSBC 71-MLSBC Single-Button Control Field Kit This modification kit provides an additional input for single-button control functionality. The input will function as a CLOSE input when the door operator is stopped at the OPEN limit. The input will function as an OPEN input at all other times. Required on Medium-Duty Logic Door Operators for single-button control with external radio receivers. Recommended factory installed, but field modification kits are available. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C65

98 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M51 AUXILIARY CONTACT OPTION BOARD AUXCARD Provides additional contacts for and control of auxiliary devices such as external heaters, security devices or warning devices (5V to 240VAC). M52 TIMER LIGHT STATUS OPTION CARD TLS1CARD Works in conjunction with Logic 4.0 and Logic 5.0 to provide seven DIP switch, fi eld-selectable modifi cations, including six door traffi c control options and a means to connect external OPEN and CLOSE limits. Traffi c control light ordered separately (RGL24LY). COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M62 AUXILIARY LIMIT SWITCH WIRE LEADS MOC OPEN and CLOSE K M2L5 Field Kit (Two Switches) Provides two limit switches, for use by others, to control auxiliary devices such as lights, heaters, dock levelers or other equipment. The switches can be used to turn on or off such equipment when the door is fully opened or fully closed. Each switch is SPDT (form C), is rated 10 Amps at 125/250VAC and is provided with three wire leads for wire nut connection to the fi eld wiring. Recommended factory installed, but field modification kits are available. Not available with the Hazardous Area Modifi cation (M105) or Variable Speed Modifi cation (M37). NOTE: This modifi cation is available for both Logic Door Operators and Mechanical Powerheads. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M63 AUXILIARY LIMIT SWITCHES TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTIONS MTOC K MT2L5 OPEN and CLOSE Field Kit (Two Switches) Same as (M62) except terminal block connection points instead of wire leads are provided for fi eld wiring. Recommended factory installed, but field modification kits are available. Not available with Hazardous Area Modifi cation (M105) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifi cations. This modifi cation, when combined with other modifi cations, may not fi t inside a standard door operator s electrical box, and an upgraded electrical enclosure may be required. NOTE: This modifi cation is available for both Logic Door Operators and Mechanical Powerheads (see Part II). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD M66 TWO-DOOR INTERLOCK SYSTEM (AIRLOCK) Formerly ordered as 65-ID, order M62 or M63 Used for two-door systems when only one door can be open at a time, as in a security application such as a sally port. Provides a limit switch and terminals in the door operator for interdependent operation; one door will not electrically operate unless the other door is closed. Requires four wires between the two door operators. This modifi cation must be added to each operator of the pair. If the interconnection wires will be over 50 feet long, please consult the factory. If more than two doors are to be interlocked, please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Recommended factory installed, but field modification kits are available. NOTE: This modifi cation is available for both Logic Door Operators and Mechanical Powerheads. (see Part II). C66 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

99 Available Modifi cation (See specifi c item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M67 REVERSE LIMITS 90-RL In this modifi cation, the OPEN and CLOSE limit switches are physically interchanged and the motor rotation is reversed. This modifi cation is necessary if the door operator will have to run in the opposite direction from normal operation, such as in a through-the-wall installation, on certain rolling fi re doors or if the door operator is mounted upside down. If necessary, this modification may be performed in the field, but it is not recommended due to the likelihood of disrupting the control wiring. NOTE: This modifi cation may be ordered for Logic 5.0 Door Operators, Medium-Duty Logic and Mechanical Powerheads. For Logic 5.0 Operators, the safety limit switch will be reversed and the motor direction switch on the Logic 5.0 board will be set to reverse. For Medium-Duty Logic and Mechanical Powerhead Door Operators, all three limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE and SAFETY) and the motor wiring will be reversed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M69 FDR PLUG-IN OPTION CARD FDRCARD For use in conjunction with the LiftMaster Logic 5.0 Door Operator. The FDRCARD facilitates fi eld connections between the release device and the door operator by reducing the standard 10-wire interconnection to the basic 4-wire phone card. Both the FDRCARD and the LM21AFCB (purchased through manufacturers of fi re doors) are equipped with an RJ-11 phone jack as standard to accept the phone cord. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M70 NON-RESETTABLE COUNTER MODIFICATION L5 Non-Resettable Counter Field Kit A 6-digit non-resettable 24VAC counter is mounted in the door operator control enclosure. The device counts the number of times the operator reaches an auxiliary OPEN limit switch (Logic 5.0 wiring) or whenever the CLOSE coil is energized (M wiring). This corresponds to the number of complete door cycles of use (counts both partial and complete cycles as one cycle). This modifi cation, when combined with other modifi cations, may not fi t inside a standard door operator s electrical box and an upgraded electrical enclosure may be required. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions or if the operator has 120V control circuits. Not available with Hazardous Area Modifi cation (M105). Recommended factory installed, but field kits are available. NOTE: This modifi cation is available for both Logic Door Operators and Mechanical Powerheads (see Part II). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M71 40VA TRANSFORMER MODIFICATION VAL Upgrades the transformer in the door operator from 20VA to 40VA. This modifi cation allows for additional control circuit power for auxiliary equipment such as loop detectors and other devices. Must be factory installed. NOTE: A 40VA transformer is standard on 575V models only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C67

100 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M100 TEFC MOTOR (TOTALLY ENCLOSED, FAN COOLED) A standard door operator is supplied with an ODP (Open, Drip-Proof) Motor. The TEFC modifi cation replaces the ODP Motor with a fully enclosed motor for applications where the door operator is expected to be located in a harsh environment (moisture, spray, fl ying particles, dirt). A fan is attached to the back of the motor for cooling purposes but is not enclosed itself. Must be factory installed. NOTE: This modifi cation is typically suffi cient to satisfy specifi cations that call for a TENV (Totally Enclosed, Non-Ventilated) Motor. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for assistance. NOTE: (M100) TEFC Motor and (M101) Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure Only are not offered as paired modifi cations. If both modifi cations are required, please order (M102) Damp Environment Modifi cation. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT/BMT T GT APT MJ M101 WATERTIGHT/OILTIGHT CONTROL ENCLOSURE ONLY In this modifi cation, all electrical control equipment on the door operator is enclosed in a Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure. If the door operator is supplied with a solenoid brake, the solenoid itself is not considered part of the electrical control equipment (it has no electrical contact points) and is therefore supplied in a general-purpose enclosure only. If a separate wall-mounted starter is required to meet application specifi cations or environmental conditions, this modifi cation may be required to enclose door operator limits and interlock switches. In this case, please add both the wall-mounted starter and (M101) Modifi cation to the base door operator list price. Must be factory installed. This modifi cation does not affect the standard Open Drip-Proof (ODP) Motor. NOTE: The price for this modifi cation does not include Watertight/Oiltight Enclosures for push-button stations or other similar remote control stations. NOTE: (M100) TEFC Motor and (M101) Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure Only are not offered as paired modifi cations. If both modifi cations are required, please order the (M102) Damp Environment Modifi cation. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M102 DAMP ENVIRONMENT MODIFICATION* C Model No. Provides a TEFC Motor (M100), Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure (M101), Watertight/Oiltight 3-Button Control Station and nickelplated chain in place of all standard roller chains on the door operator. Must be factory installed. NOTE: When ordering this modifi cation, the solenoid brake is removed, except when used with Gearhead Operators. NOTE: All door operators with this modifi cation include the price of NEMA 4 rated photo eyes. If an Optical Edge System (OES) is ordered in place of photo eyes, an upcharge will be added. Specify your choice of safety device at the time of order entry. Not available on 1/3 HP. *Formerly known as Carwash Modifi cation. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C68 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

101 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board LOGIC OPERATORS POWER TRANSMISSION M103 WATERTIGHT/OILTIGHT/DUST-TIGHT MODIFICATION (NEMA 4, 12) N4 Model No. Provides more complete protection against water spray, oil and other fluids than the Damp Environment Modification (M102). Includes a TEFC Motor (M100), Watertight/Oiltight Control Enclosure (M101), Watertight/Oiltight 3-Button Control Station, nickel-plated chain and a Dynamic Brake replacing the solenoid brake. See (M5) Dynamic Brake Modification for a description of this brake. This allows the brake to also be contained in a Watertight/Oiltight Enclosure. A Delay-on-Reverse Circuit (M60) is included with this modification. Must be factory installed. IMPORTANT: Must identify handing of drive sprocket and hoist. NOTE: All door operators with this modification include CPS-UN4 Photo Eyes. If an Edge Interface Device is ordered in place of a CPS- UN4, a list price reduction will occur. Specify your choice of safety device at the time of order entry. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M104 CORROSION-RESISTANT MODIFICATION (NEMA 4X) N4X Model No. Provides Watertight/Oiltight and corrosion-resistant components wherever possible on the door operator. Includes a Wash Down or Dirty Duty motor which is far superior to a TEFC Motor in highly corrosive environments. Also includes NEMA 4X rated operator control enclosure, NEMA 4X rated 3-button control station, Dynamic Brake (M5), Delay-on-Reverse Circuit (M60), nickel-plated chain and corrosion-resistant coating on other door operator components wherever possible. Must be factory installed. IMPORTANT: Must identify handing of drive sprocket and hoist. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS NOTE: Recommend stainless steel hand chain and sash chain for highly corrosive environments. 65-SSHAND 34 ft. Hand Chain Stainless Steel 65-SSHAND46 46 ft. Hand Chain Stainless Steel 65-SSSASH 12 ft. Sash Chain Stainless Steel Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for stainless steel chain pricing. C69

102 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS DOOR OPERATOR MODIFICATIONS Part II references the Variable Speed door operators, NEMA 7/9 rated door operators and a select group of GH and GT Mechanical (contactor-style) Powerhead units that may be used in conjunction only with Wall Mount Starter and Combination Reversing Starter panels. The modifications noted in Part II are available only in conjunction with the panels and powerhead units, as noted. The separate starter modifications provide a wall-mountable enclosure designed to house all electrical control equipment not integral to the powerhead. These modifications are required to meet certain architectural specifications, or when it is not possible to fit optional components into the standard operator-mounted electrical enclosure. The modifications in this section are based upon ordering the separate starter with a Mechanical Powerhead. If you require a starter without a powerhead, please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for proper pricing and application assistance. Also, modifications (M152, M153 and M155) apply to powerheads that include one of the following separate starter modifications, (M131 M147). (M154) applies to powerheads that include one of the following separate starter modifications, (M148-M150). In most cases, the Wall-Mounted Starter will contain the transformer(s), control relays and other optional components wired to terminals inside the enclosure. The motor, limit assembly and limit switches, internal interlock switch and solenoid brake often remain on the door operator or in the door operator electrical box. Except for the (M130) modification, the separate starters have the electrical components mounted on a removable subpanel for easy maintenance. Terminal points are provided for the field wiring between the powerhead and the wall starter. Wiring for all control stations and safety equipment is intended to be located on terminals within the separate starter. Note: All Wall-Mount Starter and Combination Reversing Starter Panels, (M106 M107) and (M130 M155), may be ordered with or without a UL 508 label. Pricing shown for these panels assumes non-ul-labeled product. Contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative for a quote on the UL 508 labeled panel. Available Powerhead Units All powerhead units listed below are Mechanical (contactor-style) Powerhead units. All modifications that follow are for use in conjunction with a starter panel and powerhead unit only and are not applicable to Logic 5.0 Door Operators. As noted, all powerhead units shown below must be used in conjunction with a starter panel and are not intended for separate purchase. To calculate an overall list price, add together the individual list prices for the appropriate starter panel, powerhead unit and applicable modifications. For assistance, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. AVAILABLE POWERHEAD UNITS Model Volts Phase Hz GH5011M GH5021M GH5023M 208/ GH5043M GH5053M GH1011M GH1021M GH1023M 208/ GH1043M GH1053M GH2023M 208/ GH2043M GH2053M GH3023M 208/ GH3043M GH3053M GT5011M GT5021M GT5023M 208/ GT5043M GT5053M GT1511M GT1521M GT1523M 208/ GT1543M GT1553M C70 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

103 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M5 DYNAMIC BRAKE MODIFICATION Provides active electrical braking in the form of DC current to stop the motor. Acts as a stopping brake only, not a holding brake. This modification is considered most useful on gear-reduced door operators (GT, GH) where the gear reducer may help act as a holding brake or where a solenoid brake is not desired. It is also recommended for use when extremely high braking requirements are anticipated. May be used in conjunction with a solenoid brake. Normally provided in a separate wall-mounted enclosure to be mounted near, and field connected to the door operator. A dynamic brake is standard on NEMA 4, 12 rated (M103), NEMA 4X rated (M104), NEMA 7/9 rated (M105) and Variable Speed (M37) modifications, and includes a Delay-on-Reverse Circuit (M60). Because of space requirements, this modification cannot be used with many options without also adding a Wall-Mounted Starter. Must be factory installed. Starter panel modification only. NOTE: See NEMA 4 rated modifications for Logic 5.0 options. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ M37 VARIABLE SPEED MODIFICATION V Model No. Replaces AC motor and control circuit in a door operator with a DC variable speed drive control and permanent magnet DC motor. May be supplied for either 115VAC 1Ø or 230VAC 1Ø power. Allows adjustment of door speed over a wide range; consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for specific applications. Dual-speed applications may be possible with faster open cycle and slower close cycle. Must consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for specific applications and additional costs for this added feature. Acceleration adjustment gives ramp up or soft starts to allow operation of very heavy doors. Dynamic brake and current limit circuits replace mechanical brake and clutch respectively, minimizing the number of moving parts that may wear out. Suitable for continuous duty and high-cycling applications. Please note that this modification will usually affect the horsepower selection for a given model. Higher speeds require higher horsepower for the same door. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for specific horsepower rating information on your application. Not for use on Logic 5.0 Door Operators; Mechanical Operators only. WARNING: Safety equipment must be used with door operators employing this modification (see CDO Accessories Section). NOTE: Not available in conjunction with any Hazardous Area Modification (M105), on any door operator above 1 HP or on any door operator requiring 3-phase power. Specify door speed when ordering. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C71

104 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M38 DECELERATION AT FULL OPEN/ CLOSE Available only on door operators with Variable Speed Modification (M37). Provides an adjustable ramp down or soft stop at the full-open and full-close position. Recommended on very heavy doors, doors requiring speeds faster than normal or where high door usage is expected. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for recommendations for your application. Must be factory installed. Many applications require non-standard door speeds or limit travel. By changing the door, operator or limit sprockets supplied with a commercial door operator, we are able to adjust the speed at which a door opens and closes. Also, by modifying limit sprockets, larger doors that require longer limit travel may also be addressed. Please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative with your specific application for pricing and specifications. Not for use on Logic 5.0 Door Operators; mechanical operators only. NOTE: Door will not ramp down when using STOP button or reversed in mid-travel. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M40 DOOR-IN-MOTION CIRCUIT MECHANICAL 90-MOTIONMADA Mechanical Operators with Horn/Strobe This modification is to be used when the installation requires an ADA-compliant horn/ strobe when door is in motion for Mechanical/Logic Door Operators. This is usually specification driven. This provides 24VDC power when the door operator is running. As only 10VA extra capacity has been provided for with the transformer upgrade, the number of horn/strobe devices that can be connected is limited to one (1). Horn/Strobe ( , white) included. Starter panel modification only. Must Be Factory Installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M41 DOOR-IN-MOTION CIRCUIT 90-MOTION The 90-MOTION modification provides two auxiliary contact blocks and a 3-position terminal block to power an auxiliary device while the door is in motion. Auxiliary device and power supplied by others. Starter panel modification only. NOTE: For Logic 5.0, see modification (M51). NOTE: T, TS, D1, E2 and F2 wiring types are standard features on Logic 5.0 Door Operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T T GT GT GT APT APT APT MJ MJ MJ J J J DJ DJ DJ DHJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS MH/MHS H H H GH GH GH SD SD SD GSD GSD GSD M53 TS WIRING TYPE (TIMER SECURE) 90-TS Momentary contact to open, close and stop, with Open Override and Timer to Close. The timer is easily adjustable in 1-second increments from 1 second to 17 minutes via DIP switches. Every momentary contact (OPEN, CLOSE and STOP) that causes the door to open will activate Timer to Close, including sensing devices to reverse. Timer may be deactivated permanently by use of an optional Timer Defeat Switch (50402). Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M54 T WIRING TYPE 90-T Momentary contact to open, close and stop, with Open Override and Timer to Close. OPEN button may be connected to activate timer, if desired. Auxiliary controls may be connected to open and activate Timer to Close, or to open and close without activating timer. If timer has been activated, all opening devices will recycle timer. Timer may be deactivated permanently by use of an optional Timer Defeat Switch (50402). Includes wiring for sensing devices to reverse but not reactivate timer. Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M55 T1 WIRING TYPE 90-T1 Will function the same as TS wiring above. Also provides a second set of contact points for A/V devices. Has the ability to provide a 9-second pre-warning before timed door closure. Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M56 T2 WIRING TYPE 90-T2 Same as T1, but gives the ability to isolate the OPEN button station, allowing a transmitter to cycle the timer, while another OPEN device would not. Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T T T GT GT GT GT APT APT APT APT MJ MJ MJ MJ J J J J DJ DJ DJ DJ DHJ DHJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS MH/MHS MH/MHS H H H H GH GH GH GH SD SD SD SD GSD GSD GSD GSD C72 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

105 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M57 D1 WIRING TYPE 90-D1 Constant contact to open and close with the wiring for sensing device to stop. If a safety edge will be used, it should be an electric edge so that the door cannot restart in the close direction if the edge is obstructed. Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M58 E2 WIRING TYPE 90-E2 Momentary contact to open with Open Override and constant contact to close. Release of the CLOSE button will cause the door to reverse (roll-back feature) plus wiring for sensing device to reverse. A 2-button NEMA 1 rated control station is included. Starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M59 F2 WIRING TYPE 90-F2 Required for use with 4-wire fail-safe type electrical edges on mechanical door operators. Must be factory installed. Not for use on Logic 5.0 Door Operators; starter panel modification only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T T GT GT GT APT APT APT MJ MJ MJ J J J DJ DJ DJ DHJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS MH/MHS H H H GH GH GH SD SD SD GSD GSD GSD M60 DELAY-ON-REVERSE MODIFICATION Factory Installed 1 Delay Reverse Kit for 1Ø Operators Factory Installed 3 Delay Reverse Kit for 3Ø Operators Delay Reverse Field Kit for 1Ø Operators Delay Reverse Field Kit for 3Ø Operators Modifies door operator control circuit so that the door must stop for one second before reversing or restarting, in either direction. Prevents shock loading of the door and operator, resulting in longer life. Recommended for heavy doors and where frequent reversing may be expected due to high usage. May be factory or field installed. To order a kit for field installation on an existing operator, use the kit part number shown. Starter panel modification only; standard feature on Logic 5.0 Door Operators. NOTE: Required for (M15) Dual Auxiliary Modification and (M17) Dual Trolley Drive Modification. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M61 MID-STOP MODIFICATION M Mid-Stop Field Kit Provides a limit switch for stopping the door at a field adjustable, preset mid-position while opening. For field installation, use the kit part number shown. Not available with the Hazardous Area (M105) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifications. When modification is combined with a Timer to Close, please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Override of the mid-stop is possible by constant pressure on the OPEN button. Door will not stop at mid-stop when closing. Will not work with single-button radio control. May be factory or field installed. To order a kit for field installation on an existing door operator, use the kit part number shown. Not available with Hazardous Area (M105) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifications. Starter panel modification only; standard feature on Logic 5.0 Door Operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C73

106 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M64 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK WITH WIRE LEADS, K LINE K Provides additional contacts on the reversing contactor to control auxiliary devices such as lights or audible devices that are to be on or off when the door is moving in a particular direction. A maximum of two contact blocks can be supplied, one on the OPEN cycle and one on the CLOSE cycle. Each contact block has one normally OPEN (form A) and one normally CLOSED (form B) contact that can be used independently or paired to make a form C contact and is rated 10 Amps at 125/250VAC. Four wire leads are provided for wire nut connection to the field wiring. When ordering, specify whether the contact block will be on the OPEN or the CLOSE side of the contactor. Must be factory installed. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for field modification kits. Not available with Hazardous Area (M105), Dynamic Brake (M5) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifications. Starter panel modification only. Not for use with Logic 5.0 Door Operators; use (M51) modification instead. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M65 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTIONS, K LINE KT Same as (M64) except terminal block connection points instead of wire leads are provided for field wiring. Must be factory installed. Not available with Hazardous Area (M105) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifications. This modification, when combined with other modifications, may not fit inside a standard door operator s electrical box and an upgraded electrical enclosure may be required. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions. Starter panel modification only. Not for use with Logic 5.0 Operators; use (M51) modification instead. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD M68 LONG-DISTANCE WIRING (24VAC) Long-Distance Wiring Kit Field Kit (24VAC) A necessity when controls are to be located more than 100 ft. from the door operator. Allows up to 1,000 ft. of control wiring between controls and door operator with 16-gauge wire. May be factory or field installed. When not ordered at the same time as the door operator, use the kit part number shown. Not necessary or available with Hazardous Area (M105) or Variable Speed (M37) Modifications. Starter panel modification only; not required for Logic 5.0 Door Operators. NOTE: Not necessary on Logic Door Operators. Logic Controls are rated for 1,000 ft. control runs utilizing 18-gauge wire. WARNING: It is strongly recommended that all controls be located so that the person operating the control has a clear view of the door opening and the moving door. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M72 ELECTRICALLY INTERLOCKED CONTACTOR 90-EI Additional control circuit components are supplied with this modification to prevent the OPEN coil of the reversing contactor from being electrically energized when the CLOSE coil is held in, and vice versa. NOTE: Since the reversing contactor is mechanically interlocked as a matter of standard procedure, this modification is necessary only to meet certain stringent architectural specifications. Must be factory installed. Starter panel modification only; not available for Logic 5.0 Door Operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD C74 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

107 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M76 COURTESY LIGHT MODIFICATION STANDARD OPERATOR Provides a light socket on the door operator control enclosure. The light will turn on when the door starts to open and remains on for several minutes via the thermal switch. Similar to the courtesy light in a standard residential garage door opener. Accepts up to a 100- watt bulb that is not included and requires a separate 115V power supply for the light if the door operator is not a 115V unit. The light delay is not adjustable and is affected by the temperature. Average time light stays on is approximately 90 seconds. May be factory or field installed. To order a kit for field installation, use ( ). Starter panel modification only; not available for Logic 5.0 Door Operators or Hazardous Area Modification (M105). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T M105 HAZARDOUS AREA MODIFICATION (NEMA 7/9) WALL-MOUNT VERSION IMPORTANT NOTE: Chamberlain /LiftMaster does not have third-party regulatory listing or certification for the complete electric operator with this Hazardous Area Modification. Ask your LiftMaster Sales Representative for the LiftMaster Positional Document for Hazardous Area Modification. The Use of Intrinsically Safe Control Circuits. N7 Model No. Modifies a door operator to meet specifications for hazardous locations defined by NEC Article 501, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Group D, and Article 502, Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups F and G. The modification includes a hazardous area motor and separate Wall Mount Starter with intrinsically safe control circuit. Since the control circuit is intrinsically safe, control circuit components (limit switches, control station) are housed in general-purpose enclosures in accordance with NEC Article 504. A Dynamic Brake and Delay-on-Reverse Circuit are included with this modification. No friction clutch or solenoid brake is supplied on any door operator with this modification. The door operator must be factory supplied with this modification, not field modified. Specific NEC Article 501 and 502 specifications are required when ordering this modification. This modification comes wired B2; if another application is required, please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative. NOTE: This modification is not compatible with many other modifications and accessories, such as photo eyes, auxiliary limits and radio controls. Typically used accessories include 2-Wire Electric Edges, Pneumatic Edges, 3-Button Stations and Door Interlocks. Please consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions regarding compatibility. Hazardous Area Modification for 3 HP GH requires an additional price premium; not available on 5 HP. 90 Group C Motor Upgrade This modification provides a NEMA 7/9 rated motor for Class 1, Division 1, Group C environments in lieu of the standard motor provided on the NEMA 7/9 rated door operators, which are rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D and Class II, Division 1, Groups F and G. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C75

108 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M106 JIC SPECIFICATIONS MODIFICATION Modifies a door operator to generally meet JIC (Joint Industry Conference) specifications for electrical equipment in industrial locations (some minor exceptions are taken). Includes a TEFC Motor, Oiltight/Dust-Tight Rotary Limit Switches, Oiltight/Dust-Tight 3-Button Control Station and a separate wall-mounted Combination Reversing Starter. The starter is an industrial size 1 with a Fusible Disconnect Switch in a NEMA 12 rated enclosure. The control circuit is 115VAC and the door operator supply voltage is available on 115V, 230V or 460V 1Ø and 3Ø operators. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M107 AUTOMOTIVE SPECIFICATIONS MODIFICATION (FORMERLY GM SPECIFICATIONS MODIFICATION) Includes 14-Gauge Tagged and Numbered Wire Modifies a door operator to generally meet GM (General Motors) specifications for electrical equipment in industrial locations (some minor exceptions are taken). Includes a LiftMaster stock totally enclosed motor, NEMA 12 rated Rotary Limit Switches, NEMA 12 rated 3-Button Control Station and a separate wall-mounted Combination Reversing Starter. The starter is a NEMA size 1 with a Fusible Disconnect Switch (flange-mount type) in a NEMA 12 rated enclosure and a 120VAC control circuit. Must be factory installed. NOTE: Available on 460VAC 3Ø door operators only. Consult your LiftMaster Sales Representative for availability on other voltages. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT M108 SELF-REGULATING HEATER, 115V (PLUG TYPE) For 2 and 3 HP GH Operators For 1/2 and 1 HP GH Operators. (Includes required upgraded gear reducer) An immersion heater is inserted in the drain opening of the gear reducer. Heater is self-regulating and keeps gear oil warm to prevent sluggish operation or overloading in cold weather. Heater will shut off above 45Fº. Requires 115V power. For door operators requiring 208V, 230V and 460V, a transformer kit (90-TRNSFRMR-2), enclosed in a separate box, is available. For 575V door operators, order the (90-TRNSFRMR-5). Plug type gear reducer heater must be factory installed. NOTE: Starter Panel and Mechanical Powerhead modification only. Contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative for availability on Logic 5.0 Door Operators. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT MJ APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD M109, FORMERLY SELF-REGULATING HEATER, 230/460V (PLUG TYPE) Formerly ordered as ( ) or ( ). Order (M108) and separate transformer kit to supply 115V to the heater. C76 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

109 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M130 WALL MOUNT STARTER, NEMA 1 SCREW COVER ENCLOSURE The enclosure for this modification is a wall-mounted version of the standard door operator electrical box rated for NEMA 1 rated applications. All electrical components correspond to standard parts from associated door operator (no upgrades included). Must be factory supplied. See below for enclosure variations. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M131 WALL MOUNT STARTER, NEMA 1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURE Identical to (M130) except NEMA 1 rated screw cover enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 1 rated hinged cover enclosure. The starter itself is an industrial size 0 but may be upgraded to a size 1 see (M153) and the control transformer is rated 50VA but may be upgraded to 100VA see (M155). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT M132 WALL MOUNT STARTER, NEMA 4 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURE Identical to (M131) except NEMA 1 rated hinged cover enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated hinged cover enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M132A WALL MOUNT STARTER, NEMA 12 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURE Identical to (M131) except NEMA 1 rated hinged cover enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated hinged cover enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T MJ GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C77

110 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M133 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, NON- FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH (NFDS), NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE This Combination Reversing Starter modification provides for a Non-Fusible Disconnect Switch (NFDS) with external handle, which shuts off the power to the starter and door operator when the cover is opened. The starter and other optional components are prewired to terminals in the wall-mountable enclosure. The starter itself is an industrial size 0 but may be upgraded to a size 1 see (M153) and the control transformer is rated 50VA but may be upgraded to 100VA see (M155). Terminal points are provided both for the interwiring between door operator/starter and for the connection of control stations and safety equipment. Price includes an automatically resettable overload relay which may be converted to manual reset, but cover of starter must be opened to reset. For external manually resettable overload see (M152). This modification must be factory supplied. See below for enclosure variations. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MT/BMT M134 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, NFDS, NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M133) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T M135 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, NFDS, NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M133) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ GT MH/MHS GT H APT GH SD GSD APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD C78 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

111 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M136 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH (FDS), NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE This Combination Reversing Starter modification provides for a Fusible Disconnect Switch (FDS) with external handle, which shuts off the power to the starter and door operator when the cover is opened. Fuses are not supplied. The starter and other optional components are prewired to terminals in the wall-mountable enclosure. The starter itself is an industrial size 0 but may be upgraded to a size 1 see (M153), and the control transformer is rated 50VA but may be upgraded to 100VA see (M155). Terminal points are provided both for the inter-wiring between operator/starter and for the connection of control stations and safety equipment. Price includes an automatically resettable overload relay which may be converted to manual reset, but cover of starter must be opened to reset. For external manually resettable overload, see (M152). This modification must be factory supplied. See below for enclosure variations. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M137 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, FDS, NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M136) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T M138 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, FDS, NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M136) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ GT MH/MHS GT H APT GH SD GSD APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C79

112 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M139 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 250VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE The Combination Reversing Starter with Circuit Breaker (CB) modification provides all control equipment that is not mechanically connected to the door operator powerhead in a separate Wall Mount NEMA 1 rated enclosure. The limit switches and brake solenoid (when supplied) remain on the door operator In addition to the normal control equipment (starter, control transformer, control relays), a circuit breaker with external handle is supplied, which shuts off the main power to the unit (and door operator also) when the cover is opened. The circuit breaker is rated for up to 250VAC incoming power; therefore, this version of the modification may be used only with door operators where the incoming power is less than 250VAC. The starter itself is an industrial size 0 but may be upgraded to size 1 see (M153), and the control transformer is rated 50VA but may be upgraded to 100VA see (M155). Terminal points are provided both for the inter-wiring between operator/starter and for the connection of control stations and safety equipment. Price includes an automatically resettable overload relay which may be converted to manual reset, but cover of starter must be opened to reset. For external manually resettable overload, see (M152). This modification must be factory supplied. See below for enclosure and voltage rating variations. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ M140 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 480VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except circuit breaker is rated for up to 480VAC (for use with operators where the incoming power is 480VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M141 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 600VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except circuit breaker is rated for up to 600VAC (for use with door operators where the incoming power is 600VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C80 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

113 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS NEMA 4 NEMA 12 M142 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 250VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M143 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 480VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated enclosure and circuit breaker is rated for up to 480VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 480VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ M144 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 600VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 4 rated enclosure and circuit breaker is rated for up to 600VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 600VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH M146 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 480VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated enclosure and circuit breaker is rated for up to 480VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 480VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M147 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 600VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated enclosure and circuit breaker is rated for up to 600VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 600VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD SD SD GSD GSD GSD M145 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 250VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M139) except NEMA 1 rated enclosure is replaced with a NEMA 12 rated enclosure. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J DJ DJ DHJ DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C81

114 MODIFICATIONS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS M148 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 250VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 7/9 ENCLOSURE This modification provides a NEMA 7/9 rated wall-mounted separate starter with a hinged cover. The separate starter enclosure is a 250VAC circuit breaker and includes an external disconnect handle that shuts off the power to the Starter and door operator when the cover is opened. The enclosure holds the electrical control equipment that is not mechanically connected to the door operator powerhead. The limit switches, internal interlock switch (when supplied) and motor remain in the standard electrical enclosure on the door operator. The circuit breaker is rated for up to 250VAC, and is for use with door operator where incoming power is 250VAC or less. The control circuit is intrinsically safe in accordance with NEC Article 504, therefore allowing control components (limit switches, control stations and safety edges) to be housed in general-purpose enclosures. A Dynamic Brake see (M5) with a Delay-on-Reverse Circuit see (M60) and automatic resetting overload are provided as standard. All components used in this modification are either UL listed or Factory Mutual (FM) approved. This equipment meets specifications for hazardous areas defined by NEC Article 501, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Group D, and Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups F and G. All of the control stations and the safety edge would be connected to terminals in the limit enclosure on the door operator. The starter itself is an industrial size 0 but may be upgraded to a size 1 see (M154). This modification does not include a Hazardous Area Modification (M105) on the door operator; you must order (M105) in addition to this modification and it must be factory supplied. See (M149 and M150) for alternate voltage ratings. NOTE: This modification is not compatible with many other modifications in this catalog and is limited in control options. Please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative if you have any questions regarding compatibility. This modification must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ M149 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 480VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 7/9 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M148) except circuit breaker is rated for up to 480VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 480VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M150 COMBINATION REVERSING STARTER SIZE 0, 600VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECT SWITCH, NEMA 7/9 ENCLOSURE Identical to (M148) except circuit breaker is rated for up to 600VAC (for use with door operators where incoming power is 600VAC or less). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD C82 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

115 Available Modification (See specific item for details) Available, but not in conjunction with the Logic Control Board MECHANICAL POWERHEADS STARTER PANELS M152 EXTERNAL RESET OVERLOAD NEMA 1, 4, Provides an external through-cover reset button for the overload relay for Wall Mount or Combination Reversing Starters see (M131 M147) for the given NEMA ratings. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT M153 INDUSTRIAL SIZE 1 STARTER NEMA 1, 4, Upgrades the reversing starter in a NEMA 1, 4 or 12 rated Combination Reversing Starter from an industrial size 0 to a size 1. May provide longer starter life in applications where large-horsepower door operators experience high usage and frequent reversing. Must be factory installed. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T T GT GT APT APT MJ MJ J J M154 INDUSTRIAL SIZE 1 STARTER NEMA 7/ Upgrades the reversing starter in a NEMA 7/9 rated Combination Reversing Starter from an industrial size 0 to a size 1. May provide longer starter life in applications where large-horsepower door operators experience high usage and frequent reversing. Must be factory installed. Available on (M148 M150) modifications only. FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) M VA TRANSFORMER UPGRADE NEMA 1, 4, Upgrades the transformer in operators with Wall-Mounted or Combination Reversing Starters (M131 M147) from the standard 50VA to a 100VA. Provides 50VA of additional control circuit power for auxiliary equipment such as loop detectors, photo eyes and motion detectors. Must be factory installed. Not available with a Dynamic Brake (M5) or any of the NEMA 7/9 rated separate starters (M148 M150, M154). FOR USE WITH MODEL(S) MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ MGJ MH/MHS H GH SD GSD MT/BMT T GT APT MJ J DJ DHJ DJ MGJ DJ MH/MHS DHJ H GH SD GSD DHJ MGJ MGJ MH/MHS MH/MHS H H GH GH SD SD GSD GSD COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C83

116 FIRE DOOR SYSTEMS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS LiftMaster Fire Door Systems control the closure of a rolling fi re door, counter fi re door, fi re shutter or track door in an emergency situation, and serve as physical barriers to stop the spread of fi re and smoke from one area to another. Fire doors and shutters are found in virtually all types of commercial buildings, including manufacturing facilities, warehouses, hospitals, stadiums, sports arenas, convention centers and food court areas. These release devices are an integral part of the door s or shutter s fusible link release assembly, providing fail-safe performance. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Ultimately, LiftMaster Fire Door Release Devices are designed to minimize property damage and provide increased safety for all building occupants. They provide a time-delayed release of the door for a period of up to 60 seconds to permit passageway clearance prior to door closure. Optional Battery Backup can ensure the door will not be released as a result of power failure (in non-alarm conditions) for up to 72 hours. For added safety of the individuals in or around the opening, a voice annunciator, strobe or horn notifi cation device can be installed to provide a verbal, visual or auditory warning message prior to door closure. Models are available for use with both non-motorized and motorized door applications. For motorized door applications, select models can be used to create a fully automated door closing system when used in conjunction with a standard commercial door operator by providing features typically found on expensive, special-order fi re door operators. ADVANCED FIRE CONTROL RELEASE DEVICE (LM21AFCB) UL 864 Revision 9 compliant. Programmable DIP switch delay setting either 10, 20, 30 or 60 seconds delay of door release to permit passage clearance. Internal Battery Backup system. Obstruction cycling works in conjunction with the door s electrical safety edge, reversing the door if an obstruction is encountered. Motor voltage sensing. Test key switch permits floor-level testing of the system. Model LM21AFCBVB is equipped with a voice board to broadcast a pre-recorded evacuation message. EXTENDED PERFORMANCE RELEASE DEVICE (LM21XPBB) UL 864 Revision 9 compliant. Programmable DIP switch delay setting either 10, 20, 30 or 60 seconds delay of door release to permit passage clearance. Inputs for normally open 2- or 4-wire detectors and normally closed 4-wire detectors. Trouble and alarm relays for communication with the fire alarm control panel, if required. Audible trouble sounder to indicate when the release device is not operational. On-board diagnostic LEDs for easy troubleshooting. Testing function allows routine fire door testing without requiring activation of the smoke detector Model LM21XPBBVB is equipped with a voice board to broadcast a pre-recorded voice evacuation message. HIGH-PERFORMANCE RELEASE DEVICE (LM21XP) UL 864 Revision 9 compliant. Programmable DIP switch delay setting either 10, 20, 30 or 60 seconds delay of door release to permit passageway clearance. Close door detection prevents door release if the door is kept in the closed position and eliminates door reset service calls or potential system damage. On-board diagnostic LEDs for early troubleshooting. Testing function allows routine fire door testing without requiring activation of the central alarm system; easy reset function returns the device to a standby state. C84 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

117 PRODUCT FEATURE BENEFITS RELEASE DEVICES LM21XP XPBB AFCB Non-Motorized Door Door closing system for chain/crank hoist operated doors or manually operated doors. Motorized Door Time-Delayed Activation Testing Function Close Door Detection Fully automated door closing system when used in conjunction with mechanical or solidstate door operators. User selectable feature that delays door closing to allow time for passage clearance. Factory default 10 seconds, maximum 60 seconds. Allows routine fire door testing without requiring activation of the smoke detector or central alarm system. Prevents door reversal if the door is kept in the closed position. Eliminates door reset service calls or potential system damage. Two Smoke Detector Loops Normally open and normally closed for smoke or heat detectors. Power for Detection Devices Provides power (24VDC) for up to four 2 wire smoke detectors. On-Board Diagnostic LEDs Allow monitoring of alarm inputs, outputs and ground fault. Trouble and Alarm Relays For the transmission of alarm and trouble signals to the fire alarm control panel. Multiple Power Options Release device operates on 120VAC, 24VAC or 24VDC. Form C Dry Contact Type Activation For activation of auxiliary devices. Internal Battery Backup with Charging System 24VDC Alarm Output Motor Voltage Sensing Obstruction Cycling Remote Test Switch Optional Response Upon Power Loss Provides power to release device to prevent door release during long power outages. Also provides power for up to 4 smoke/heat detectors and 2 horn/strobes. Provides power (24VDC) for up to two notification devices such as a horn/strobe or speaker strobe. Monitors voltage to the door operator and activates a mechanical door release upon loss of power to the door operator. Works with the door s safety edge system to reverse the door if obstructed. Will attempt door closure up to 3 times before allowing the door to rest upon an obstruction or gravity drop (user selectable). Disables the obstruction cycling feature to allow testing of a door without a mechanical release. Select between door closure by mechanical release immediately upon loss of power or standard operation from Battery Backup power. DIP Switch Selection Safety feature functions are user selectable. Optional Voice Board Provides one of two verbal warnings when the fire door is closing. Can be used in conjunction with up to 2 speaker/strobes. Two Standard Voice Warnings Selected by DIP switch settings, indicating that an emergency condition exists and that the door opening should be cleared prior to closure. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C85

118 FIRE DOOR SYSTEMS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS INSTALLATION INFORMATION Each LiftMaster Fire Door Release Device serves as an interface between the smoke detection system and the fire door. As the central control, the Fire Door Release System receives and interprets all signals to instruct the fire door and all warning devices to act appropriately. NON-MOTORIZED FIRE DOOR SYSTEM MOTORIZED FIRE DOOR SYSTEM COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS Smoke Detector Notification Appliance (Strobe, Horn/Strobe, Speaker/Strobe, etc.) LM21XPBB Release Device Fusible Link Assembly Chain Hoist Smoke Detector Notification Appliance (Strobe, Horn/Strobe, Speaker/Strobe, etc.) Test Key Switch LM21AFCB Release Device Fusible Link Assembly Door Operator/ Motor LiftMaster offers a choice of 3 different models, FOR BOTH MOTORIZED AND NON-MOTORIZED APPLICATIONS. For motorized application, the appropriate release device works in conjunction with a standard, commercial electromechanical or solid-state operator to create an enhanced, yet economical, fire door operating system. All devices ensure the continued protection and code compliance for the fire door or shutter by enabling routine operation inspections without activating the primary alarm system and without disturbing building occupants. These devices are C-UL-US, FM and CSFM listed and are compliant with the NFPA 80 requirement for all fail-safe door holder/release devices. APPLICATION: RELEASE DEVICE AS COMPONENT OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM APPLICATION: RELEASE DEVICE AS STAND- ALONE SYSTEM Alarm Signal Notification Appliance Alarm Signal Notification Appliance Alarm Initiation Devices Alarm Initiation Devices Alarm Initiating Device Circuit larm NotificationAlarm Notification Appliance CircuitAppliance Circuit Relay Module Fire Fire Alarm Alarm Control Control System System End-Of-Line Device Alarm Initiating Device Circuit End-Of-Line Device Release Device Release Device Relay Module Alarm Initiation Devices Alarm Initiation Devices Alarm Initiating Device Circuit End-Of-Line Device Release Device Alarm Initiating Device Circuit End-Of-Line Device Release Device Main Power ndby Power Main Power Standby Power Trouble Signal Trouble Signal Notification Appliance Notification Appliance Alarm Signal Alarm Signal Notification Appliance Notification Appliance Main Power Main Power Alarm Signal Alarm Signal Notification Appliance Notification Appliance C86 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

119 FIRE DETECTION DEVICES COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS Model...Voltage LM V LM2W-B...12/24VDC LM4W-B...12/24VDC PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS WITH THERMAL SENSORS Model...Voltage LM8100-T...120V LM2WT-B...12/24VDC LM4WT-B...12/24VDC HEAT DETECTORS Model...Voltage LMTH V LMTH V NOTIFICATION DEVICES HORN Model...Voltage LMEH120ADA...120V /24VDC SPEAKER STROBE Model...Voltage LM-8SP...120V STROBE Model...Voltage LML1V75OADA...120V V HORN STROBE Model...Voltage LMHS1V75ADA...120V LMHS2475WPADA...12/24VDC Transformer (90-TRNSFRMR-2/90-TRNSFRMR-5) Used in conjunction with an AFCB model when line voltages other than 120VAC are present at the door installation. Transformers are mounted within a UL 508 approved enclosure and are available in the following options: 90-TRNSFRMR-2 (208VAC 1 and 3 Phase, 230/460VAC 3 Phase) 90-TRNSFRMR-5 (575VAC 3 Phase) FDRCARD - Plug-in Option Card For use in conjunction with LiftMaster Elite Series operators (Logic 3, Logic 4 and Logic 5.0); the FDRCARD facilitates field connections between the LM21AFCB and the operator by reducing the standard 10- wire interconnection to a basic 4-wire phone cord. Both the FDRCARD and the AFCB are equipped with an RJ-11 phone jack as standard to accept the phone cord. The FDRCARD also eliminates the need for ordering the operator with auxiliary open and close limits, which are required for all non-logic operators. COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C87

120 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS C88 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

121 SWING GATE OPERATORS SLIDE GATE OPERATORS BARRIER AND OVERHEAD GATE OPERATORS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS

122

123 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS Why LiftMaster...P3 LiftMaster Gate Operators...P5 Safety Information...P6 Designing Automated Vehicular Gate Systems...P8 How to Order...P10 Linear Actuators...P12 LA400PKGU...P14 LA412PKGU...P16 LA500PKGU...P18 Swing Gate Operators...P20 RSW12U...P22 CSW24U...P24 CSW200...P26 Slide Gate Operators...P28 RSL12U...P30 CSL24U...P32 SL P34 SL585...P36 SL595...P38 Barrier and Overhead Gate Operators...P40 Mega Arm/Mega Arm Tower...P42 Mega Arm Sprint/Sprint Tower...P44 BG770...P46 BG790...P48 HCTDCU...P50 Access Control Systems...P52 IPAC...P54 EL P56 EL25...P58 EL1SS...P60 Credentialed Access...P62 Credentialed Access...P62 Visitor Management, Attended Gates...P64 Front Desk...P66 KPR P68 MINIkey Stand Alone...P69 KPW5/KPW250 Wireless Commercial Keypad...P70 PPLX Stand Alone...P71

124 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS THE LEADER IN ACCESS SOLUTIONS

125 WHY LIFTMASTER For over 45 years, LiftMaster has been exceeding expectations by providing peace of mind through expert service and innovative solutions. This catalog gives you access to our entire product and accessory lines. The latest advances like our MyQ Technology, Security+ 2.0, Battery Backup and our specially designed P3 Motors allow our products to best serve specifi c needs while staying safe and connected at all times. LiftMaster provides products and access solutions for homes and businesses worldwide. We are committed to providing quality products, innovative designs and comprehensive services that go beyond our Customers expectations. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P3

126 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SWING OR SLIDE IT S AN OPEN-AND-SHUT CASE

127 LIFTMASTER GATE OPERATORS LiftMaster Perimeter Access Solutions are engineered to be reliable, powerful and innovative, providing Customers the comfort of knowing their gates will always open and close when needed. Built with Battery Backup, MyQ Technology, P3 Motors and Security+ 2.0, our products ensure quick, reliable property access by virtually eliminating interference. Plus, our entire line of gate operators has been newly updated and designed to meet or exceed UL 325 safety standards and requirements. LiftMaster guarantees a high level of quality and performance in all our gate operators and access control systems by staying true to four unique features throughout our product line: BATTERY BACKUP LiftMaster has a patented system to ensure that your gate operator continues to operate during power outages. CONNECTIVITY LiftMaster Gate Operators and Access Control Systems help you stay connected with your property while you re away, giving you greater control, information and access. P3 MOTORS LiftMaster designs our own purpose-built motor to meet the exact requirements needed to open and close your gate. SAFETY AND SECURITY LiftMaster Gate Operators and Access Control Systems have security features designed to help safeguard your home, giving you greater peace of mind. Whether your needs are residential or commercial, our line of Perimeter Access Solutions provides a variety of access solutions that best serve your Customers specific needs while never compromising the safety and security they desire. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P5

128 SAFETY INFORMATION GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS WARNING To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, the following should be read by ANYONE involved in the design, specification, selection or purchase of an industrial door operator or automated door system. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Automated Gate Systems For the purposes of this Safety Information, an automated gate system consists of a vehicular gate, an electric gate operator, control equipment to interface with the gate operator and safety equipment to protect people and property. Vehicular Gates A vehicular gate is a large, heavy object that moves with the help of an electric motor. A moving gate can cause SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! The safety and well-being of others depends on the design of a safe system. The gate itself must be properly installed, work freely and smoothly in both directions and be constructed to industry standard ASTM F2200. Gate operators are not intended for pedestrian use. Gate Operator Selection The proper gate operator must be selected for the application. Pay attention to all application information in this catalog, including gate operator type, size, voltage and control wiring. IMPROPER SELECTION CAN RESULT IN A DANGEROUS SYSTEM. Be sure you understand the application and limitations of the model gate operator you select for your gate. If you are in doubt, contact a LiftMaster Sales Representative. Control Accessories Gate operators can present serious hazards to persons in the immediate area when not controlled in a safe manner or by responsible persons. Choose one or more controls that together will allow complete control of the gate. All controls should be located OUT OF REACH OF SMALL CHILDREN. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH CAN RESULT FROM CHILDREN PLAYING WITH CONTROLS. ALL CONTROLS SHOULD BE LOCATED NO LESS THAN 6 FT. FROM ANY MOVING PART OF THE GATE SO THAT THE PERSON OPERATING THE CONTROLS CAN SEE THE FULL AREA OF GATE MOVEMENT, but should not be so close that a person starting the gate could be injured due to their proximity to the gate. Be especially careful in designing systems with automatic controls, that is, controls that can cause the gate to operate without warning to persons in the immediate gate area. Such controls include, but are not limited to, radio controls, remote mounted access controls, telephone access systems and timing devices. SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SIGNS WARNING OF THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION ARE A MUST IN THE DESIGN OF SUCH A SYSTEM. Safety Accessories Gate operators must protect against entrapment while opening and closing, requiring TWO independent monitored entrapment protection devices for each entrapment zone (inherent system counts as one of those). To be UL 325 compliant, two independent monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (inherent reversing system counts as one device). Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. See Accessories section. A variety of warning signs and labels are also offered in this section. WITHOUT SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THE GATE COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Safe Installation Procedures Gate operators and associated control equipment should only be installed and serviced by qualified professionals. Professional installers should observe the following safe installation procedures. To ensure that this is the case, provide a copy of this Safety Information section to the installer. 1. POWER SHOULD ALWAYS BE DISCONNECTED whenever installing, wiring or servicing a gate operator or automated gate system. Not only is the chance of electric shock thus reduced, but the MOVING CHAINS IN MOST GATE OPERATORS CAN CATCH CLOTHING OR FINGERS AND CAUSE SEVERE INJURY. 2. Installation and wiring must be in compliance with local building and electrical codes. If no local code exists, install in compliance with the National Electrical Code. 3. All manual gate locks should be disabled to avoid damage to the gate or gate operator should the lock become engaged after the gate operator is installed. 4. Clutches should be adjusted to the minimum force setting required to operate the gate smoothly and still allow slippage with minimum force. However, A CLUTCH IS NOT INTENDED AS, AND SHOULD NOT BE SUBSTITUTED FOR, A SAFETY DEVICE TO PROTECT PEOPLE AND PROPERTY. 5. The manual operation system must be functioning properly. IF THE GATE CANNOT BE MANUALLY OPERATED IN AN EMERGENCY, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT! 6. All warning signs and warning labels are required to be posted as indicated in the Gate Operator Installation Manual, and over the protest of the property owner. 7. The gate operator controls and safety equipment should be tested at the conclusion of the installation to be sure they are functioning properly. 8. The operation of the gate, controls and safety equipment should be reviewed with the owner and/or end user of the automated gate system. They should also be informed of the need to maintain control and safety equipment on a regular basis. Safety equipment should be checked at least once monthly to ensure that it is working properly. All installation manuals, instructions and safety information should be left with the owner. 9. Moving gates have pinch points and entrapment zones that can be extremely dangerous to pedestrians, especially small children. EVEN THOUGH YOU ARE PLANNING TO USE SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THESE POINTS AND ZONES SHOULD BE GUARDED. If you are unsure about your ability to identify the particular hazards of your gate operator system, call LiftMaster for assistance. UNGUARDED PINCH POINTS AND ENTRAPMENT ZONES CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! P6 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

129 Always design, install and maintain safe gate access systems in accordance with UL & ASTM F2200 standards Operated Gate Systems to Comply with UL 325 and ASTM F2200 Only install the operator on gates used for vehicular traffic. Install two independent entrapment protection devices protecting Only A separate install pedestrian the gate entry/exit operator must on be gates clearly used visible for to vehicular each traffic. entrapment zone. A separate pedestrian entry/exit must be clearly visible to promote promote pedestrian usage and located so pedestrians do not Pickets of a slide gate must pedestrian be designed usage. or screened It must to prevent be located so persons do not come in Two come independent contact with monitored the vehicular entrapment gate while it is moving. protection devices persons must from reaching through, or passing through a gate. contact with the vehicular gate while it is moving. See be installed your owner s at manual each entrapment for complete details zone. regrading your LiftMaster Perimeter Access Solution. Refer to your Gate Operator Instruction Manual for full details. Slide Gate Site Layout Guidelines Slide Gate Spacing Guidelines Edge sensor on Trailing Edge of gate Public Side Attach WARNING signs on both sides of the gate area See Slide Gate Openings Left Hand Gate opening Non-pinch rollers (4x) ENTRAPMENT ZONE Guard posts Photo eye Photo eye (entrapment protection shown in four locations) Physical stop - weld stops at both ends of gate rail. User controls mounted at least 6 ft. away from gate V track (gate rail) 6 ft. minimum See Slide Gate Openings Physical stop Edge sensor on Leading edge of gate Pedestrian gate clearly located Photo eye (4x) Secure Side Slide Gate Gaps A gap, measured in the horizontal plane parallel to the roadway, between a fixed stationary object nearest the roadway (such as a gate support post) and the gate frame when the gate is in either the fully open position or the fully closed position, shall not exceed 2 ¼ in.. Exception: All other fixed stationary objects greater than 16 in. from the gate frame shall not be required to comply with this section. (ASTM F2200: 6.1.4) Slide Gate Openings Guidelines Openings of a horizontal slide gate must be smaller than 2 1/4" or else be guarded or screened. These design rules apply to both the moving gate as well as the portion of adjacent fence that the gate covers in the open position (UL 325: a.2 and ASTM F2200: 6.1.2). See Illustrations below. X X X Swing Gate Site Layout Guidelines Pedestrian gate clearly located X X X X X X Public Side Photo eye X X X Attach WARNING signs on both sides of the gate area X X X X X X Gate Frame and Adjacent Fence Area If gaps (xxx) between vertical bars of the gate or fence are less than 2 1/4", no further screening is required. Photo eye ENTRAPMENT ZONE Gate Frame and Adjacent Fence Area Edge sensor Secure Side User controls mounted at least 6 ft. away from gate Photo eyes ENTRAPMENT ZONE 6 ft. minimum For gaps (xxx) equal to or larger than 2 1/4", a wire mesh screen must be applied to the gate. Wire mesh screen openings must be smaller than 2 1/4". The minimum height of wire mesh screen: 6 ft. above grade. Photo eyes Base of Swing and Slide Gate All Gates must have smooth bottom edges, no protrusions should exist. If gate hardware or sensors protrude, they must have smooth surfaces free of any sharp cutting edges that do not exceed ½ inch beyond the base of the gate. (ASTM F2200: 4.8) Swing Gate Clearance Guidelines A B OK Closed Gate If space is greater than 4", entrapment protection in this area is required. If space is less than 16", entrapment protection in this area is required. Closed Gate With the hinge mounted on the corner of the pilaster, the entrapment area A is eliminated and protection is not required for this area. (ASTM F2200: and ) Opened Gate Opened Gate A B Not Allowed GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Base of Swing and Slide Gate All Gates must have smooth bottom edges, no protrusions should exist. If gate hardware or sensors protrude, they must have smooth surfaces free of any sharp cutting edges that do not exceed ½ inch beyond the base of the gate. (ASTM F2200: 4.8) OK Not Allowed P7

130 DESIGNING AUTOMATED VEHICULAR GATE SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS AN AUTOMATED VEHICULAR GATE OPERATOR SYSTEM INCLUDES SEVERAL COMPONENTS, ALL OF WHICH MUST BE SELECTED IN CONCERT WITH EACH OTHER AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE JOB IF THE SYSTEM IS TO BE SUCCESSFUL. In addition to the gate itself, a system consists of a gate operator, entry control equipment to interface with the Gate Operator and safety equipment to protect people and property from hazards of an electrically powered gate. NOTE: A single cycle is considered one full open and closing. The number of cycles is considered the number of times the open limit is actuated in one hour. 1 GATE OPERATOR MODEL SELECTION The gate operator models described in this catalog are grouped according to the type of gate for which they are intended to be used and the expected frequency of usage. Gate Operator Type It is important to select the proper type and size of gate operator for your gate. Remember, mismatch between gate and operator can result in a malfunctioning or dangerous system. We also offer an extensive array of gate operator modifications for those instances where a standard machine is not the right choice. Contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative for more information about the application of any LiftMaster Gate Operator. Gate Operator Size This catalog uses gate width charts to aid in the proper sizing of a gate operator. However, it should be noted that these charts are only estimates and can vary greatly between applications. Gate Operator Usage Both the gate and the gate operator must be designed to stand up to the intended usage of the system. A gate that opens 25 times an hour cannot use a gate operator designed for more limited duty cycles. Generally speaking, gate operators that utilize wormgear reduction systems will stand up to severe usage much better than belt-reduced gate operators. ENTRY CONTROL DEVICES LiftMaster offers a wide variety of entry control devices that are compatible with the gate operators. These entry control devices 2 may be found in this catalog. Most entry control devices require a choice to be made between convenience and security. Push buttons are easy for just about anyone to use, but that is precisely why they may be undesirable in certain installations. Key control stations are a popular alternative, requiring the use of a key to open or close the gate. Another commonly used device is the card reader, similar to key controls in style in that the user must carry something to gain access through the door. However, access control and telephone entry systems that use card readers offer the added advantage of being able to issue many different cards to different users or different classes of users, cards that can be easily invalidated when necessary. A somewhat different approach is achieved by using digital keypads, which offer a comparable degree of security and flexibility to card readers, but which do not require the user to carry anything. However, he or she must remember the four- or five-digit entry code to use the keypad. Very often, gates will be operated primarily by people in vehicles. When this is the case, radio controls and other outdoor, pedestal-mount control devices are desirable. Automatic controls can be used when conditions dictate. The most common of this type is the auto-close timer, which will cause the gate to close automatically after a preset time interval whenever it is left open. Another variety is the 7-day time clock, which can be programmed to open the gate automatically at different times of the day. 3 SAFETY ACCESSORY SELECTION To be UL 325 compliant, two independent safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (inherent reversing system counts as one device). Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with these operators to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. A LiftMaster Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (model LMRRU) is included with each operator. Additional independent safety entrapment protection devices must be added to the operator to ensure that each entrapment point is properly protected. LiftMaster also offers a Through-Beam Photo Eye (model LMTBU), a Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (model LMWEKITU) and monitored sensing edges to protect additional safety entrapment points. A sensing edge, commonly called a safety edge, is strongly recommended on all motorized slide gates. The rubber edge mounts on the leading edge(s) of the gate and/or on stationary fence posts and must be wired into the control box of the operator. If a gate strikes an obstruction while opening or closing, the sensing edge will compress and cause the gate to either stop or reverse depending on the connection to the operator. For more information on these devices, please consult a LiftMaster Sales Representative. Finally, all installations are required to have warning signs in place to warn pedestrians of the dangers of operating vehicular gates. Many signs and labels are included with each gate operator. These should be carefully placed according to the accompanying instructions. Additional or replacement signs are offered in the Accessories section. GATE OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS There are four gate operator classifications. Class I is considered the most stringent class achievable and can 4 be used in all of the other classes of installation. Class I: Residential A gate operator intended for use in a home. A home is defined as a one- to four-family dwelling, or a garage or parking area associated therewith. Class II: Commercial or General Public Access A gate operator intended for use in a commercial location. Commercial locations include gated communities, hotels, garages, retail stores or other buildings that service the general public. Class III: Industrial or Limited Access A gate operator intended for use in an industrial location. Industrial locations include factories, loading dock areas or other locations not intended to service the general public. Class IV: Restricted Access A gate operator intended for use in a guarded industrial location. Guarded industrial locations include airport security areas or other restricted access locations not servicing the general public, in which unauthorized access is prevented via supervision by security personnel. P8 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

131 UL 325 ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS Gate operators must be installed with at least two independent entrapment protection means as specified in the table below. HORIZONTAL SLIDE AND SWING GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATOR ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION TYPES Type A Type B1 Type B2 Type C Type D Inherent (built into the operator) entrapment protection system Non-contact sensors such as photoelectric sensors Contact sensors such as edge sensors Inherent adjustable clutch or pressure-relief valve Connections provided for a control requiring continuous pressure to open and close the gate The same type of device shall not be used for both entrapment protection means. Use of a single device to cover both the opening and closing directions is in accordance with the requirement; however, a single device is not required to cover both directions. These operators are provided with Type A. The installer is required to install additional entrapment protection devices in each entrapment zone. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P9

132 HOW TO ORDER GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Building a Model Number Three (3) selections must be made to specify each gate operator model. 1 Select the proper model type for your gate based on your gate type. A brief description of the gate type(s) for which a model is intended to be used is included at the beginning of each model page. If you are not sure of the proper model for your gate, refer to Designing Automated Vehicular Gate Systems, or contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. The LiftMaster identifier and model type will become the first part of the complete model number. Example: SL585 Select the horsepower rating of your operator by studying the recommended capacities guide for the model type you have chosen. This guide is based on 2 the overall area of the gate and is a general guideline only for new and properly installed gates. If your gate size is beyond the range on the guide for one of these models, go to the standard-duty or heavy-duty gate operator of the same type. The ORDERING CODE for horsepower rating is as follows: 1/2 HP 50 1 HP HP 15 2 HP 20 The horsepower rating code will become the second part of the model number. Example: SL58550 Select the voltage, phase and frequency according to your installation requirement. The power available at the jobsite must be of the same voltage, 3 phase and frequency as ordered for the gate operator. A MISMATCH CAN CAUSE A DANGEROUS SITUATION AND RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE OPERATOR AND/OR INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY. The ORDERING CODE for voltage, phase and frequency is as follows: 115/230/208 VAC, 1Ø, 60Hz - 1U 208/230/460 VAC, 3Ø, 60Hz - 3U 575 VAC, 3Ø, 60Hz - 5U The voltage, phase and frequency code will become the third part of the model number. Example: SL585501U P10 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

133 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P11

134 LINEAR ACTUATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS LA500PKGU 24VDC Residential/Light Commercial Linear Actuator WITH STREAMLINED DESIGNS, THIS SET OF SWING GATE OPERATORS CAN EASILY MOUNT TO A GATE. They ll keep a property looking great while providing exceptional performance. Make an entrance or exit. Our most powerful swing gate operator delivers unsurpassed performance and secure access to your property. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P12 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

135 LA412PKGU 12VDC Solar Residential Linear Actuator LA400PKGU 24VDC Residential Linear Actuator The most solar-optimized swing gate operator on the market delivers unmatched performance, power and reliability when and where you need it. This is one of our best selling swing gate operators that features Battery Backup, MyQ Technology and Security GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P13

136 LINEAR ACTUATOR SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS LA400PKGU 24VDC Residential Linear Actuator GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS ONE OF OUR MOST POPULAR SWING GATE OPERATORS JUST GOT EVEN BETTER AT DELIVERING UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE AND SECURE ACCESS TO YOUR PROPERTY. CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup provides up to 400 cycles or 97 days of standby power when the power is out P3 Motors purpose-built motor designed to meet your applications requirements Soft start/stop operation Commercial-duty cast-aluminum housing Wormgear reduction, precision-machined all-metal gear Electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Keyed manual disconnect 2 auxiliary power outlets Party Pass selectable hold-open feature Bi-part delay monitors and adjusts speed and position of each wing to ensure primary gate closes last TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 24VDC or solar power 120 Single Phase (standard control box) Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Industrial-strength surge suppression. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Gate Operator Weight: Actuator arm = 19 lbs., standard control box = 13 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 33Ah Days SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* Monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on optional expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology access your property quickly with Security+ 2.0 Technology that utilizes a tri-band signal that virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls (unlimited with 811LM/813LM) Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance auto open on battery depletion Synchronized close Timer-to-Close Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away DIMENSIONS 4.5" 4" 37.38" 6.56" 6.19" RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES 16.44" 20.75" Swing Rating 850 lbs. 850 Recommended Cycles per Day: 100 Duty Cycle: Continuous 750 lbs. 650 lbs. 550 lbs " Standard Control Box 17.19" Extra Large Control Box 0 10 ft. 12 ft. 14 ft. 16 ft. *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P14 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

137 GATE OPERATORS Model LA400PKGU LA400DC LA400DCS LA400CONTU XLSOLARCONTU Description Single Arm Package Primary 24VDC Actuator Arm Secondary 24VDC Actuator Arm Standard 24VDC Control Box XL Metal Solar Control Box OPTIONAL XL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package XLSOLARCONTU 210W Description XL Metal Solar Control Box For single and dual solar gate applications, with solar harness. Compatible with LA400DC/DCS, LA412DC/DCS and LA500DC/DCS. (Batteries not included.) 20W 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 10W 12V solar panels (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT) (1) K solar battery harness OPTIONAL EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs (with optional expansion board) 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate prevents unauthorized access. Gate will pause when closing as vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo beam. Once vehicle backs up, gate will continue to close. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close the gate from any room in your house or facility. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage doors. It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Requires optional expansion board. Expansion Board (K1D8387-1CC) Additional programming features, external loops, plug-in loops, auxiliary relays and inputs for additional controls and safety eyes. Low Power Loop Detector (LD7LP) 10 30VAC/DC low power failsafe loop detector. Push-to-Open Bracket ( ) Allows the gate to swing out from the property. Single Piece Sensing Probe (CP3) 6 31 VAC or VDC. 150microA (standby) 25 30mA (detect) current draw. Automatic sensitivity 100 ft. lead length, 1-piece design. Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required.) Solar Harness Kit (K ) For use with 7Ah and 33Ah batteries. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P15

138 LINEAR ACTUATOR SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS LA412PKGU 12VDC Solar Residential Linear Actuator THE MOST SOLAR-OPTIMIZED SWING GATE OPERATOR ON THE MARKET DELIVERS UNMATCHED PERFORMANCE, POWER AND RELIABILITY WHEN AND WHERE YOU NEED IT TO QUICKLY AND SAFELY ACCESS YOUR PROPERTY. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE P3 Motors purpose-built motor designed to meet your applications requirements Solar-optimized ultra-reliable system delivers power when you need it most and is extremely power efficient at all other times to maximize solar performance Receive up to 126 days of standby time without recharging Soft start/stop operation Commercial-duty cast-aluminum housing Wormgear reduction precision machined all-metal gear Electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Keyed manual disconnect Party Pass selectable hold-open feature Bi-part delay Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: Solar-powered system accepts up to 30W 12V solar panel Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Gate Operator Weight: Actuator arm = 19 lbs., standard control box = 13 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 7Ah Days SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* Monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on optional expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology access your property quickly with Security+ 2.0 Technology that utilizes a tri-band signal that virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls (unlimited with 811LM/813LM) Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance auto open on battery depletion Synchronized close Timer-to-Close DIMENSIONS 4.5" 4" 37.38" 6.56" 6.19" RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Swing Rating 850 lbs. 850 Cycle rate varies by number of solar panels, accessories and zone " 20.75" 750 lbs. 650 lbs " 17.19" 550 lbs. 550 Standard Control Box Extra Large Control Box 0 10 ft. 12 ft. 14 ft. 16 ft. *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P16 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

139 GATE OPERATORS Model LA412PKGU LA412DC LA412DCS LA412CONTU XLSOLARCONTU XL SOLAR FEATURE Description Single Arm 10W Solar Package (includes 10W solar panel) Primary Actuator Arm Secondary Actuator Arm Standard 12VDC Control Box XL Metal Control Box Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package LA412XL20W Description Single Arm 20W XL Solar Package Solar Kit includes: (1) LA412DC Primary Arm (1) XLSOLARCONTU XL Solar Control Box (1) 20W 12V solar panel (1) 33Ah battery (A12330SGLPK) (1) K solar battery harness (1) LMRRU Monitored Retro-Refl ective Photo Eye OPTIONAL EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs (with optional expansion board) 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate prevents unauthorized access. Gate will pause when closing as vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo beam. Once vehicle backs up, gate will continue to close. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close the gate from any room in your house or facility. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage doors. It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Requires optional expansion board. Expansion Board (K1D8387-1CC) Additional programming features, external loops, plug-in loops, auxiliary relays and inputs for additional controls and safety eyes. Push-to-Open Bracket ( ) Allows the gate to swing out from the property. Low Power Loop Detector (LD7LP) 10 30VAC/DC low power failsafe loop detector. Single Piece Sensing Probe (CP3) 6 31VAC or 10 40VDC. 150microamps (standby) 25 30mA (detect) current draw. Automatic sensitivity, 100 ft. lead length, 1-piece design. 33Ah 12V Battery (A12330SGLPK) Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. P17 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

140 LINEAR ACTUATOR SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS LA500PKGU 24VDC Residential/Light Commercial Linear Actuator ONE OF OUR MOST POWERFUL SWING GATE OPERATORS DELIVERS UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE AND SECURE ACCESS TO YOUR PROPERTY. Our industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 24 days without recharging. No other company can offer you that peace of mind. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup secures and safeguards your property by providing up to 500 cycles or up to 24 days of standby power when the power is down P3 Motors purpose-built motor designed to meet your applications requirements Soft start/stop operation Commercial-duty cast-aluminum housing Wormgear reduction, precision-machined all-metal gear Electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Keyed manual disconnect 2 auxiliary power outlets Party Pass selectable hold-open feature Bi-part delay Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: Full time AC run operation 120V/230V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Industrial-strength surge suppression. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Gate Operator Weight: Actuator arm = 35 lbs., standard control box = 13 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 7Ah Days RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Swing Rating 1,600 lbs. 1,600 Recommended Cycles per Day: 300 Duty Cycle: Continuous SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology access your property quickly with Security+ 2.0 Technology that utilizes a tri-band signal that virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls (unlimited with 811LM/813LM) Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance auto open on AC failure or battery depletion Pre-motion warning alarm Synchronized close Timer-to-Close DIMENSIONS 4.19" 5.81" 16.44" 40.38" 6.56" 6.19" 20.75" 1,200 lbs. 1, lbs lbs. 0 8 ft. 12 ft. 16 ft. 18 ft. *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards " Standard Control Box 17.19" Extra Large Control Box P18 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

141 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model Description LA500PKGU Single Arm AC Run Package LA5001PKGXLMU Single Arm Package with XL AC Run Control Box LA500DC Primary 24VDC Actuator Arm LA500DCS Secondary 24VDC Actuator Arm LA500CONTU Standard AC Run Control Box LA500CONTXLMU XL Metal AC Run Control Box XL OPTIONAL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultra-reliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package XLSOLARCONTU 210W LA500XL20W Description XL Metal 24VDC Control Box For single and dual solar gate applications, with solar harness. Compatible with LA400DC/DCS, LA412DC/DCS, LA500DC/DCS. (Batteries not included.) 20W 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 10W 12V solar panels; (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT); (1) K solar battery harness. Add LA400PKGU or LA500PKGU to complete solar kit. Single Arm 20W XL Solar Package Solar Kit includes: (1) LA500DC Primary Arm (1) XLSOLARCONTU XL Solar Control Box (2) 10W 12V solar panels (2) 33Ah batteries (A12330SGLPK) (1) Battery Tray (K ) (1) K solar battery harness (1) LMRRU Monitored Retro-Refl ective Photo Eye INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate prevents unauthorized access. Gate will pause when closing as vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo beam. Once vehicle backs up, gate will continue to close. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close the gate from any room in your house or facility. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage doors. It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Maglock (MG1300) Includes MG1300 maglock and transformer. Solar Panel (SP20W12V) 20W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required.) Solar Harness Kit (K ) For use with 7Ah and 33Ah batteries. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. LiftMaster Gate Operators comply with UL 325 standards. External entrapment devices must be added to meet UL 325 standards. Your installer will recommend suitable entrapment devices such as photo eyes or edge sensors. **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. P19 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

142 SWING GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CSW24U Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Commercial Swing Gate Operator SLEEK AND POWERFUL, SWING GATE OPERATORS CAN EASILY AND RELIABLY GIVE YOU ACCESS TO THE MOST IMPRESSIVE GATES. Their rugged construction and drive trains will provide years of reliable performance. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Engineered for more than a million cycles in high-traffi c heavy-duty applications, the CSW24U Gate Operator is ideal for the most demanding swing gate environments. P20 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

143 RSW12U 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Swing Gate Operator CSW200 Elite Series AC High-Traffic Commercial Swing Gate Operator Built with a sturdy pad-mount design, this gate operator delivers accurate control of the gate and unsurpassed performance. Built for high-traffi c applications and engineered for safety, this model is the fi rst choice for heavy-traffi c applications such as large gated communities, residential developments, commercial complexes and private estates. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P21

144 SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS RSW12U 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Swing Gate Operator THE RSW12U S STURDY PAD-MOUNT DESIGN DELIVERS ACCURATE CONTROL OF THE GATE AND UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE. Industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 63 days without recharging, providing greater security and reliability. No one else can offer you that peace of mind. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup with exceptional standby power 63 days P3 Motors purpose-built motor designed to meet your application requirements Soft start/stop and mid-travel reversal extends hardware life in high-cycle and heavy-gate applications High-density UV-resistant polycarbonate 2-piece cover Two commercial oilbath gearboxes with 900:1 wormgear reduction Constructed with 1/4 in. gold zinc plated steel for rust prevention Electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Bi-part delay 2 auxiliary power outlets Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 12VDC or solar powered Accessory Power: 12VDC 500mA output. Industrial-strength surge suppression. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Temperature Specifications: -40 F (-40 C) to 140 F (60 C) Gate Operator Weight: 180 lbs. Warranty: 3 Years BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (1) 7Ah Days (2) 7Ah Days (1) 33Ah Days RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* Monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on optional expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology access your property quickly with Security+ 2.0 Technology that utilizes a tri-band signal that virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance auto open on battery depletion Synchronized close Non-scissoring gate arm with emergency release handle that maintains limits once re-engaged Timer-to-Close DIMENSIONS 14.82" 18.77" 27.66" 1,000 lbs. 700 lbs. 400 lbs. 200 lbs. 0 1, Recommended Cycles per Day: 250 Duty Cycle: Continuous ft. 10 ft. 16 ft. *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P22 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

145 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model RSW12U Description 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Swing Gate Operator OPTIONAL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package 20W7A 20W33A Description 7Ah 12V Solar Kit includes: (1) 20W 12V panel (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT) (1) K solar battery harness 33Ah 12V Solar Kit includes: (1) 20W 12V panel (1) 33Ah 12V Battery (A12330SGLPK) (1) K solar battery harness OPTIONAL EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs (with optional expansion board) 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property (with optional expansion board) Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Requires optional expansion board. Expansion Board (K1D8387-1CC) Additional programming features, external loops, plug-in loops, auxiliary relays and inputs for additional controls and safety eyes. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. Solar Panel (SP20W12V) 20W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. Heater for Pad-Mount Operators (HTR) VAC, automatically detects voltage. Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL1SS) Provides wired telephone intercom communication and secure access control at gate. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P23

146 SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CSW24U Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Commercial Swing Gate Operator GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERED FOR MORE THAN A MILLION CYCLES IN HIGH-TRAFFIC HEAVY-DUTY APPLICATIONS, THE CSW24U IS IDEAL FOR THE MOST DEMANDING SWING GATE ENVIRONMENTS. Industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 24 days without recharging, providing greater security and reliability. No one else can offer you that peace of mind. LiftMaster Elite Series Gate Operators feature the highest quality components and are backed by years of proven reliability. CONNECTIVITY SAFETY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup with exceptional standby power 24 days P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty 24VDC motor Soft start/stop and mid-travel reversal extends hardware life in high-cycle and heavy-gate applications Heavy-duty commercial drive train providing 900:1 wormgear reduction High-impact polycarbonate UV-resistant cover 1/4 in. gold zinc plated chassis eliminates corrosion One-touch push-button electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay 2 auxiliary power outlets Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 120V/230V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Gate Operator Weight: 206 lbs. Warranty: 5 Years Commercial, 7 Years Residential RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Recommended Cycles per Hour: Continuous Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology keeps traffic flowing and eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance Pre-motion warning alarm Non-scissoring gate arm with emergency release handle that maintains limits once re-engaged Synchronized close BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Based on 12 ft./800 lbs. Swing Gate Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 7Ah Days (2) 33Ah Days DIMENSIONS 1,600 lbs. 1,600 1,200 lbs. 1, " 800 lbs lbs. 0 8 ft. 12 ft. 16 ft. 18 ft " 18.77" *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P24 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

147 GATE OPERATORS Model CSW24U Description 24VDC Swing Gate Operator with Battery Backup OPTIONAL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package 210W 40W33A Description 20W 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 10W 12V solar panels (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT) (1) K solar battery harness 33Ah 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 20W 12V solar panels (2) 33Ah battery (A12330SGLPK) (1) K solar battery harness INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad (MSEL) Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required.) Solar Panel (SP20W12V) 20W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required.) Uphill Swivel Arm (Q103) Swivel arm for uphill swing gates. Heater for Pad-Mount Operators (HTR) VAC, automatically detects voltage. Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. P25 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

148 SWING GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CSW200 Elite Series AC Commercial High-Traffic Swing Gate Operator BUILT FOR HIGH-TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS AND ENGINEERED FOR SAFETY, THE CSW200 MODELS OF SWING GATE OPERATORS ARE THE FIRST CHOICE FOR HEAVY-TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS SUCH AS LARGE GATED COMMUNITIES, RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENTS, COMMERCIAL COMPLEXES AND PRIVATE ESTATES. LiftMaster Elite Series Gate Operators feature the highest quality components and are backed by years of proven reliability. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty motor with class H (high-temperature) insulation Legacy Elite heavy-duty commercial gear-driven transmission provides unsurpassed reliability Soft mid-travel reversal extends hardware life in high-cycle and heavy-gate applications Weatherproof high-density polyethylene UV-resistant cover 1/4 in. gold zinc plated chassis eliminates corrosion 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay 2 auxiliary power outlets Timer-to-Close adjustable from seconds Power ON/OFF switch High-speed precision limit switches TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 110VAC Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC 500mA output Gate Travel Speed: 90-degree opening in seconds Shipping Weight: 203 lbs. Warranty: 5 Years Commercial, 7 Years Residential RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES 1,600 lbs. 1,200 lbs. 800 lbs. 400 lbs. 1,600 Recommended Cycles per Hour: Continuous Duty Cycle: Continuous 1, SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology keeps traffic flowing and eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Pre-motion warning alarm External alarm reset button Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away Non-scissoring gate arm with emergency release handle that maintains limits once re-engaged RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Model DIMENSIONS H Max Gate Weight (lbs.) Max Gate Length (ft.) Recommended Cycles / Hour CSW200501U 1, ft. Continuous CSW200101U 2, ft. Continuous 0 8 ft. 12 ft. 16 ft. 18 ft. D W *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. CSW200501U: 16.4" W x 28" H x 20.2" D CSW200101U: 15" W x 28" H x 24.5" D P26 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

149 GATE OPERATORS Model CSW200501U CSW200101U Description 1/2 HP Commercial AC Swing Gate Operator (115V) 1 HP Commercial AC Swing Gate Operator (115V) INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop. Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-efficient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Maglock (MG1300) Includes MG1300 maglock and transformer. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Heater for AC Operators (HTRNB) Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC P27 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

150 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CSL24U Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Commercial Slide Gate Operator FROM RESIDENTIAL TO HIGH-SPEED INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS, THESE SLIDE GATE OPERATORS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED TO RELIABLY MOVE THE LARGEST OF GATES. Select models can also be easily confi gured to post or rear mount to accommodate design or space needs. Engineered for more than a million cycles in high-traffi c heavy-duty applications, the CSL24U is ideal for the most demanding slide gate environments. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SL585 AC Heavy-Duty Industrial Slide Gate Operator Reliable gear-driven slide gate operator for commercial and industrial applications. P28 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

151 SL3000 Elite Series AC High-Traffic Commercial Slide Gate Operator RSL12U 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Slide Gate Operator SL595 Elite Series AC Heavy-Duty Industrial Slide Gate Operator The fi rst choice for heavy-traffi c applications and high-demand Customers, it features the highest quality components and is backed by years of proven reliability. Built with a sturdy, pad-mount design, this gate operator delivers accurate control of the gate and unsurpassed performance. Complete with a high-starting continuous-duty torque motor, this extreme heavy-duty operator is designed for industrial locations, ensuring rugged and reliable performance. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P29

152 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS RSL12U 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Slide Gate Operator IDEAL FOR LARGE HEAVY GATES, THE RSL12U STURDY PAD MOUNT DESIGN DELIVERS ACCURATE CONTROL OF THE GATE AND UNSURPASSED PERFORMANCE. Industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 63 days without recharging, providing greater security and reliability. No one else can offer you that peace of mind. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup provides up to 114 cycles or 63 days of standby power when the power is out P3 Motors purpose-built motor designed to meet your applications requirements Soft start/stop operation extends hardware life in high-cycle and heavy-gate applications High-density UV-resistant polyethylene cover Commercial oil bath gearbox with 15:1 worm gearbox Constructed with 1/4 in. gold zinc plated steel for rust prevention One-touch push-button electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Bi-part delay Manual disconnect 2 auxiliary power outlets Supplied with 25 ft. #41 black oxide chain Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 12VDC or solar powered Accessory Power: 12VDC 500mA output. Industrial-strength surge suppression. Gate Travel Speed: 10 in. per second Temperature Specifications: -40 F (-40 C) to 140 F (60 C) Gate Operator Weight: 100 lbs. Warranty: 3 Years BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (1) 7Ah Days (2) 7Ah Days (1) 33Ah Days RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Max Gate Weight (lbs.) Max Gate Length (ft.) Recommended Cycles / Day Duty Cycle: Continuous For slide gates over 16 ft. or 600 lbs., a second battery (MBAT) is recommended. SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* Monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on optional expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology access your property quickly with Security+ 2.0 Technology that utilizes a tri-band signal that virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. PosiLock secures gate Fire department compliance auto open on battery depletion Synchronized close Timer-to-Close DIMENSIONS 10.5" 15.19" 20.38" *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P30 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

153 GATE OPERATORS Model Description RSL12U 12VDC Residential/Light Commercial Slide Gate Operator OPTIONAL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package 20W7A 20W33A Description 7Ah 12V Solar Kit includes: (1) 20W 12V panel (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT) (1) K solar battery harness 33Ah 12V Solar Kit includes: (1) 20W 12V panel (1) 33Ah battery (A12330SGLPK) (1) K solar battery harness OPTIONAL EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs (with optional expansion board) 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property (with optional expansion board) Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle leaves interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Requires optional expansion board. Expansion Board (K1D8387-1CC) Additional programming features, external loops, plug-in loops, auxiliary relays and monitored inputs for additional controls and safety eyes. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad (MSEL) Stand height, 7.5 in. plate, 17.5 x 16.5 in. Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. Solar Harness Kit (K ) For use with 7Ah and 33Ah batteries. Remote Light Switch (823LM)* Controls lights remotely in your garage, yard or home. #41 Black Oxide Chain Pack ( D) 10 ft. chain pack, compatible with the RSL12U, CSL24U, SL3000 and HCTDCU. Heater for Pad-Mount Operators (HTR) VAC, automatically detects voltage. Protects systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL1SS) Provides wired telephone intercom communication and secure access control at gate. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. P31 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

154 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CSL24U Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Commercial Slide Gate Operator ENGINEERED FOR MORE THAN A MILLION CYCLES IN HIGH-TRAFFIC HEAVY-DUTY APPLICATIONS, THE LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES CSL24U IS IDEAL FOR THE MOST DEMANDING SLIDE GATE ENVIRONMENTS. Industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 24 days without recharging, providing greater security and reliability. No one else can offer you that peace of mind. LiftMaster Elite Series Gate Operators feature the highest quality components and are backed by years of proven reliability. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE Battery Backup with exceptional standby power 24 days P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty 24VDC motor Heavy-duty commercial drivetrain providing 10:1 wormgear reduction High-impact 2-piece polycarbonate UV-resistant cover 1/4 in. gold zinc plated chassis eliminates corrosion One Touch Button electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay Manual disconnect 2 auxiliary power outlets Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away #41 black oxide chain, 30 ft. TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 120V/230V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 12 in. per second Gate Operator Weight: 140 lbs. Warranty: 5 Years Commercial, 7 Years Residential BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Based on 16 ft./1,000 lbs. Slide Gate Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 7Ah Days (2) 33Ah 1, Days RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES MAX GATE WT. (lbs.) MAX GATE LENGTH (ft.) 1, SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro- Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology keeps traffic flowing and eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Fire department compliance PosiLock feature Pre-motion warning alarm Synchronized close DIMENSIONS 25" 14.8" 23" *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P32 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

155 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model CSL24U Description 24VDC High-Traffi c Commercial Slide Gate Operator OPTIONAL SOLAR FEATURE Industry-leading solar-ready ultrareliable system delivers power when you need it most to operate the gate and is extremely power effi cient at all other times to maximize solar performance. Homeowners may qualify for 30% solar tax credit. Choosing the right package depends on geographical location, number of cycles per day and accessories used. See LiftMaster Solar Daily Cycle Rate Charts for more details. Solar Package 210W 40W33A Description 20W 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 10W 12V solar panels (1) 7Ah battery (MBAT) (1) K solar battery harness 33Ah 24V Solar Kit includes: (2) 20W 12V solar panels (2) 33Ah battery (A12330SGLPK) (1) K solar battery harness INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle leaves interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. Door and Gate Monitor (829LM)** Monitor and open or close the gate from any room in your house or facility. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad (MSEL) Stand height, 7.5 in. plate, 17.5 x 16.5 in. Solar Panel (SP10W12V) 10W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required) Solar Panel (SP20W12V) 20W 12V solar panel. Includes mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. (2 panels required) #41 Black Oxide Chain Pack ( D) 10 ft. chain pack, compatible with the RSL12U, CSL24U, SL3000 and HCTDCU. Heater for Pad-Mount Operators (HTR) VAC, automatically detects voltage. Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P33

156 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SL3000 Elite Series AC Commercial High-Traffic Slide Gate Operator EXCEEDING EXPECTATIONS FOR HIGH-TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS, THE SL3000 MODELS OF SLIDE GATE OPERATORS ARE THE FIRST CHOICE FOR HEAVY-TRAFFIC APPLICATIONS AND HIGH-DEMAND CUSTOMERS. LiftMaster Elite Series Gate Operators feature the highest quality components and are backed by years of proven reliability. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty motor with class H (high-temperature) insulation Legacy Elite heavy-duty commercial gear-driven transmission with 30:1 wormgear reduction provides unsurpassed reliability High-density UV-resistant one-piece polyethylene for excellent heat and corrosion resistance 1/4 in. gold zinc plated chassis eliminates corrosion 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay Easy to use manual disconnect without having to remove the cover 2 auxiliary power outlets Timer-to-Close adjustable (0 180 seconds) Mechanical limit system maintains accurate gate position throughout gate travel even after using mechanical disconnect Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 115V Power Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC 500mA output Gate Travel Speed: 12 in. per second Shipping Weight: SL U: 140 lbs. SL U: 165 lbs. Warranty: 5 Years Commercial, 7 Years Residential RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Model Max Gate Weight (lbs.) Max Gate Length (ft.) Recommended Cycles / Hour SL U 1, Continuous SL U 2, Continuous Duty Cycle: Continuous SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology keeps traffic flowing and eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Pre-motion warning alarm External Alarm Reset Button DIMENSIONS 26.5" 18.1" 21.6" *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P34 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

157 GATE OPERATORS Model SL U SL U Description 1/2 HP AC Commercial High-Traffic Slide Gate Operator (120VAC) 1 HP AC Commercial High-Traffic Slide Gate Operator (120VAC) INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-efficient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. SL3000 Firebox (FBSL3000) Firebox connects directly to the manual disconnect cable. Mounting Plate for Post Mounting (MPEL) Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad (MSEL) #41 Black Oxide Chain Pack ( D) 10 ft. chain pack, compatible with the RSL12U, CSL24U, SL3000 and HCTDCU. Heater for AC Operators (HTRNB) Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC P35 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

158 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SL585 Elite Series AC Heavy-Duty Industrial Slide Gate Operator RELIABLE GEAR-DRIVEN SLIDE GATE OPERATOR FOR COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS. This heavy-duty design supports gate lengths up to 75 ft. and weights up to 1,900 lbs. Powder-coated weather-resistant steel enclosure and a high-starting torque motor with built-in overload protection ensure strong, dependable performance. CONNECTIVITY GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty AC industrial motor with high-starting and overload protection Heavy-duty commercial gear-driven transmission provides unsurpassed reliability Adjustable friction clutch system Pad lockable weather-resistant powder-coated steel cover Large control box Large accessory tray Universal footprint 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay 2 auxiliary power outlets Integrated 3-button control station Lockable manual disconnect Timer-to-Close (0 180 seconds) TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 115/208/230VAC Power Single Phase, 208/230/460/575VAC Three Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC Accessory Power Output Gate Travel Speed: 11 in. per second Shipping Weight: 240 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1/2 HP 1 HP 1.5 HP 115-1Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. Fully adjustable drive limit system Pad and post mount standard Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away #50 nickel-plated chain, 25 ft. pack SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology keeps traffic flowing and eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Lock-Out Tag-Out Switch Pre-motion warning alarm External Alarm Reset Button Automatic solenoid brake RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP Max Gate Weight (lbs.) Max Gate Length (ft.) Overhead/V-Groove Max Gate Length (ft.) Cantilever Recommended Cycles/Hour 1/ Duty Cycle: Continuous DIMENSIONS 38" (96.52 cm) 30.6" (77.7 cm) 18" (45.72 cm) P36 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

159 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1/2 HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL585501U 115/230/208 VAC 1 60 SL585503U 208/230/460 VAC 3 60 SL585505U 575 VAC HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL585101U 115/230/208 VAC 1 60 SL585103U 208/230/460 VAC 3 60 SL585105U 575 VAC HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL585151U 115/230/208 VAC 1 60 INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Heater for AC Operators (HTRNB, HTR460 for 460V operators) Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Diagonal Support Brace (G653509) Fire Access Box with Cable Release (ACP17) Access doors on front and back. Includes a hole for standard or fi re department padlock. #50 Nickel-Plated Chain Pack (G193025) 25 ft. chain pack. Red Strobe Warning Light (REDSTROBE) Gives visible indication when gate is in motion. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P37

160 SLIDE GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SL595 Elite Series AC Heavy-Duty Industrial Slide Gate Operator EXTREME HEAVY-DUTY GATE OPERATOR DESIGNED FOR INDUSTRIAL LOCATIONS. The powerful design supports gate lengths up to 90 ft. and gate weights up to 2,500 lbs. Fully enclosed NEMA 3R rated, oiltight, weatherproof, lockable cabinet and a high-starting continuous-duty torque motor ensure rugged and reliable performance. CONNECTIVITY GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App Wireless Dual-Gate Communication eliminates expensive conduit costs and avoids unsightly driveway scars PERFORMANCE P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty AC industrial motor with high-starting and overload protection Heavy-duty commercial gear-driven transmission provides unsurpassed reliability Adjustable friction clutch system Heavy-Duty Steel Lockable NEMA 3R rated Enclosure, 7-gauge pre-galvanized Steel Large control box Large accessory tray Universal footprint includes pre-installed brackets for easy post mounting Simplified mounting and wiring routing for easier installations 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs Bi-part delay Easy to use manual disconnect 2 auxiliary power outlets 115V model TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 115/208/230VAC Power Single Phase, 208/230/460/575VAC Three Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC Accessory Power Output Gate Travel Speed: 12 in. per second Shipping Weight: 270 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1 HP 1.5 HP 2 HP 115-1Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. Timer-to-Close adjustable (0 180 seconds) Mechanical Limit system maintains accurate gate position throughout gate travel even after using mechanical disconnect Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away #50 nickel-plated chain, 25 ft. pack SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses gate when closing or stops/reverses the gate when opening. Lock-Out Tag-Out Switch Automatic Braking System RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP Max Gate Weight (lbs.) DIMENSIONS 30" (76.2 cm) Allow for Door Opening 22.5" (57.2 cm) Max Gate Length (ft.) Overhead/V-Groove 24" (61 cm) Max Gate Length (ft.) Cantilever Recommended Cycles/Hour Duty Cycle: Continuous 16.5" (41.9 cm) P38 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

161 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1 HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL595101U 115/230/208 VAC 1 60 SL595103U 208/230/460 VAC 3 60 SL595105U 575 VAC V Model Includes Factory Installed Heater 1.5 HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL595151U 115/230/208 VAC HP Model Voltage Phase Hz SL595203U 208/230/460 VAC 3 60 SL595205U 575 VAC V Model Includes Factory Installed Heater INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ -Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Wireless network mode eliminates the need to wire between operators in dual-gate applications. Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-effi cient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Heater for AC Operators (HTRNB, HTR460 for 460V operators) Protect systems to -40 F. Installs on operator frame. Fire Access Box with Cable Release (ACP17) Access doors on front and back. Includes a hole for standard or fi re department padlock. #50 Nickel-Plated Chain Pack (G193025) 25 ft. chain pack. Red Strobe Warning Light (REDSTROBE) Gives visible indication when gate is in motion. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC P39 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

162 BARRIER AND OVERHEAD GATE OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Mega Arm/Mega Arm Tower DC Barrier Gate Operator When high-speed, frequent access is essential, barrier or overhead operators are an ideal choice. From airports to offi ce buildings, they effi ciently manage vehicle traffi c without hampering its fl ow allowing for easy-in and easy-out access. High-performance DC-powered Mega Arm and Mega Arm Tower with built-in Battery Backup are designed to provide exceptional starting torque and continuous operation, making them ideal for most barrier applications. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P40 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

163 Mega Arm Sprint/Sprint Tower High-Speed DC Barrier Gate Operator BG770 Industrial Barrier Gate Operator BG790 Industrial Wishbone Barrier Gate Operator High-speed DC-powered Mega Arm Sprint and Mega Arm Sprint Tower with built-in Battery Backup are designed to provide exceptional speed, making them ideal for parking applications. This powerfully designed barrier gate operator supports arm lengths up to 15 ft. and arms weighing up to 25 lbs. and can run up to 100 cycles per hour. This reliable, gear-driven barrier gate operator for industrial applications is designed for wishbone-type arms with lengths up to 24 ft. HCTDCU Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Overhead Door and Gate Operator GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS The HCTDCU Gate Operator is specifi cally engineered for more than a million cycles to meet the low clearance needs of apartment houses and condominiums with unsurpassed safety, dependability and quiet operation. AVAILABLE LATE SUMMER 2016 P41

164 BARRIER GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Mega Arm/Mega Arm Tower DC Barrier Gate Operator HIGH-PERFORMANCE, DC POWERED BARRIER GATE OPERATORS WITH BUILT-IN BATTERY BACKUP. The Mega Arm (MADCBB3) and Mega Arm Tower (MATDCBB3) are designed with a 24VDC (1/2 HP equivalent) motor and provide exceptional starting torque and continuous operation, making them ideal for most barrier applications. The heavy-duty motor supports 6,000 cycles per day with a speed of 2.5 seconds to open or close. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE Built-in Battery Backup provides seamless operation of the barrier gate operator and all DC control and sensing devices in the event of a power loss Breakaway arm Continuous-duty DC Motor Aluminum alloy chassis Heavy-duty drive system with commercial gearbox Dual gate operation Universal controller with 8 inputs Dynamic braking Timer-to-Close (0 16 seconds) Magnetic limit switch sensors LED indicators Right- or left-handed operation Sequenced Access Management (includes SAMSKIT) K1 Output Relay (MA200) for external signaling; Common, N.C. and N.O. contacts Magnetic limit switches TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 110V/220V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC Gate Travel Speed: 2.5 seconds to open or close Shipping Weight: Mega Arm (MA): 98 lbs. Mega Arm Tower (MAT): 130 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years: Electronics and Mechanism 10 Years: Chassis and Cover OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1/2 HP Equivalent VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz 110/ SAFETY Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers enhanced range so you can access your facility quickly and safely Built-in 850LM Security+ 2.0 receiver 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Receiver stores up to (90) remote controls Inherent obstruction sensing Safety Stop Tailgate feature stops closing of gate when tailgating is sensed at CLOSE input, does not continue until CLOSE input is removed or gate reopens Tailgate Alarm fires K1 Relay to trigger warning device when tailgating is sensed Fire Department Compliant selectable settings allow gate to auto-open upon loss of AC power or battery depletion MOVs for additional surge protection UL 325 and UL 991 compliant for Classes I, II, III and IV RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP MAX ARM LENGTH (ft.) Recommended Cycles/Day 1/2* 12 ft. and 17 ft. aluminum arm 14 ft. soft-padded arm 6,000 *Equivalent 24VDC Duty Cycle: Continuous DIMENSIONS 42.0" 13.5" 36.5" 20.25" 15.75" 36.5" 41.5" BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles (2) 7Ah 900 (with 12 ft. barrier arm) 21.5" 9.0" 17.5" P42 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

165 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model... Voltage Phase Hz MADCBB / (2 batteries included standard) MATDCBB / (2 batteries included standard) BARRIER ARMS** Model MALED12 MALED17 MALEDCW MA024 MA024RDOT MA115 MA116 MA116RDOT MA025 MA028 MA117 MA031 Description 12 ft. LED Arm. 17 ft. LED Arm. Requires Counterweight MALEDCW. Counterweight for MALED ft. Aluminum Arm, Round, Yellow/Black Stripes. 12 ft. Aluminum Arm, Round, Red/White Retro-Refl ectorized DOT Tape. 17 ft. Aluminum Arm, Round, White. Requires Counterweight model MA ft. Aluminum Arm, Round, Yellow/Black Stripes. Requires Counterweight model MA ft. Aluminum Arm, Round, Red/White Retro-Refl ectorized DOT Tape. Requires Counterweight model MA ft. Aluminum Arm with Yellow Padding. Requires Adaptor Collars model MA ft. Aluminum Arm with Yellow Padding. Requires Adaptor Collars model MA031. Counterweight. Required for all 17 ft. barrier arms. Adaptor Collars. Required for all padded barrier arms. **See Accessories Section for complete list of barrier arms and accessory options. OPTIONAL FEATURES Heater Slip clutch option Available factory installed (MA005C). LiftMaster Gate Operators comply with UL 325 standards. External entrapment devices must be added to meet UL 325 standards. Your Installer will recommend suitable entrapment devices such as photo eyes or edge sensors. 12 ft. and 17 ft. LED Barrier Arms (MALED12/MALED17) Aluminum arm with integrated red LED lights on one side and DOT tape on both sides. MALED17 requires Counterweight (MALEDCW). 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage doors. It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (RETROAB) 12VDC and 24VAC/DC. 20mA/40mA standby/detect current. UL listed to UL 325 standards. NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 13 rated. 30 ft. sensing distance. Includes photo eye hood, bracket, 3 in. refl ector and 6 ft. cable leads. Low-Power Fail-Safe Loop Detector (LD7LP) Wire terminal block, 10 30VAC/DC. 1 relay, 1 channel. Automatic frequency. Automatic sensitivity levels. <2mA current draw. Low power accessory, compact size. Compatible with LA400DC, LA412DC, RSL12VDC, RSW12VDC and Mega Operators VDC, 24VAC Loop Detector (A24) External DIP switches, failsafe. 12VDC at 80mA, 24VDC at 50mA, 24VAC at 30mA Current Draw. Thermostat Control Heater and Plate 150W (MA201) Thermostat Control Heater and Plate 500W (UN201) Voltage Conversion Kit (MA230KIT) Convert from 115VAC to 230VAC operation. Slip Clutch Option (MA005C) Protect shear pin if barrier arm is forced up. 7Ah 12V Battery (MBAT) Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000) Security+ 2.0 tri-band (310, 315, 390 MHz) receiver virtually eliminates radio interference. Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 remote controls, 1,000 remote control capacity. Passport Lite 1-Button Visor Remote Controls (PPLV1-10/PPLV1-100) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Compatible with Security+ 2.0 technology. Can be block programmed to the STAR1000 receiver. Not for use with residential garage door openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P43

166 BARRIER GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Mega Arm Sprint/Sprint Tower High-Speed DC Barrier Gate Operator HIGH-SPEED DC POWERED BARRIER GATE OPERATORS WITH LIFTMASTER BUILT-IN BATTERY BACKUP. The Mega Arm Sprint (MASDCBB3) and Mega Arm Sprint Tower (MASTDCBB3) are designed with a 24VDC (1/2 HP equivalent) motor and provide exceptional speed, making them ideal for parking applications. The heavy-duty motor supports 10,000 cycles per day with an operator speed of 0.9 seconds to open or close. PERFORMANCE Built-In Battery Backup provides seamless operation of the barrier gate operator and all DC control and sensing devices in the event of a power loss Breakaway arm Continuous-duty DC Motor Aluminum alloy chassis Heavy-duty drive system with commercial gearbox Dual gate operation Universal controller with 8 inputs Dynamic braking Timer-to-Close (0 16 seconds) Magnetic limit switch sensors LED indicators Right- or left-handed operation Sequenced Access Management (includes SAMSKIT) K1 Output Relay (MA200) for external signaling; Common, N.C. and N.O. contacts SAFETY Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers enhanced range so you can access your facility quickly and safely Built-in 850LM Security+ 2.0 receiver 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Receiver stores up to (90) remote controls Inherent obstruction sensing Safety Stop Tailgate feature stops closing of gate when tailgating is sensed at CLOSE input, does not continue until CLOSE input is removed or gate reopens Tailgate Alarm fires K1 Relay to trigger warning device when tailgating is sensed Fire Department Compliant selectable settings allow gate to auto-open upon loss of AC power or battery depletion MOVs for additional surge protection UL 325 and UL 991 compliant for Classes I, II, III and IV GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 110V/220V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC Gate Travel Speed: 0.9 seconds to open or close Shipping Weight: Mega Arm Sprint (MAS): 98 lbs. Mega Arm Sprint Tower (MAST): 130 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years: Electronics and Mechanism 10 Years: Chassis and Cover OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1/2 HP Equivalent VOLTAGE PHASE 60 Hz 110/ RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP MAX ARM LENGTH (ft.) RECOMMENDED CYCLES/DAY 1/2* 8 ft. soft padded arm 10,000 *Equivalent 24VDC Duty Cycle: Continuous DIMENSIONS 42.0" 13.5" 3.5" 36.5" 20.25" 15.75" 3.5" 36.5" 41.5" BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles (2) 7Ah 900 (with 8 ft. barrier arm) 21.5" 9.0" 17.5" P44 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

167 GATE OPERATORS Model... Voltage Phase Hz MASDCBB / (2 batteries included standard) MASTDCBB / (2 batteries included standard) BARRIER ARMS** Model SP8 SP8PAD SP8TUBE MA031 Description 8 ft. Aluminum Arm with Yellow Padding. Requires Adaptor Collars model MA ft. Replacement Yellow Foam Padding. 8 ft. Replacement White Aluminum Arm. Adaptor Collars. Required for all padded barrier arms. NOTE: Only SP8 Barrier Arms work with Mega Arm Sprint/Sprint Tower Operators. **See Accessories Section for complete list of barrier arms and accessory options. OPTIONAL FEATURES Heater Slip Clutch Option Available factory installed (MA005C) Refer to the Modifi cations Section for additional options applicable to this model. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage doors. It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (RETROAB) 12VDC and 24VAC/DC. 20mA/40mA standby/detect current. UL listed to UL 325 standards. NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 13 rated. 30 ft. sensing distance. Includes photo eye hood, bracket, 3 in. refl ector and 6 ft. cable leads. Low-Power Fail-Safe Loop Detector (LD7LP) Wire terminal block, 10 30VAC/DC. 1 relay, 1 channel. Automatic frequency. Automatic sensitivity levels. <2mA current draw. Low power accessory, compact size. Compatible with LA400DC, LA412DC, RSL12VDC, RSW12VDC and Mega Operators VDC, 24VAC Loop Detector (A24) External DIP switches, failsafe. 12VDC at 80mA, 24VDC at 50mA, 24VAC at 30mA Current Draw. Thermostat Control Heater and Plate 150W (MA201) Thermostat Control Heater and Plate 500W (UN201) Voltage Conversion Kit (MA230KIT) Convert from 115VAC to 230VAC operation. Slip Clutch Option (MA005C) Protect shear pin if barrier arm is forced up. 7Ah 12V Battery (MBAT) Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000) Security+ 2.0 tri-band (310, 315, 390 MHz) receiver virtually eliminates radio interference. Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 remote controls, 1,000 remote control capacity. Passport Lite 1-Button Visor Remote Controls (PPLV1-10/PPLV1-100) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Compatible with Security+ 2.0 technology. Can be block programmed to the STAR1000 receiver. Not for use with residential garage door openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. LiftMaster Gate Operators comply with UL 325 standards. External entrapment devices must be added to meet UL 325 standards. Your Installer will recommend suitable entrapment devices such as photo eyes or edge sensors. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P45

168 BARRIER GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS BG770 Heavy-Duty Industrial Barrier Gate Operator A RELIABLE PERFORMANCE BARRIER GATE OPERATOR FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS, THIS POWERFULLY DESIGNED BARRIER GATE OPERATOR SUPPORTS ARM LENGTHS UP TO 15 FT. AND ARMS WEIGHING UP TO 25 LBS. A heavy-duty 1/2 HP industrial motor with overload protection supports 100 cycles per hour. PERFORMANCE Continuous-duty 1/2 HP AC commercial motor Heavy-duty gear reducer 11-gauge steel cabinet with weather-resistant baked-on powder-coated finish Removable top and side panels for easy access 24VAC control circuit Electrical controls in separate removable enclosure 2-button control station, OPEN/CLOSE Power ON/OFF switch One 115VAC accessory outlet (on 115VAC models only) Fully adjustable limit system Pad mount Dual barrier gate compatible SAFETY Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers enhanced range so you can access your facility quickly and safely Built-in 850LM Security+ 2.0 receiver 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Receiver stores up to (90) remote controls Full systems capability, compatible with most access control devices and safety accessories Supports optional LiftMaster Plug-In Loop Detectors for exit and hold open loops UL 325 compliant for Classes I, II, III and IV TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Power: 115V/208V/230V Single Phase 208V/230V/460V/575V Three Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC Accessory Power Output Gate Travel Speed: 4 seconds to open or close Shipping Weight: 225 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP Max Arm Weight (lbs.) Max Arm Length (ft.) Recommended Cycles/Hour 1/ * 100 OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1/2 HP 115-1Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 1.0 VOLTAGE PHASE 60HZ 17.0" 44.0" Up to 15.0' 20.0" 575-3Ø 0.8 See Accessories Section for complete list of barrier arms and accessory options. P46 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

169 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model... Voltage Phase Hz BG BG BG BG BG BG BG BARRIER ARMS* Model P K ALUMARM G FL12024 Description 10 ft. PVC Arm, Square, Yellow/Black Stripes. Requires clamp model G ft. Wood Arm, White/Black Stripes. 15 ft. Aluminum Arm, Square, Yellow/Black Stripes. PVC Arm Mounting Clamp. 24VAC/DC Flexible Red Rope Light, 10 ft. *See Accessories Section for complete list of barrier arms and accessory options. OPTIONAL FEATURES Heater Timer-to-Close module: Adjustable for 1 second 17 minutes Refer to the Modifications Section for additional options applicable to this model. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage door(s). It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (RETROAB) 12VDC and 24VAC/DC. 20mA/40mA standby/detect current. UL listed to UL 325 standards. NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 13 rated. 30 ft. sensing distance. Includes photo eye hood, bracket, 3 in. reflector and 6 ft. cable leads. No-Enclosure Plug-In Vehicle Loop Detector (G714167NH) 24VAC. No wiring needed. Failsafe, 2 relays, 1 channel, 4 frequencies, 8 sensitivity levels. Includes boost feature. Thermostat Control Heater, 115V and 575V (G ) Thermostat Control Heater, 208V 460V (G ) Timer Defeat Switch (G50402) Allows the automatic close timer on the operator to be manually disabled. Long Distance Control Wiring 24VAC (50-24) Necessary when controls are to be located more than 100 ft. from the operator. Primary/Secondary Configuration ( ) Allows for reverse cabinet/rotation configuration for BG Operators (factory installed only). Timer to Close ( ) Provides an adjustable timer in the operator control circuit which will close the gate automatically after the preset, adjustable time interval. (May be factory or field installed.) Non-Resettable Counter ( ) 6-digit non-resettable 24VAC electro-mechanical counter is mounted in the operator control enclosure. This counts the number of complete gate cycles. (Factory installed may require lead time.) 100VA Transformer (Single Phase G90100OP1, Three Phase G90100OP3) Upgrades the transformer in the operator enclosure from 60VA to 100VA. Provides additional control circuit power for auxiliary equipment such as loop detectors, heaters and other devices. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. LiftMaster Gate Operators comply with UL 325 standards. External entrapment devices must be added to meet UL 325 standards. Your Installer will recommend suitable entrapment devices such as photo eyes or edge sensors. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P47

170 BARRIER GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS BG790 Heavy-Duty Industrial Wishbone Barrier Gate Operator A RELIABLE GEAR-DRIVEN BARRIER GATE OPERATOR FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS, THIS BARRIER GATE IS DESIGNED FOR WISHBONE-TYPE ARMS WITH LENGTHS UP TO 24 FT. Powder-coated weather-resistant steel enclosure and a 1/2 HP commercial motor ensure strong, dependable performance. PERFORMANCE Continuous-duty 1/2 HP AC commercial motor Heavy-duty gear reducer 11-gauge steel cabinet with weather-resistant baked-on powder-coated finish Removable top and side panels for easy access Electrical controls in separate removable enclosure 24VAC control circuit 2-button control station, OPEN/CLOSE Power ON/OFF switch One 115VAC accessory outlet (on 115VAC models only) Industrial size 0 across-the-line reversing starter Fully adjustable limit system Pad-mount Wishbone arm (24 ft.) and counterweight are provided (max. length) Dual barrier gate compatible SAFETY Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers enhanced range so you can access your facility quickly and safely 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Built-in 850LM Security+ 2.0 receiver Receiver stores up to (90) remote controls Full systems capability, compatible with most access control devices and safety accessories Supports optional LiftMaster Plug-In Loop Detectors for exit and hold-open loops UL 325 compliant for Classes I, II, III and IV GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 115V/208V/230V Single Phase 208V/230V/460V/575V Three Phase Accessory Power: 24VAC Accessory Power Output Gate Travel Speed: 4 seconds to open or close Shipping Weight: 350 lbs. Warranty: 2 Years RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES HP Max Arm Weight (lbs.) Max Arm Length (ft.) Recommended Cycles/Hour 1/ Duty Cycle: Continuous OPERATOR AMP RATING (RUNNING) VAC 1/2 HP VOLTAGE PHASE 60HZ 115-1Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0.8 DIMENSIONS Up to 24.0' 44.0" 17.0" P48 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

171 GATE OPERATORS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model... Voltage Phase Hz BG BG BG BG BG BG BG BARRIER ARMS* Model K FL12024 Description Replacement Wishbone Arm, 24 ft. white/ black stripes, no counterweight included (model G658056) 24VAC/DC Flexible Red Rope Light, 10 ft. *See Accessories Section for complete list of barrier arms and accessory options. OPTIONAL FEATURES Heater Timer-to-Close module: Adjustable for 1 second 17 minutes Refer to the Modifications Section for additional options applicable to this model. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) One button can control a gate operator, and the other(s) can control garage door(s). It can also be programmed to different codes and frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (RETROAB) 12VDC and 24VAC/DC. 20mA/40mA standby/detect current. UL listed to UL 325 standards. NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 13 rated. 30 ft. sensing distance. Includes photo eye hood, bracket, 3 in. reflector and 6 ft. cable leads. No-Enclosure Plug-In Vehicle Loop Detector (G714167NH) 24VAC. No wiring needed. Failsafe, 2 relays, 1 channel, 4 frequencies, 8 sensitivity levels. Includes boost feature. Thermostat Control Heater, 115V and 575V (G ) Thermostat Control Heater, 208V 460V (G ) Timer Defeat Switch (G50402) Allows the automatic close timer on the operator to be manually disabled. Long Distance Control Wiring (50-24) Necessary when controls are to be located more than 100 ft. from the operator. Primary/Secondary Configuration ( ) Allows for reverse cabinet/rotation configuration for BG Operators (factory installed only). Timer to Close ( ) Provides an adjustable timer in the operator control circuit which will close the gate automatically after the preset, adjustable time interval. (May be factory or field installed.) Non-Resettable Counter ( ) 6-digit non-resettable 24VAC electro-mechanical counter is mounted in the operator control enclosure. This counts the number of complete gate cycles. (Factory installed may require lead time.) 100VA Transformer (Single Phase G90100OP1, Three Phase G90100OP3) Upgrades the transformer in the operator enclosure from 60VA to 100VA. Provides additional control circuit power for auxiliary equipment such as loop detectors, heaters and other devices. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. LiftMaster Gate Operators comply with UL 325 standards. External entrapment devices must be added to meet UL 325 standards. Your Installer will recommend suitable entrapment devices such as photo eyes or edge devices. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P49

172 OVERHEAD GATE OPERATOR GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS HCTDCU Elite Series 24VDC High-Traffic Overhead Door and Gate Operator ENGINEERED FOR MORE THAN A MILLION CYCLES IN HIGH-TRAFFIC HEAVY-DUTY APPLICATIONS, THE LIFTMASTER ELITE SERIES HCTDCU IS DESIGNED TO MEET THE LOW CLEARANCE NEEDS OF APARTMENT BUILDINGS AND CONDOMINIUMS. The HCTDCU Gate Operator delivers unsurpassed safety, dependability and quiet operation. Industry-leading power management technology extends Battery Backup for up to 72 days without recharging, providing greater security and reliability. No one else can offer you that peace of mind. LiftMaster Elite Series Gate Operators feature the highest quality components and are backed by years of proven reliability. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY MyQ Technology enables you to securely control and monitor your gate operator from anywhere and get activity notifications through the MyQ App PERFORMANCE Battery Backup with exceptional standby power 72 days P3 Motors purpose-built high-cycle high temperature continuous duty 24VDC motor Soft start/stop and mid-travel reversal extends hardware life in high-cycle and heavy overhead door or gate applications Heavy-duty commercial gear-driven transmission provides unsurpassed reliability Designed with Noise Isolators for exceptionally quiet performance 1/4 in. gold zinc-plated chassis eliminates corrosion Low-Profile Design only 8 in. high Trolley Assembly Heavy-duty 12-gauge steel track with 6 UHMW rollers One-touch push-button electronic limit setting 2-digit LED diagnostic display Integrated Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 2 auxiliary power outlets Surge suppression/lightning protection up to 50 ft. away TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power: 120V/230V Single Phase Accessory Power: 24VDC 500mA output. Switched and unswitched power. Gate Travel Speed: 8 in. per second Shipping Weight: 8 ft.: 150 lbs. 10 ft.: 154 lbs. 12 ft.: 158 lbs. Warranty: 5 Years Commercial BATTERY BACKUP OPERATIONS Battery Cycles Standby Time (2) 7Ah Days RECOMMENDED CAPACITIES Max Weight (lbs.) Max Length (ft.) 800 lbs. 12 ft. For overhead doors or gates SAFETY Includes Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU)* 6 monitored safety inputs with colored terminal blocks (3 on main board, 3 on expansion board) UL /cul Listed, tested to the most stringent industry guidelines Security+ 2.0 Technology virtually eliminates interference and offers extended range each time the remote control is used 3-channel receiver OPEN/CLOSE/STOP Compatible with HOMELINK version 4 and higher Receiver stores up to 50 remote controls Inherent reversing sensor detects obstructions or increased loads. Reverses overhead door or gate when closing or stops/ reverses the overhead door or gate when opening. Fire department compliance PosiLock feature Pre-motion warning alarm Dynamic Braking System adds gate position control at all points in travel DIMENSIONS With rail variable lengths Powerhead 17.5" 22.0" 8.0" *Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge Sensors may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. P50 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

173 GATE OPERATORS Model Description HCTDCU Powerhead only HCT08 8 ft. rail only HCT10 10 ft. rail only HCT12 12 ft. rail only HCT08PKGU HCTDC package 8 ft rail & powerhead HCT10PKGU HCTDC package 10 ft rail & powerhead HCT12PKGU HCTDC package 12 ft rail & powerhead INCLUDED EXPANSION BOARD Plug-In Loop Detector inputs 3-second pre-motion warning alarm Advanced Traffic Management Control secures your property Anti-Tailgate stops the gate from closing when vehicle pulls onto interrupt loop or breaks photo eye beam. Gate continues down once vehicle backs up. Quick Close: gate closes immediately after vehicle pulls off the interrupt loop Inputs for 3 additional monitored safety devices 2 auxiliary programmable relays AVAILABLE LATE SUMMER 2016 This gate operator meets 2016 UL 325 standards. Important: To be UL 325 compliant, two monitored safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (the inherent reversing system in this gate operator counts as one device). **Internet Gateway accessory functionality is dependent on communication with a MyQ - Enabled Gate Operator. MyQ Technology communication can be limited by distance and type of exterior building materials. A general range estimate is 300 ft. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye (LMRRU) Sensing distance up to 50 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hood comes standard. Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes (LMTBU) Sensing distance up to 90 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Hoods come standard. Monitored Wireless Edge Kit (LMWEKITU) Contains receiver and transmitter to connect monitored edge to operator wirelessly. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters and two edges per transmitter. Sensing distance up to 130 ft., NEMA 4X rated. Monitored Wireless Edge Transceiver Only (LMWETXU) Contains wireless edge transmitter, 2 AA lithium batteries and mounting hardware. Monitored Small Profile Edges (S50, S504AL, S505AL, S506AL) Monitored Large Profile Edges (L50, L504AL, L505AL, L506AL) See Accessories section for complete list of monitored edges and edge options. Internet Gateway (828LM)** Connects your MyQ-Enabled Gate Operator to the Internet with this device and the free MyQ App. 2-Button and 4-Button Security+ 2.0 Learning Remote Controls (892LT/894LT) Can learn or clone other LiftMaster codes or frequencies. Universal DIP 1-Button and 3-Button Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls (811LM/813LM) Ideal for applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Plug-In Loop Detector (LOOPDETLM) 8 sensitivity settings, including boost. Power-efficient design uses less power to maximize cycles when operating on Battery Backup. Red/Green Traffic Light (RGL24LY) Indicates when a gate or door reaches the open position. Provides assurance of safe entering and exiting of the facility, reducing the potential for costly accidents. #41 Black Oxide Chain Pack ( D) 10 ft. chain pack, compatible with the RSL12U, CSL24U, SL3000 and HCTDCU. Internet Protocol Access Control (IPAC) Easy-to-use touch-screen outdoor access control system. Telephone Entry/Access Control System (EL2000SS) Highcapacity entry system. Wireless Commercial Keypad (KPW250) Sleek, zinc-alloy metal front cover designed for outdoor use. Compatible with Security+ 2.0, Security+, and Linear Multi-Code. 250-code capacity. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with the IPAC and Passport Receiver (PPWR). FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC P51 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

174 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS IPAC Internet Protocol Access Control From a single-family home to a gated community, our access control systems give you multiple options for managing access points. With entry systems to keypads, card readers to perimeter alert systems, our lineup of feature-rich options provides the perfect access solution for any need. By harnessing the power of a high-speed Internet connection, IPAC s innovative technology allows your Customers to work smarter and more effi ciently. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS KPR2000 Wired Keypad and Proximity Reader The LiftMaster KPR2000 is designed and manufactured to perform in a wide range of indoor, outdoor and harsh environments. MINIkey Stand Alone Wired Keypad System The MINIkey is a self-contained keypad system for the control of door and gated entrances. KPW5/KPW250 Wireless Commercial Keypad This keypad combines the simplicity of wireless installation with the robust feature sets of higher-priced keypad controllers. P52 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

175 EL2000 Multi-Tenant Telephone Entry System EL25 Single/Multi-Tenant Telephone Entry System EL1SS Telephone Intercom and Access Control System The EL2000 is fl exible enough to be used in apartment buildings, condo complexes, offi ce parks and commercial sites. The EL25 is capable of accepting up to 2,000 totally fl exible codes, making it ideal for virtually any installation. Connecting directly to your existing telephone line, the EL1SS greets visitors with a high-visibility backlit keypad and attractive styling. PPLX Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader The LiftMaster Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader offers high-end access control and security in a simple stand-alone format. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P53

176 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS IPAC Internet Protocol Access Control LIFTMASTER IPAC (INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS CONTROL) IS THE FIRST INTERNET-ENABLED OUTDOOR ACCESS CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM WITH VOICE-OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) TECHNOLOGY. By harnessing the power of a high-speed Internet connection, IPAC s innovative technology allows you to work smarter and more effi ciently as it transfers all data over the Internet. The web-based software provides instant access to your system from any browser, any device, anywhere. The contemporary product design and fi nish will keep your community looking modern and savvy with its intuitive color touchscreen interface. Plus, it is built to withstand the elements of tough environments and the demands of everyday use. STANDARD FEATURES Contemporary design colors, finish and materials Precision-craft, CNC machined aircraft-aluminum front panel is rust-free, color fade-resistant and dent-resistant Touchscreen interface: large touchscreen provides easy and familiar navigation for your residents and guests Modern UI full keyboard search lets guests quickly find a resident Built to handle extreme temperature, rated -20 F to 130 F A custom IP65 rated weathertight enclosure PPWR Security+ 2.0 Passport Receiver included, communicates with tri-band frequency, virtually eliminates interference and improves range. Compatible with Passport MAX and Passport Lite Remote Controls. Internet-powered IPAC uses the power of the Internet to transfer voice and data Limitless access to data, and instant access to your system from any browser. No dedicated computer, no software to install or maintain. Warranty: 1 Year GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL INFORMATION 16 DIMENSIONS group/security levels, 32 holiday schedules, 32 time schedules Height: 17.9 in. Width: in. Depth: 3.74 in. MATERIAL Front panel: T6061 aircraft aluminum alloy Enclosure: 13-gauge cold-rolled steel FINISH Front panel: Clear anodized aluminum fi nish Enclosure: Light gray powder-coat ENCLOSURE COMPONENTS Microphone Speaker LED lighted recessed faceplate PPWR Passport Receiver Display 10 in. color resistive touchscreen Dusk to dawn light sensor Heavy-duty piano hinge HID ProxPoint Plus Mini Card Reader Provision (optional) Touch keypad provision (optional) SUPPLY VOLTAGE 120VAC, 60Hz, 1.0 Amps Transformer Output 16VDC, 2.5 Amps Surge suppression EFT: 2 KV power line, ESD: 15Kb Hbm/8KV Direct/200V Mm (compliance with UL) 1.17 Amps (without accessories) OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Unit operating temperature range: 20 F to 130 F ENCLOSURE Outdoor IP65 rated 2 standard Wiegand inputs 12V, 250mA power output (per port) 4 relay outputs Single Pole Double Throw, maximum voltage of 30VDC/ AC and output current of 3 Amps ACCESS CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS 24/7 real-time data access management and monitoring standard Up to 50,000 total credentials, standard 50,000-transaction event buffer Up to 50,000 phone numbers and text notifi cation capability 16 group/security levels, 32 holiday schedules, 32 time schedules P54 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

177 SYSTEMS Model IPAC Description Internet Protocol Access Control EXPANSION COMPONENTS IPACIPDCC Internet Protocol Door Controller. Expand your IPAC System with this Power over Ethernet (PoE) solution. Each IPACIPDCC Controller has (2) Weigand inputs, (2) output relays and (2) REX inputs, all of which can be configured through the Hosted Cloud Service. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES CONT. HID ProxPoint Plus Mini Proximity Reader (SNARHIDPOINT) Provides multiple configuration options and is both sleek and inconspicuous. Keypad (IPACKEY) Sealed stylish aluminum keypad for customers requiring a physical keypad. Postal Lock Box (IPACPLB) Meets postal requirements while offering flexibility for right or left side installation. Camera Kit (IPACCAMK) High-performing camera is perfect for applications requiring visual installations. IPACTRK Paintable faceplate and shroud permit color customization. Metal shroud provides for better screen visibility and weather protection. Retrofit Trim Ring (IPACRTR) Makes installation easy when replacing both flush-mount Infinity L and ICON26 models. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. Hosted Cloud Services LIFTMASTER HOSTED CLOUD SERVICES ARE BUILT ON A FLEXIBLE, OPEN TECHNOLOGY to provide real-time monitoring and management of your access control system all from a browser, with no additional software to install anytime, anywhere. The scalable services allow facilities to expand their system as their needs evolve. FEATURES Manage the access control system for one or hundreds of facilities, utilizing our cloud-based service Use desktop or mobile browser to set schedules for customized facility access by person, time and location Unlimited site and device capacity Unlimited credentials and administrators Rules-based and text notifications Automatic software updates Customizable reporting engine IT-compliant hardware and communications SSAE-16, Safe Harbor and TRUSTe certified Industry-standard security device compatibility ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE IPAC INTERNET PROTOCOL DOOR CONTROL UNLIMITED SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERNET ISP COMMUNITY ACCESS CONTROL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE WAN (WIDE AREA NETWORK) REQUIRED SERVICES VoIP CLOUD ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE BENEFITS No expensive server appliances required Increased flexibility, reliability and resiliency Faster system deployment Future-proof functionality Minimal IT support needed CAPACITIES Unlimited active cardholders Unlimited number of system-wide readers/accounts/ workstations Maximum number of 60 customizable fields notifications can be configured by site Stored access events are available for up to 365 days Enable lockdown by doors or user groups Anti-pass back available in several configuration options BROWSER REQUIREMENTS Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 and 10 Google Chrome* Mozilla Firefox* Safari* for Mac *Latest versions supported All browser systems named are registered trademarks of their respective owners. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS NOTE: To learn more about the IPAC System or Hosted Cloud Service rates, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative for further assistance. P55

178 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS EL2000 Multi-Tenant Telephone Entry System THE EL2000 IS DESIGNED TO COMPLEMENT VIRTUALLY ANY GATED COMMUNITY AND IS FLEXIBLE ENOUGH TO BE USED IN APARTMENT BUILDINGS, CONDO COMPLEXES, OFFICE PARKS AND COMMERCIAL SITES. The EL2000 features a 5-inch backlit LCD screen; the unit EL2000LB clearly displays up to 4 lines with 20 characters per line, making it a great choice for multi-tenant installations. Unlike other systems, the EL2000 may be purchased as a base unit or ordered with optional plug-in modules, allowing you to offer a customized solution with only the modules you need. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS STANDARD FEATURES Remote Access Diagnostics E-Z Scan: cards and Passport transmitters can be programmed into the EL2000 simply by utilizing the card reader or radio receiver Voice prompts guide Installers through system setup at the unit s main keypad and provide assistance to end users with the push of a button (ADA application) Enhanced line noise tolerance Legacy database conversion: replacing an existing legacy telephone entry system is a snap with Versa XS 4.0 software; transfer any information retained in your existing legacy software database to Versa with the click of your mouse Call Waiting Recessed, lighted, ADA compliant keypad Auto sensor input: automatically dial the residence when a vehicle approaches the property Call button Distinctive ringing: double ring to distinguish a visitor request call Holiday programming, up to 16 separate holidays Time zones: up to 62 different time zones TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Colors: Nickel, Black, Gray, Stainless Steel Mounting Styles: Portrait Power: 12VAC Shipping Weight EL2000LB, EL2000LN, EL2000LG: 17 lbs. Shipping Weight EL2000SS: 20 lbs. EL2000SS Anti-Passback: timed anti-passback and true anti-passback Security lockout Automatic gate/door unlock schedule: entry points may be configured to automatically open or lock at set time periods Transaction monitoring: minimum of 4,000 transactions are stored in the unit, including date, time, unit ID and transaction Activity reports: property managers have the ability to print database, system and history reports Remote updates, firmware updates and upgrades may be made via a remote computer and modem connection Postal lock provision supports a switch kit that integrates with a U.S. Postal Service lock, allowing postal carriers entry to a controlled area using a U.S. Postal Service key 2,000 flexible codes that can be programmed. The codes can be split up any way you choose 500 directory codes, 1000 card codes, 500 entry codes, for example up to 2000 in total. 4 assignable and programmable built-in relays Warranty: 1 Year DIMENSIONS 16 group/security levels, 32 holiday schedules, 32 time schedules EL2000LB, EL2000LG, EL2000LN Height: 15 in. Width: 12 in. Depth: in. EL2000SS Height: 16 in. Width: in. Depth: 3.25 in. P56 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

179 SYSTEMS Model EL2000SS EL2000LB EL2000LG EL2000LN OPTIONAL FEATURES Plug-In Modules Optional plug-in adaptability lets you expand the EL2000 to work with many different types of controls. A two-reader Wiegand module lets you add card readers, keypads and proximity readers, all with full activity tracking. SOFTWARE Versa XS 4.0 is our menu-driven software configuration and database management tool for the EL2000 and EL25 Series Telephone Entry Systems (TES). Versa XS 4.0, a Microsoft Windowsbased software application, runs on most Windows personal computers to conveniently and securely configure, manage and update your property's access control records. Versa XS 4.0 can be downloaded for FREE at LiftMaster.com/softwaredownload. FEATURES Description Telephone Entry System LCD Unit Stainless Steel Telephone Entry System LCD Unit Black Telephone Entry System LCD Unit Gray Telephone Entry System LCD Unit Nickel FREE cloud storage for reliable data sharing and backups Modernized user interface with intuitive views Menu-driven software is based on user's role (Administrator or Standard User) Software can be loaded to any Windows-based PC Ability to bulk load and delete credentials Provides Standard Users the ability to latch and unlatch doors Remote programming with multiple users (utilizes Cloud Storage) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Camera (EL2000DVRCAMKT) Optional color low-lux camera compatible with DVR. EL25/2000 Wiegand Output Module Kit (WOMODKT) Plugs into existing EL Series and supports (2) Wiegand compatible remote access devices. Combo Keypad/Card Reader with Wiegand Output (HIDWOKPRO) 125 khz wall switch keypad proximity reader. Sealed for indoor or outdoor use. LCD Display Heater (ELHTRKT) Allows the EL2000 LCD display to maintain normal operation to approximately -20 F. Pedestal (PED42) 42 in. pedestal, multiple hold configuration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant finish. Pedestal (PED64) 64 in. pedestal, multiple hold configuration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant finish. Pedestal Mounting Kit (EL2000SSPKT) Allows you to mount an EL2000SS onto a standard or 2 x 2 in. gooseneck pedestal. Kit includes stainless steel mounting plate with gaskets and hardware. Trim Kit Narrow (EL2000SSTKN) This trim kit is compatible with model EL2000SS only. It includes a bezel, housing, mounting brackets and hardware. Retrofits to Dialcode, Infinity S/M. Trim Kit Wide (EL2000SSTKW) This trim kit is compatible with model EL2000SS only. It includes a bezel, housing, mounting brackets and hardware. Retrofits to Infinity L and ICON26. Passport Receiver (PPWR) Security+ 2.0 receiver compatible with LiftMaster access control solutions. Supports standard Wiegand protocol in two operational modes: Pass-Through and Advanced. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with PPWR, LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Residential Garage Door Openers. 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control (PPK3PHM) Remote control with Wiegand proximity sensor for access control integration with a card reader. Compatible with PPWR, LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Residential Garage Door Openers. Wired Keypad and Proximity Reader (KPR2000) Single-entry multi-function access controller with integrated keypad and card reader. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. P57

180 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS EL25 Single/Multi-Tenant Telephone Entry System THE EL25 IS BEAUTIFULLY ENGINEERED FOR PRIVATE RESIDENCES, YET POWERFUL AND ADAPTABLE ENOUGH TO BE USED IN APARTMENT BUILDINGS, CONDO COMPLEXES, OFFICE PARKS AND COMMERCIAL SITES. Unlike other systems, it may be purchased as a base unit or ordered with optional plug-in modules. This allows you to choose only the plug-in modules you need depending on the specifi cs of the job, enabling you to offer custom solutions right off the shelf without special orders. STANDARD FEATURES GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Do Not Disturb assignable by tenant Call Forwarding Call Waiting Recessed, lighted, ADA compliant keypad Auto sensor input: automatically dials the residence when a vehicle approaches the property Call button Legacy database conversion: replacing an existing legacy telephone entry system is a snap with Versa XS 4.0 software; transfer any information retained in your existing legacy software database to Versa with the click of your mouse Distinctive ringing: double ring to distinguish a visitor request call Entry codes: programmable codes can be time-restricted or established as one-time use only Holiday programming, up to 16 separate holidays Time zones: up to 62 different time zones with three segments each can be created for access/no-access schedules TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Colors: Nickel, Silver, Gray Mounting Styles: Portrait or Landscape Power: 12VAC Shipping Weight: 11 lbs. Anti-Passback: timed anti-passback or true anti-passback Security lockout Automatic gate/door unlock schedule: entry points may be configured to automatically open or lock at set time periods Transaction monitoring: minimum of 4,000 transactions are stored in the unit, including date, time, unit ID and transaction Activity reports: property managers have the ability to print database, system, and history reports Remote updates, firmware updates and upgrades may be made via a remote computer and modem connection 2,000 flexible codes that can be programmed. The codes can be split up any way you choose 500 directory codes, 1000 card codes, 500 entry codes, for example up to 2000 in total. 4 assignable and programmable built-in relays Mounting versatility: landscape or portrait 3 available finishes nickel, silver and gray Warranty: 1 Year DIMENSIONS 16 group/security levels, 32 holiday schedules, 32 time schedules Height: 6 in. Width: in. Depth: 4 in. P58 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

181 SYSTEMS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Model EL25G EL25N EL25S OPTIONAL FEATURES Plug-In Modules Optional plug-in adaptability lets you expand the EL25 to work with many different types of controls. A two-reader Wiegand module lets you add card readers, keypads and proximity readers, all with full activity tracking. DVR Camera Kit An optional color low-lux camera compatible with DVR is available. SOFTWARE Description Telephone Entry/Access Control System Gray Telephone Entry/Access Control System Nickel Telephone Entry/Access Control System Silver Versa XS 4.0 is our menu-driven software configuration and database management tool for the EL2000 and EL25 Series Telephone Entry Systems (TES). Versa XS 4.0, a Microsoft Windowsbased software application, runs on most Windows personal computers to conveniently and securely configure, manage and update your property's access control records. Versa XS 4.0 can be downloaded for FREE at LiftMaster.com/softwaredownload. FEATURES FREE cloud storage for reliable data sharing and backups Modernized user interface with intuitive views Menu-driven software is based on user's role (Administrator or Standard User) Software can be loaded to any Windows-based PC Ability to bulk load and delete credentials Provides Standard Users the ability to latch and unlatch doors Remote programming with multiple users (utilizes Cloud Storage) Camera (EL25DVRCAMKT) Optional color low-lux camera compatible with DVR. EL25/2000 Wiegand Output Module Kit (WOMODKT) Plugs into existing EL Series and supports (2) Wiegand compatible remote access devices. Combo Keypad/Card Reader with Wiegand Output (HIDWOKPRO) 125 khz wall switch keypad proximity reader. Sealed for indoor or outdoor use. Pedestal (PED42) 42 in. pedestal, multiple hold configuration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant finish. Pedestal (PED64) 64 in. pedestal, multiple hold configuration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant finish. Passport Receiver (PPWR) Security+ 2.0 receiver compatible with LiftMaster access control solutions. Supports standard Wiegand protocol in two operational modes: Pass-Through and Advanced. 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control (PPV3M) Compatible with PPWR, LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Residential Garage Door Openers. 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control (PPK3PHM) Remote control with Wiegand proximity sensor for access control integration with a card reader. Compatible with PPWR, LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Residential Garage Door Openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P59

182 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS EL1SS Telephone Intercom and Access Control System The LiftMaster EL1SS Telephone Intercom and Access Control System provides wired telephone intercom communication and secure access control at the gate or door. It is easy to install, and its rugged stainless steel housing provides reliable, durable performance year after year, all at an exceptional value. With the EL1SS, residents or small businesses can simply communicate with visitors and grant or deny access, all from the convenience of their phone. STANDARD FEATURES Connects directly to the existing residential home phone line so no additional monthly expenses are incurred Easy-to-install design saves an average of 10 minutes on installation time over older models Stainless-steel faceplate with black powder-coated housing is attractive and tough Weather-resistant and durable design is ideal for the outdoors Remote open feature opens two entrances independently from your home or office Intercom mode makes use of existing telephone systems, even if your customers have a cellular only home Call waiting allows customers to answer an incoming guest call while on another line Call forward allows your customers to greet visitors, even when they are not home Party mode is designed to conveniently hold open the entryway Warranty: 2 Years GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS UL Listed: AC/DC adapter, 115VAC input, 16VDC, 2.5A, 40W output transformer included Relay Outputs: Two (2) independently controlled (latched and timed) 10 Amp (Form C) relays Audio Circuit: Full Duplex voice communication Auto-Call: Auto-Call for dry contact call initialization Programming: Unit keypad or from touch-tone phone Entry Codes: 200 (4-digit) unique programmable entry codes Operating Temperature: -4 F (-20 C) to 149 F (65 C) Storage and Shipping Temperature Range: -40 F (-40 C) to 185 F (85 C) Faceplate: Brushed stainless steel Rear Housing: Black powder-coated stainless steel Regulatory: FCC part 15, IC Compliant and Industry Canada NEMA Rating: 3R Telephone Connectivity: Compatible with common POTs lines to residence, business Telephone Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.5B Bypass Board: Included (ability to disconnect EL1SS and maintain house phone if required) DIMENSIONS 16 group/security levels, 32 holiday schedules, 32 time schedules Height: 6.25 in. Width: 10 in. Depth: 5.25 in. SYSTEMS Model EL1SS Description Telephone Intercom and Access Control System OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Mounting Option (PED42) 42 in. pad-mount, 2 x 2 in. square black powder-coated pedestal. Mounting Option (PED64) 64 in. in-ground-mount, 2 x 2 in. square black powder-coated pedestal. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. P60 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

183 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P61

184 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS dwellinglive Credentialed Access CREDENTIALED ACCESS HARDWARE IS THE PERFECT SOLUTION FOR COMMUNITIES OF ANY SIZE AND IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE LIFTMASTER SYSTEM. Through an intuitive interface accessible from any web browser managers can administer the system. It has never been easier to issue transponders, wallet cards and keyfobs and to monitor their activity in real time. Both hardware and software are required to run a LiftMaster system. HARDWARE GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS V2000 Controller/Interface Combo 2 Readers DL91101 All-in-one host and interface combo. 2-door maximum, not expandable. V100 Interface 2 Readers DL91103 Access control for 2 doors. Requires host controller. V1000 Controller 32 Interfaces DL91102 Web-based host that connects up to 32 2-door interfaces. V300 Output Control Interface DL91111 Output control up to 12 devices. Ideal for elevator controls. HID iclass SE Readers DL91105 iclass SE R40 Wall Switch DL91106 iclass SE R10 Mini Mullion DL91107 iclass SE RK40 Keypad Combo DL91109 iclass SE R15 Mullion Mount Next generation platform with unmatched security encryption. P62 For more information, contact your LiftMaster Access Control Specialist at

185 HID iclass SE Credentials DL91204 iclass SE Key II Contactless Smart Key DL91206 iclass SE Contactless Smart Card DL91207 iclass SE Clamshell Contactless Smart Card Provides the highest level of security. For use with HID iclass SE Readers. HID MultiCLASS SE Readers DL91112 MultiCLASS SE RP10 Mini Mullion DL91113 MultiCLASS SE RP15 Mullion Mount DL91114 MultiCLASS SE RP40 Wall Switch DL91115 MultiCLASS SE RPK40 Keypad Combo Ideal for upgrading from Prox. Compatible with iclass SE and Prox Cards. HID Prox Readers DL91108 ProxPoint Plus 6005 Mini Mullion DL91116 MiniProx 5365 DL91117 ThinLine II 5395 DL91118 ProxPro with Keypad 5355 Provides low-cost, entry-level security. HID Prox Credentials DL91201 Prox 1346 ProxKey III DL91203 Prox 1386 ISOProx Card (imaginable) DL91205 Prox 1326 ProxCard II Clamshell Card Provides low-cost, entry-level security. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P63

186 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Visitor Management, Attended Gates GATE ATTENDANTS CAN EXPEDITE VISITOR AND RESIDENT ACCESS THROUGH PURPOSE- BUILT COMPUTERS, WHILE STILL MAINTAINING A HIGHLY PROFESSIONAL IMAGE. Both hardware and software are required to run a LiftMaster system. HARDWARE GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS App Station DL92401XXX App Station with Printer and Paper DL92403XXX App Station Replacement Only All-in-one, plug-and-play desktop computer with thermal pass printer and 2,000 visitor passes. NOTE: Must specify time zone (PST, ARZ, MST, CST, EST) in place of XXX when ordering. Gate Entry Opener DL92415 Validates and opens gate barrier for visitors. USB connection and 2-terminal relay. Requires DL92419 Scanner. For use with App Station only. Visitor Pass and Driver s License Scanner DL92419 Wireless scanner with cradle that scans mobile phone epasses or paper passes and registers driver s license information. Opens gate automatically with DL Printer Replacement Only DL92451 Thermal visitor pass printer. App Station required. Phone Auto Dialer DL click speed dialing for attendants with USB connection. For use with App Station only. P64 For more information, contact your LiftMaster Access Control Specialist at

187 GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P65

188 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Visitor Management System Front Desk THE FRONT DESK HARDWARE OFFERS FUNCTIONALITY AND SIMPLICITY FOR ALL USERS. Guests are granted entry by a single click of a button and able to manage deliveries with ease. These tools are essential to effi ciently manage any multifamily building. Both hardware and software are required to run a LiftMaster system. HARDWARE GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Package Scanner DL93101 Process packages with this wireless scanner with USB connection for cradle. Visitor Badge Printer DL93103 Thermal visitor badge printer. Badge labels included. Installation of drivers required. Package E-Signature Pad DL93102 Collect signatures for package processing via USB connection. Installation of drivers required. P66 For more information, contact your LiftMaster Access Control Specialist at

189 Visitor Management, Attended Gates, Cont. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P67

190 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS KPR2000 Wired Keypad and Proximity Reader THE LIFTMASTER KPR2000 IS A SINGLE-ENTRY MULTI-FUNCTION ACCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED KEYPAD AND CARD READER. It is designed and manufactured to perform in a wide range of indoor, outdoor and harsh environments. The KPR2000 supports up to 2,000 users in multiple access confi gurations (card only, card or PIN, or card and PIN). The built-in 125 KHz card reader supports HID 26-bit Wiegand and 30-bit legacy Wiegand proximity card formats. The KPR2000 offers advanced programming features like block enrollment, advanced relay programming and panic PINs/cards (which open the entry and set off an alarm). FEATURES Waterproof keypad and proximity card reader in one device Vandal-resistant enclosure 2,000-user capacity (card, PIN, card and PIN) Stand-Alone or Pass-Through operation Supports HID 26- and 30-bit Wiegand proximity card formats Multicolored LED status display and backlit keypad Block enrollment One programmable relay output Anti-tamper alarm Two keypad operating modes Latch mode to hold door or gate open Capable of networking (2) KPR2000s, KPR2000 to the PPWR or to most access control systems TECHNICAL INFORMATION GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SPECIFICATIONS Operating Voltage: 12 24VDC Proximity Card Reader: HID 26- and 30-bit Wiegand Formats Radio Technology: 125 KHz Industry Standard Proximity Card Read Range - Proximity: in. Environment: Meets or exceeds IP68 Physical: Zinc-Alloy Enclosure Surface Finish: Powder Coat Dimensions: 5 L x 3.2 W x1.1 D 128mm L x 82mm W x 28mm D SYSTEMS Model KPR2000 Description Wired Keypad and Proximity Reader OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Gooseneck Pedestal (PED42) 42 in. pedestal, multiple hold confi guration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant fi nish. Gooseneck Pedestal (PED64) 64 in. in ground mount pedestal, 2x2 in. square pipe, black powder coat fi nish 11 ga steel. PS12D2A Power supply, plug-in 12VDC, 2 Amp. Trim Plate (142A0271) 4 x 4 in. Decorative trim piece for face plate, powder-coated fi nish, black. Proximity Card (SNACPH32) HID 30-bit proximity card, facility code 2. Proximity Card (SNACPH39) HID 30-bit proximity card, facility code 9. Proximity Key (SNACPKH32) HID 30-bit proximity key, facility code 2. Passport Receiver (PPWR) Security+ 2.0 receiver compatible with LiftMaster Access Control solutions. Supports standard Wiegand protocol in two operational modes: Pass-Through and Advanced. 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control (PPK3PHM) Remote control with Weigand proximity sensor for access control integration with a card reader. Compatible with PPWR, LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Residential Garage Door Openers. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. P68 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

191 MINIkey Stand-Alone Wired Keypad System THE MINIKEY IS A SELF-CONTAINED KEYPAD SYSTEM FOR THE CONTROL OF DOOR AND GATED ENTRANCES. The MINIkey is engineered to be rugged, vandal-resistant and enhance your site with a well-crafted look for interior or exterior use. It consists of a brushed stainless steel faceplate with a recessed, side-lit metal keypad for excellent visibility, day or night. Despite its compact size, the MINIkey is loaded with many features not normally found in other single door and gated entry access control systems. MK500GS FEATURES Four- or five-digit entry codes Strikes out: the system can be programmed to permit from 1 to 10 attempts prior to engaging the lockout Two relays can be controlled individually or together Time clock input Programmable relay times from 1 99 seconds Non-volatile memory to ensure database is retained Lightning protection on inputs Relay hold capacity Sealed, lighted metal keypad Warranty: 1 Year TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Capacity: 500 codes Dimensions: Surface Mount: 4.5 in. H x 4.5 in. W x 3.5 in. D Flush Mount: 4.75 in. H x 4.75 in. W x 3 in. D Power: 12VAC or 13.5VDC SYSTEMS Model MK500GS MK500GF Description MINIkey grained stainless steel, surface mount, 500-code capacity MINIkey grained stainless steel, fl ush mount, 500-code capacity OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Pedestal (PED42) 42 in. pedestal, multiple hold confi guration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant fi nish. Pedestal (PED64) 64 in. pedestal, multiple hold confi guration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant fi nish. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P69

192 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS KPW5/KPW250 Wireless Commercial Keypad DURABLE, WEATHERTIGHT DESIGN NOW FEATURES SECURITY+ 2.0 for enhanced performance and reliability. Electronics are fully sealed and rated NEMA 4X (meeting water protection requirements) while the enclosures are rated NEMA 3R, assuring they will work, rain or shine. These new keypads are designed for rugged outdoor commercial use. The KPW250 provides additional functionality with compatibility to Security+ products as well as Linear Multi-Code 300 MHz, making it the perfect wireless keypad to keep on your truck for almost all of your applications. KPW5 KPW250 FEATURES Compatible with all new LiftMaster operators Easily add or delete a single PIN Weatherproof for outdoor environments Keyed lock design KPW250 designed with zinc alloy cover KPW5 designed with high impact polycarbonate cover Up to 500 ft. range Internal antenna Industrial metal keypad with blue LED backlight 5-year 9V lithium battery Warranty: 1 Year GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SYSTEMS Model Description KPW250* Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0, Security+ and Linear Multi-Code receivers, 250-code capacity KPW5* Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 receivers, 5-code capacity Subject to Access Control Multipliers OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Pedestal (PED42) 42 in. pedestal, multiple hold confi guration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant fi nish. Pedestal (PED64) 64 in. pedestal, multiple hold confi guration faceplate, pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square post, black powder-coated weather-resistant fi nish. FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE OUR ACCESSORIES SECTION. *Wireless controls are used to supplement hardwired, push-button and key control stations. Wireless controls cannot be used in place of hardwired controls in the absence of safety devices. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC P70 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

193 PPLX Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader CARD ACCESS HAS BEEN OUT OF REACH FOR MOST OWNERS OF SMALL TO MEDIUM-SIZED BUSINESSES. The cost of technology is prohibitive, and up to this point it has been designed for large governmental, commercial and industrial users. The LiftMaster Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader offers high-end access control and security in a simple stand-alone format. This system allows for up to 50,000 user proximity cards or keyfobs in minutes. Also, the PPLX allows for simple deletion of lost or stolen cards without the need to reprogram the entire user set. Rugged and durable, the PPLX is sealed in a weatherproof (IP67) enclosure and can be easily mounted to any fl at interior or exterior surface, or installed in any single-gang electrical enclosure. For convenience, a handheld radio programming unit (PPRP) eliminates the need to bring a laptop computer to program the stand-alone unit. FEATURES 6 in. read range 50,000-user capacity Programmable output relay (N.O./N.C.) Multiple Wiegand protocol (legacy 26-bit industry standard, Passport) Latch mode to hold the door or gate open Timed Anti-Passback Logic Programmable as Stand-Alone or Wiegand Pass-Through Simple-to-use handheld radio programmer (Model PPRP) Warranty: 1 Year TECHNICAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: 5 14VDC, 150mA (max. load) Outputs: SPST Solid-State relay. 1 Amp 60VAC or DC Normally open or normally closed (fi eld programmable) Inputs: Default is remote OPEN (requires contact closure). Also programmable as bi-color (Red or Green) LED Control or Buzzer/LED Control for online systems (see Operating Guide). Wiegand Output: Any Wiegand Format up to 40 bits. Maximum Distance: 500 ft. 5 or 8 conductor 20-gauge. Shielded cable. Environment: Access Control Unit and Cards Ambient Temp. -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F) Humidity 0 to 95% (noncondensing) Shipping Weight: 6 lbs. SYSTEMS Model PPLX PPRP PPCSC PS12D2A Description Stand-Alone Proximity Reader Proximity Radio Programmer Proximity Card (Clamshell) Power Supply 12VDC 2.0 Amps GATE OPERATORS AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS P71

194 GARAGE DOOR OPENERS COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS GATE OPERATORS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS RADIO CONTROLS

195 ACCESSORIES TABLE OF CONTENTS Garage Door Openers...A2 Remote Controls...A2 Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls...A2 Security+ Remote Controls...A3 Wireless Keyless Entry...A3 Control Panels...A4 Security+ 2.0 Control Panels...A4 Security+ Control Panels...A5 Universal Remote Control and Wireless Keyless Entry...A5 MyQ Accessories...A6 Other Accessories...A7 Commercial Door Operators...A10 Important Safety Information...A10 Safe Installation Procedures...A11 Monitored and Ancillary Safety Entrapment Protection...A12 Monitored Photo Eyes...A12 Non-Monitored Photo Eyes...A12 Commercial Door Edge Entrapment Protection Systems...A14 Optical Edge System (OES)...A14 Ancillary Entrapment Protection...A15 Light Curtain...A15 Power Transformer...A15 Sensing Edges...A15 Pneumatic Edge Kits...A15 Individual Pneumatic Components...A15 Commercial Door Controls...A16 Push-Button Control Stations...A16 Pull-Switch Controls...A18 Key Control Stations...A19 Two-Position Key Controls...A19 Two-Position Key Controls with STOP Button...A20 Custom Control Panels...A21 Radio Control Section...A22 Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls...A22 Security+ Remote Controls...A22 Digital Remote Controls...A23 Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Receivers...A23 Antennas...A23 Wireless Commercial Door and Entry Controls...A23 Wireless Commercial Keypads...A24 Mounting Posts...A24 Wireless Digital Keypads...A24 Vehicle Detection Systems...A25 Outdoor Wireless Enclosure...A25 Pre-formed Loop Wire...A25 Entry Controls and Safety Accessories...A26 Vehicle Detection Systems...A26 Motion Detector...A27 Safety Accessories and Miscellaneous...A28 Sensing Edge Connections...A28 Plug-In Option Cards...A28 Audible/Visible Warning Devices...A29 Warning Signs and Labels...A30 Miscellaneous Control Accessories...A31 Mounting Accessories/Hardware...A32

196 Gate Operators...A34 Important Safety Information...A34 Safe Installation Procedures...A35 Safety Entrapment Devices...A36 Through-Beam Photo Eyes...A36 Retro-Reflective Photo Eyes...A37 Sensing Edge Systems...A38 Emergency Devices...A41 Fire Access Boxes...A41 Audible/Visible Warning Devices...A42 Warning Sign...A42 Detectors...A43 Loop Detectors...A43 Loop Detectors for Outdoor Use...A44 Loop Wire Spools...A45 Pre-Formed Loop Wire...A45 Saw-Cut Loops...A45 Pave-Over Loops...A45 Sealant...A46 Sensing Probes...A46 Control Devices...A47 3-Button Control Stations...A47 2-Button Control Stations...A47 2-Position Key Controls with STOP Button...A48 Timers...A48 Optional Kits...A49 Heater Kits...A49 Service Kits...A50 Field Kits and Modules...A51 Power Devices...A53 Solar Packages...A53 Solar Panels...A53 Batteries...A53 Solar Accessories...A54 Surge Suppressors and Power Supply...A54 Barrier Arms and Barrier Arm Accessories...A55 Barrier Arms for Mega Arm Operators...A55 Articulating Arm...A57 Barrier Arm Accessories for Mega Arm Operators...A57 Barrier Arms for BG Operators...A58 Barrier Arm Accessories for BG Operators...A59 Hardware...A60 Wheels...A60 Hinges...A61 Miscellaneous Gate Hinges...A61 Wheel Mounting Brackets...A61 Wheel Covers...A62 V-Track...A62 Guide Rollers...A62 Jamb-Track Assembly...A63 Locks...A64 Bulk Pack Chains...A64 Mounting Accessories for Gate Operators...A65 Mounting Accessories for Control Boxes...A65 Miscellaneous Hardware...A65 Access Control Systems...A66 Remote Controls...A66 Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls...A66 Security+ Remote Controls...A66 Remote Controls and Wireless Keypads...A67 DIP Remote Controls...A67 Multi-Code Remote Control...A MHz Remote Controls...A67 Security+ 2.0 Commercial Wireless Keypads...A67 Receivers...A68 Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Receivers...A68 Security+ Commercial and Gated Community Receivers...A68

197 Passport Credentialed Radio Control Solutions...A70 Security+ 2.0 Passport Solution...A70 Security+ 2.0 Passport Receiver...A70 Passport MAX Remote Controls...A71 Passport Lite Remote Controls...A71 Card Readers...A72 HID iclass SE Readers...A72 HID Multiclass SE Readers...A72 HID Prox Readers...A73 Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader...A74 PPLX Components...A74 Credentialed Cards...A75 IPAC Accessories...A76 EL2000 Accessories...A77 EL25 Accessories...A78 Standard Pedestals...A79 Mounting Posts...A79 Miscellaneous Pedestals...A79 Surge Suppressors and Protection...A80 Radio Controls...A82 MyQ Accessories...A82 Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls...A83 Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Radio Controls...A84 Security+ Commercial and Gated Community Receivers...A84 Security+ Remote Controls...A85 Passport Credentialed Radio Control Solutions...A86 Security+ 2.0 Passport Solution...A86 Security+ 2.0 Passport Receiver...A86 Passport MAX Remote Controls...A87 Passport Lite Remote Controls...A87 Wireless Keyless Entry...A88 Universal Remote Control and Wireless Keyless Entry...A88 Commercial Operator and Gate Receiver Accessories...A89 Wireless Commercial Keypads...A90 Security+ 2.0 Commercial Wireless Keypads...A90 Transformers...A91 Surge Protection...A80 Transformers...A81 Antennas...A81

198 ACCESSORIES Garage Door Openers Remote Controls 3-Button Remote Control (893MAX) Program up to three garage door openers, gate operators, commercial door operators or MyQ Light Accessories. With Security+ 2.0, users are assured of a new code with every use. Remote Controls and Keypads feature narrow-band multi-frequency (310/315/390 MHz), Rolling Code Technology. MAX models are compatible with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and Radio Receivers manufactured since January Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls 890MAX 893LM 3-Button Mini Remote Control Fits in purse, pocket or on a keychain. Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Compatible with all Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators manufactured by LiftMaster since January Button Standard Remote Control Powerful multi-door remote control. Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. ACCESSORIES 891LM 1-Button Standard Remote Control Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator, Commercial Door Operator or MyQ Accessory. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 375UT* 2-Button Universal Remote Control Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 374UT* 2-Button Mini Universal Remote Control Sleek, small design is perfect for key rings, purses and backpacks. Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. *See Radio Compatibility Chart on page A5 of this section. A2 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

199 Security+ Remote Controls 373LM 3-Button Remote Control Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and/or Gate Operators. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. 371LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. 971LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Garage Door Openers with orange or red learn buttons or gray antennas. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. Wireless Keyless Entry Wireless Keyless Entry (877MAX) Open or close the garage door instantly with a private 4-digit code. Program temporary access codes for visitors or delivery and service personnel. One-button-to-close feature works with all LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured since Compatible with all Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators manufactured by LiftMaster since January LM Wireless Keyless Entry Features only LiftMaster Security Open or close the garage door instantly with a private 4-digit code. Program temporary access codes for visitors or delivery and service personnel. Mounts outside garage for convenient access. 377LM Wireless Keyless Entry Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 315 MHz Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and Radio Control Receivers. Temporary password option. Program code directly from keypad. 387LM* Universal Wireless Keyless Entry Compatible with most major brands of garage door openers. Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Users can also program a temporary code for visitors or delivery and service personnel. Completely wireless installation. ACCESSORIES *See Radio Compatibility Chart on page A5 of this section. A3

200 ACCESSORIES Garage Door Openers Control Panels MyQ Control Panel (888LM) Provides the MyQ Technology upgrade to LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured after 1998 that have safety photo eyes, enabling monitoring and control with a tablet, PC or smartphone with the free MyQ App. Also provides the upgrade needed to utilize Security The MyQ Control Panel is equipped with the Timerto-Close and Motion Detection features. Motion Detection activates the Garage Door Opener lights. Lock button locks out remote controls for added security. Security+ 2.0 Control Panels 880LM 881LM 885LM Smart Control Panel Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Accessories; adjust settings and get system diagnostics. Equipped with the Timer-to-Close and Motion Detection features. LCD display features time, temperature, maintenance alerts and trouble messages. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. Motion-Detecting Control Panel with Timer-to-Close Automatically turns on the light when motion is detected. Equipped with the Timer-to-Close feature, which automatically closes the garage door after a pre-programmed number of minutes. Includes maintenance alerts. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. Wireless Control Panel Controls a Garage Door Opener and light. Completely wireless installation. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. ACCESSORIES 886LM Motion-Detecting Control Panel Automatically turns on the light when motion is detected. Includes Garage Door Opener light control, lockout remote controls for added security and Maintenance Alert System. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. 882LM Multi-Function Control Panel Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Accessories from the control panel. Includes garage door opener light control. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. 883LM Door-Control Button Program remote controls, keypads and MyQ Accessories from the control panel. Controls a Garage Door Opener and turns opener lights on and off. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers. A4 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

201 Security+ Control Panels 378LM Wireless Secondary Control Panel Program up to two Garage Door Openers wirelessly. Can be installed anywhere in the garage. Controls Garage Door Opener and turns opener lights on and off. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 315 MHz Garage Door Openers. 78LM Multi-Function Control Panel Turn Garage Door Opener lights on and off from inside the garage. Includes adjustable light timer, illuminated push button for convenience and lockout button for added security. Compatible with all LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured since LM Lighted Door Control Button Enables you to operate your garage door from inside the garage. Compatible with all LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured since Universal Remote Control and Wireless Keyless Entry 375UT 374UT* 387LM 2-Button Universal Remote Control Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 2-Button Mini Universal Remote Control Sleek, small design is perfect for key rings, purses and backpacks. Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Universal Wireless Keyless Entry Compatible with most major brands of garage door openers and gate operators. Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Users can also program a temporary code for friends and service people. Completely wireless installation. RADIO COMPATIBILITY CHART: Manufacturer/ Code Format LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Rolling Code LiftMaster Security+ Rolling Code LiftMaster Billion Code LiftMaster DIP Switch (7, 8 & 9 pos.)* Genie Intellicode Rolling Code Genie DIP Switch (9 and 12 pos.)* Frequency 310/315/390 MHz 315 or 390 MHz 390 MHz 390 MHz 315 or 390 MHz 390 MHz Manufacturer/ Code Format Multi-Code Linear MegaCode Moore-O-Matic DIP Switch (8 pos.) (Delta3 )* Stanley SecureCode Rolling Code Stanley DIP Switch (10 pos.)* Wayne-Dalton Frequency 300 MHz 318 MHz 310 MHz 310 MHz 310 MHz 372 MHz ACCESSORIES *2-Button Mini Universal Remote Control (374UT) does not support DIP technology. LiftMaster is a trademark of The Chamberlain Group. Intellicode is a trademark of Genie Company. Multi-Code, MegaCode and Delta3 are trademarks of Nortek Security & Control LLC. Stanley SecureCode is a trademark of The Stanley Works. A5

202 ACCESSORIES Garage Door Openers MyQ Accessories Internet Gateway (828LM) Easily add smartphone control to MyQ-enabled products from LiftMaster. Compatible only with MyQ-enabled garage door openers, commercial door operators, gate operators and MyQ Accessories. Use a tablet, PC or smartphone with the free MyQ App to monitor door status, receive door activity alerts and operate doors, gates and lights. Simple user-friendly installation. MYQPCK MyQ Upgrade Kit Provides the MyQ Technology upgrade to LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured after 1998 that have safety photo eyes, enabling monitoring and control with a tablet, PC or smartphone with the free MyQ App. Also provides the upgrade needed to utilize Security LM MyQ Garage Easily add MyQ smartphone control to most other major brand garage door openers that have safety photo eyes. Control up to two garage door openers (requires extra door sensor, sold separately). Add MyQ light control accessories for even greater home control. 829LM Door and Gate Monitor Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside your house. Green and red LED lights indicate whether the garage door or gate is open or closed. Volume controlled audible alert lets you know when the garage door or gate is being opened. Compatible only with LiftMaster Wi-Fi or MyQ-enabled Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators. ACCESSORIES 823LM Remote Light Switch Control lights remotely. Replace existing light switches to control lights* in your garage, yard or inside your home with your smartphone and free MyQ app or with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Requires a LiftMaster Wi-Fi Garage Door Opener, Internet Gateway (828LM), or a MyQ Garage (821LM) for smartphone control. (*Supports single pole lights.) 825LM Remote Light Control Control lamps with your smartphone and free MyQ app or with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Simply plug into an outlet and plug a lamp into the Remote Light Control. Requires a LiftMaster Wi-Fi Garage Door Opener, Internet Gateway (828LM) or a MyQ Garage (821LM) for smartphone control. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance A6 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

203 Other Accessories Integrated Battery Backup (485LM) Operates the Garage Door Opener as if the power was still on, plus all safety and security features will be operational. For use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers (models 8550W, 8360 and 3850). 475LM 975LM 197LM Battery Backup Powers up even when the power is out, so Customers can get into the garage. For use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers (models 8500, 2500, 3800, 3500, 3900 and 3950). Laser Garage Parking Assist Maximizes usable garage space so the driver knows exactly where to park and when to stop. Works automatically when the safety beam is interrupted, so the car is parked in the right spot every time. A pulsating beam turns on for 90 seconds, allowing the driver to pull the car into the garage so the laser hits a pre-targeted spot on the dash. Wire Channel Neatly conceals all wires. Holds up to three pairs of wires and comes in ft. sections per box (1 box = 500 ft.). 97LM Photo Eye Mounting Bracket Extension Adds height or depth to photo eye mounting bracket. Includes hardware, instructions and 10 pairs per box. 59LM Outside Key Lock Provides double-locking action with 12 tumblers. Lock has a self-cleaning barrel and weather-resistant aluminum faceplate. It includes two keys and all necessary mounting hardware. Cannot be shorted out from exterior. (Not compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers.) 89LM Mounting Isolators Isolates vibration between garage door opener head and mounting surface. ACCESSORIES A7

204 ACCESSORIES Garage Door Openers Other Accessories (continued) 1702LM Deluxe Quick-Release Lock Designed for all vault-type garages, the 6 ft. industrialstrength connecting cable is for exterior manual operation. Lock has a noncorrosive stainless steel faceplate and spur washer, extension sleeve for doors up to 2 in. thick and positive connection between cable and trolley release, with two keys included. 20-2LM 2-Strand Bell Wire White and red/white color-coded wires for pre-wiring control panels. All wire is 22-gauge and UPS shippable. Each roll is 500 ft. in length. 21-2LM 2-Strand Bell Wire Color-coded wires for pre-wiring photo eyes. All wire is 22-gauge and UPS shippable. Each roll is 500 ft. in length. For 8500 Wall Mount, Other Accessories 380LM Remote Light Garage space is lit up by placing this in any location in the garage within 6 ft. of an outlet. Provides 200 Watts of light with 1/2- to 4-1/2-minute timer. For LiftMaster Garage Door Openers (models 8500 and 3800). 480LM Alternate Mounting Kit Designed for garages with low headroom (less than 3 in.) or obstructions near the end of the torsion bar, like a beam. For LiftMaster Garage Door Openers (models 8500, 3800 and 3900). 580LM Alternate Power System For the installation of LiftMaster Garage Door Openers (side-mount opener models 8500 and 3800) when an outlet is not available within 6 ft. of the installation site. Easily installed, UL Listed and includes 24VDC transformer and interface box with plug for optional 475LM Battery Backup. All mounting hardware included and provides 35 ft. of low-voltage cable. (Not compatible with MyQ Technology.) ACCESSORIES A8 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

205 ACCESSORIES A9

206 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION WARNING To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, the following should be read by ANYONE involved in the design, specification, selection or purchase of a Commercial Door Operator or automated door system. ACCESSORIES Automated Door Systems For the purposes of this Safety Information, an automated door system consists of a vehicular door, an electric door operator, control equipment to interface with the door operator and safety equipment to protect people and property. Vehicular Doors A vehicular door is a large, heavy object that moves with the help of a counterbalance and electric motor. A moving door can cause SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH! The safety and well-being of others depends on properly selecting products appropriate for the application and installing the products per the manufacturer s recommendations. In addition, it is imperative that all door components, including the operator, be installed and serviced by a trained door systems Technician. The door itself must be properly balanced and aligned and work freely and smoothly by hand. The door operator is not intended to operate a poorly installed, improperly balanced or worn-out door. The use of a door operator to attempt to compensate for any door defect can result in a dangerous situation. Door Operator Selection The proper door operator must be selected for the application. Pay attention to all application information in this catalog, including door type, size, voltage and control wiring. IMPROPER SELECTION CAN RESULT IN A DANGEROUS SYSTEM. Be sure you understand the application and limitations of the door operator model you select for your door. If you are in doubt, contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. Safety Devices Door operators can present serious hazards to persons in the immediate area. After you have selected your operator, the next step is to choose appropriate safety devices. Any commercial/industrial door operator manufacturer wishing to be fully compliant with the requirements mandated by the UL 325 regulations must manufacture with constant-pressure-to-close or be equipped with a monitored primary entrapment protection device. The UL 325 standard requires continuous monitoring of primary safety devices if the operator is used with any operating mode or feature other than constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door. These types of primary safety devices can be either monitored photo eyes or a 2- or 4-wire monitored sensing edge. Other Entrapment Protection Devices will be treated as ancillary or non-monitored. Installation of these types of safety devices is optional. Examples of these devices are 2-wire non- and pneumatic sensing edges. These devices cannot be substituted for monitored primary entrapment protection devices; instead, these devices may be used to supplement the primary devices or constant-pressure-toclose. Such devices can be attached to UL 325 compliant Logic 4.0, Logic 5.0 and Medium-Duty Logic Operators, but cannot be used to replace the primary safety devices. There are many types of primary and ancillary entrapment devices available, but LiftMaster operators are designed to communicate with LiftMaster brand monitored primary entrapment protection devices only. Four types of LiftMaster photo eyes, the standard commercial/industrial CPS-U, NEMA 4 rated CPS-UN4, as well as the CPS-RPEN4 and CPS-OPEN4, may be installed on a LiftMaster Operator in order to achieve any operating mode or feature beyond constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door. In addition, LiftMaster also offers an Optical Edge System, which permits the attachment of a 2-wire monitored edge to satisfy the requirement for monitored primary entrapment protection. For easy reference, all UL 325 compliant LiftMaster Operator installation manuals provide a reference chart stating which safety devices have been approved for each operator. The UL 325 listing is dependent on testing each operator with each of the approved entrapment protection devices. Only those safety devices approved by UL for use with the operator as monitored primary entrapment protection devices are referenced in the instruction manual. While LiftMaster Operators provide basic constant pressure on the CLOSE button to lower the door without a primary entrapment device, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT SAFETY EQUIPMENT BE USED WITH EVERY DOOR OPERATOR. There are many types of safety devices available; photo eyes, optical edges, motion detectors and vehicle detectors are some of the more common types of primary and ancillary entrapment protection devices shown in the Accessories section of this catalog. Audible and/or visible warning devices are recommended when automatic controls are used in the Commercial Door Operating system. A variety of warning signs and labels are also offered in this section. WITHOUT SAFETY EQUIPMENT THE DOOR COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH! A10 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

207 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Door operators and associated control equipment should only be installed and serviced by qualified professionals. Professional Installers should observe the following safe installation procedures. To ensure that this is the case, provide a copy of this Safety Information Section to the Installer. 1. Read and follow all warnings and instructions within the installation manual. 2. Install the door operator only on a properly balanced and lubricated door. An improperly balanced door may not reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 3. All repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware MUST be made by a trained door Systems Technician BEFORE installing the operator. 4. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to the door before installing the operator to avoid entanglement. 5. Install door operator 8 ft. or more above floor. Operators installed below this height must be enclosed with an operator cover. 6. NEVER connect the door operator to a power source until instructed within the manual to do so. 7. Installation and wiring must be in compliance with all applicable local building and electrical codes. 8. NEVER wear watches, rings or loose clothing, which could become caught within the door or operator mechanisms, while installing or servicing the door operator. 9. Install control station: Within sight of the door Out of reach of children at a minimum height of 5 ft. Away from ALL moving parts of the door 10. Install the control station far enough from the door to prevent the user from coming in contact with the door while operating the controls. 11. Install the entrapment warning placard on the wall next to the control station in a prominent location that is visible from the door. 12. Place manual release/safety reverse test label in plain view on inside of door. 13. Upon completion of installation, test Entrapment Protection Device. 14. The operation of the door, controls and safety equipment should be reviewed with the owner and/or end user of the automated door system. Owner should also be informed of the need to maintain control and safety equipment on a regular basis. Safety equipment should be checked at least once monthly to ensure that it is working properly. All installation manuals, instructions and safety information should be left with the owner. ACCESSORIES A11

208 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators MONITORED AND ANCILLARY SAFETY ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION Monitored Photo Eyes The presence of monitored primary entrapment protection is required for all modes and features beyond basic constant-pressure-to-close performance. They are continuously monitored to ensure safe operation of the door and limit operator functionality should an obstruction be detected or in the event of device failure. CPS-UN4 Monitored Heavy-Duty Dual-Sided Photo Eyes Heavy-duty housing for industrial applications. Dual-sided infrared sensors. NEMA 4 rated enclosure protects against direct water spray. 45 ft. range. For indoor/outdoor use. Designed for use with LiftMaster Operators. CPS-RPEN4* Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye Monitored, single retro-refl ective photo eye and refl ector with polarized beam technology. 6-foot armored cable for connection through 3-button control station. NEMA 4X rated enclosure protects against direct spray and corrosion. Maximum range of 50 ft. For indoor/outdoor use. Designed for use with LiftMaster Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED CPS-OPEN4 Monitored Flexible Dual-Sided Photo Eyes Flexible rubber housings absorb minor contact to maintain alignment. NEMA 4X rated enclosure protects against direct water spray and corrosion. 45 ft. range. For indoor/ outdoor use. Designed for use with LiftMaster Operators. CPS-U Monitored Dual-Sided Photo Eyes Monitored dual-sided photo eyes with NEMA 1 rated general purpose enclosure. For indoor use. Maximum range of 30 ft. Designed for use with LiftMaster Operators. *Mounted direction of the photo eye must be the same as the refl ector; if mounted vertically, both pieces must be mounted vertically. Non-Monitored Photo Eyes ACCESSORIES CPS Emitter-Receiver Type Photo Eyes Dual-sided Commercial Protector System including emitter, receiver, mounting brackets and operator interface (41K4629). 24VAC. Use with non-logic operators and/or as ancillary entrapment protection. 30 ft. range, designed for use with LiftMaster Operators, for indoor use only. CPS-RN4 Retro-Reflective Photo Eyes Single-sided photo eye and refl ector. 24VAC. NEMA 4 rated. 30 ft. range, designed for use with LiftMaster Operators. Cannot serve as monitored primary entrapment device; ancillary only. A12 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

209 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators MONITORED AND ANCILLARY SAFETY ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION TEXT HERE IF NEEDED CPS3CARD CPS-EI CPS-MEI CPS Interface Card Additional interface card for adding a second set of monitored photo eyes or a monitored edge to a door opening. Sensing Edge Interface Direct connection of a 4-wire monitored sensing edge. Continuous self-monitoring system, satisfi es regulatory requirements. For use on Logic 4.0, Logic 5.0 and Medium-Duty Logic Commercial Door Operators only. Sensing Edge Interface Direct connection of a 2-wire monitored sensing edge. For use with (65-CPT223) style electric edges. For use on Logic 4.0, Logic 5.0 and Medium-Duty Logic Commercial Door Operators only. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 20-2LM 21-2LM 65-7WIREL 2-Strand Bell Wire For pre-wiring safety devices. Tin-dipped copper wire, color-coded white and red/white wires. 22-gauge wire, 500 ft. roll. Radio control and accessory discount applies. 2-Strand Bell Wire For pre-wiring safety devices. Tin-dipped copper wire, color-coded white and white/black wires. 22-gauge wire, 500 ft. roll. Radio control and accessory discount applies. 7-Conductor Cable Connect all standard control stations, sensing edges or photo eyes. 7-wire spool for installation requiring multiple wires run from the photo eyes to the control board on the operator. 20-gauge, color-coded wires. Used for control line runs of up to a total of 50 ft. on mechanical (M) or relay type openers, or 1,000 ft. on Logic 5.0 Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED RPEN4-RFLCTR Replacement Reflectors Single pane replacement refl ector for CPS-RPEN4 photo eyes Replacement Reflectors Replacement refl ector for CPS-RN4. CPS Interface 041K4629 Used in conjunction with CPS-U, CPS-OPEN4, CPS-RPEN4, OES, etc. as interface, providing nonmonitored entrapment protection to Mechanical Operators. Also enables addition of third set of entrapment protection to Logic 4.0 and Logic 5.0 Operators. The entrapment protection system described above will only be monitored from the photoeye/edge to the interface itself and does not qualify as monitored entrapment, 24VAC (power may need to be provided separately). ACCESSORIES A13

210 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators COMMERCIAL DOOR EDGE ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION SYSTEMS Optical Edge System (OES) Optical Edge System (OES) Designed specifi cally to work with LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators, the Optical Edge System delivers dependable, monitored primary entrapment protection for commercial applications. The infrared optical sensors provide superior protection for sectional and rolling-style doors. With a NEMA 6 rated enclosure, it is the ideal solution for commercial doors with edges exposed to outside elements or standing water. Our photo eyes and optical edge models are UL/cUL listed for use with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators. The Optical Edge System can be used as a primary and/or ancillary entrapment device and meets UL 325 safety standards. AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES Bulk Rubber Sectional Door Edge (OES-SD50) Bulk Rubber Rolling Door Edge (OES-RD50) These 50 ft. rolls are the most cost-effective option for multiple installations. ACCESSORIES TEXT HERE IF NEEDED Rolling door edge FEATURES Rubber door edge is durable, flexible and easy to install. Premium rubber can be cut to exact length at the installation site. NEMA 6 rating protects against moisture and allows edge to operate in standing water. Infrared optical sensors eliminate the need for electrical contacts. Maximum range of 33 ft. Warranty: 1 Year Limited TEXT HERE IF NEEDED AVAILABLE EDGE KITS OES-SD16 16 ft. Sectional Door Edge Kit (Channel sold separately) OES-SD24 24 ft. Sectional Door Edge Kit (Channel sold separately) OES-RD16 16 ft. Rolling Door Edge Kit Each kit contains: 1 Roll of Rubber Door Edge 1 Pair Photo Eyes (Transmitter/Receiver) 1 Coil Cord, 2-wire, 20 ft. extended 1 Junction Box 1 Door Edge Connection Kit Installation Instructions Sectional Door Component Kit (OES-SDKIT)* Kit for use with OES-SD50 Rubber Sectional Door Edge. Supplies infrared optical sensors, junction box, 2-wire coil cord and sectional Door Connection Kit for a single commercial door installation (PVC Channel sold separately). Rolling Door Component Kit (OES-RDKIT)* Kit for use with OES-RD50 Rubber Rolling Door Edge. Supplies infrared optical sensors, junction box, 2-wire coil cord and rolling Door Connection Kit for a single commercial door installation. Optical Edge Sensor Kit (OES-EDSR) Kit includes infrared transmitter and receiver. Junction Box (OES-JBOX) Enables the connection between the operator and the edge. 2-Wire Coil Cord (OES-COIL) Provides a fl exible, 20 ft. extended connection from the junction box to operator or switch. Conduit Installation Kit (OES-COND) Eliminates the need for electrical conduit installation and includes junction boxes and cables. Sectional Door Edge Connection Kit (OES-DECK) Secures rubber edge to the door. Rolling Door Edge Connection Kit (OES-RDCK) Secures rubber edge to the door. 1-3/4 x 1-3/4 in. PVC Channel (OES-4504) Connects the door to the edge kit (sectional doors only). 2 x 2 in. PVC Channel (OES-5104) Connects the door to the edge kit (sectional doors only). *Each kit contains all components necessary for installing the Optical Edge System (excluding PVC Channel, which is sold separately for sectional door applications) on a single door. A14 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

211 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators ANCILLARY ENTRAPMENT PROTECTION Light Curtain Power Transformer Sensing Edges LC-36A* Light Curtain Delivers 36 in. of effective height with cross-beam coverage. 33 ft. range. NEMA 4 rated. *Must be used with primary monitored entrapment protection. Ancillary entrapment protection is optional and may be used to supplement primary entrapment protection devices or basic constant-pressure-to-close operation. IMPORTANT NOTES: Take-up reels are not recommended for use with any fail-safe type edge. Use coil cords only. If door is over 22 ft. wide, optical edges or photo eyes are highly recommended. 100MAPS External Power Supply** Provides enough power to operate two LC-36A Light Curtains. Includes 38 ft. cable leads. **Required for use with LiftMaster Medium- Duty Operators. Available as an extra power source for use with LiftMaster Logic 3, 4.0 and 5.0 Operators. Pneumatic Edge Kits Pneumatic Edge Kits Exterior Edge Kits Includes 2-wire coil cord and 14 ft. of air hose. Exterior Edge Kits Includes 2-wire take-up reel (20 ft. extended) and 14 ft. of air hose. Exterior Edge Kits Includes 2-wire coil cord and 22 ft. of air hose. Exterior Edge Kits Includes 2-wire take-up reel (20 ft. extended) and 22 ft. of air hose. Individual Pneumatic Components Exterior Air Switch with Metal Case N.O. contact. Exterior 3-Wire Air Switch SPDT, plastic housing. Rubber Air Hose Air Hose Plug ACCESSORIES A15

212 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators COMMERCIAL DOOR CONTROLS TEXT Push-Button HERE IF Control NEEDED Stations 3-Button Controls OPEN/CLOSE/STOP allows complete control of the door. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators L Button Station Indoor surface mount with Maintenance Alert System. NEMA 1 rated. 3-Button Station Indoor surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED PH Button Station Indoor fl ush mount with standard 2 in. x 4 in. electrical junction box with stainless steel faceplate. NEMA 1 rated. 3-Button Horizontal Station Outdoor surface mount with polycarbonate enclosure. Legend will display horizontally. Can be mounted either vertically or horizontally. NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 rated. 3-Button Station Hazardous Area Enclosure (die-cast) meets NEC requirements for Class 1, Divisions I and II, Group D, and Class 2, Divisions I and II, Groups F and G. OPEN/ CLOSE/STOP. Not included with (M105) Hazardous Area Modifi cation, NEMA 7/9 rated. ACCESSORIES 3-Button Single Key Control Station OPEN/CLOSE/STOP buttons and ON/OFF key control with maintained key positions, key removable in either position. Allows complete control of door with the additional feature that the OPEN and CLOSE buttons can be locked out of operation with the key control. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators Button Station Outdoor surface mount with keyed lockout and die-cast metal enclosure. NEMA 4, 12 rated. A16 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

213 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators COMMERCIAL DOOR CONTROLS Push-Button Control Stations (continued) 2-Button Control Stations OPEN/CLOSE should only be used with operators wired for constant pressure to open and close (all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators with type D1 control wiring) Button Station Indoor surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. 2-Button Station Indoor fl ush mount with standard 2 x 4 in. electrical junction box with stainless steel faceplate. NEMA 1 rated. 2-Button Station Outdoor surface mount with die-cast metal enclosure. NEMA 4, 12 rated. WARNING: When used on most commercial door operators, this control will not stop the door. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control. Single-Button Control Stations START may be used as OPEN with all LiftMaster Operators. May be used as OPEN and CLOSE on all operators with type B2 control wiring Button Station Indoor surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated Button Station Indoor fl ush mount with standard 2 x 4 in. electrical junction box with stainless steel faceplate. NEMA 1 rated M 1-Button Station Outdoor surface mount. Single button to activate opening one commercial door. WARNING: When used on most Commercial Door Operators, this control will not stop the door. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control. Multi-Wire Cable 65-7WIREL 7-Conductor Cable 7-wire spool for installation requiring multiple wires can be run from the photo eyes to the control board on the operator. ACCESSORIES A17

214 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators COMMERCIAL DOOR CONTROLS Pull-Switch Controls Single-Pull Switches May be used in two different ways: as an OPEN only control (all LiftMaster Operators) or as an OPEN/CLOSE control (only LiftMaster Operators with types B2 and G2 control wiring). In the latter case, pulling the cord will open a fully closed door, close a fully opened door, and reverse a closing door. Pulling the cord while the door is opening will either have no effect (type B2 wiring) or will stop the door (Solid-State Logic Control Board) Single-Pull Switch Indoor surface mount. NEMA 1 rated. Single-Pull Switch Outdoor surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Single-Pull Switch Hazardous Area Type with steel enclosure. NEMA 7/9 rated. WARNING: When used on most Commercial Door Operators, this control will not stop the door. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control. Dual-Pull Switches May be used in the same manner as a single pull-switch, but with the added feature that a second contact is available to start auxiliary equipment, such as a heater Dual-Pull Switch Indoor surface mount with 2 N.O. (Normally Open) contacts and a steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. Dual-Pull Switch Outdoor surface mount with 2 N.O. (Normally Open) contacts and a steel enclosure. NEMA 4, 12 rated. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A18 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

215 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators KEY CONTROL STATIONS Two-Position Key Controls Tamperproof* Key Control Switches OPEN/CLOSE spring returns to center (OFF). Key removable in center position only. Should only be used on operators wired for constant pressure to open and close (all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators with type D1 control wiring). IMPORTANT INFORMATION Standard key control stations are supplied with two keys. Keys for tamperproof models may be purchased from any locksmith or from BEST or U-CHANGE when applicable. Key Control Switch Indoor fl ush mount with steel box and architectural aluminum faceplate. NEMA 1 rated. Key Control Switch 02109B** Key Switch with BEST Cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with BEST cylinder (construction core included). NEMA 1 rated. Key Control Switch 02109U*** Key Switch with U-CHANGE Cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with U-CHANGE cylinder, allowing user to change keying of lock. NEMA 1 rated. *Key required to remove cover on tamperproof models. **For models 02109B and 02409B, a standard cylinder and keys are supplied. This cylinder should be replaced by a permanent, registered cylinder obtained directly from BEST Access Systems or through a qualifi ed locksmith. ***For models 02109U and 02409U, a standard cylinder and keys are supplied. The station should be rekeyed with a permanent cylinder by a qualifi ed locksmith. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED B** 02409U*** Key Control Switch Outdoor surface mount with die-cast metal enclosure. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Key Control Switch Four-key switch with BEST cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with BEST cylinder (construction core included). NEMA 4 rated. Key Control Switch Surface mount key with U-CHANGE cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with U-CHANGE cylinder, allowing user to change keying of lock. NEMA 4 rated. WARNING: When used on most commercial door operators, this control will not stop the door. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control. ACCESSORIES A19

216 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators KEY CONTROL STATIONS Two-Position Key Controls with STOP Button Key Control Switches with STOP Button OPEN/CLOSE spring returns to center (OFF). Key removable in center position only, with STOP button. Allows complete control of door. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators. IMPORTANT INFORMATION: Standard key control stations are supplied with two keys. Keys for tamperproof models may be purchased from any locksmith or from BEST or U-CHANGE when applicable. Tamperproof* Key Control Station (Tamperproof) U*** Indoor fl ush mount with steel back box, architectural faceplate and STOP button. NEMA 1 rated B** Key Switch indoor fl ush mount. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with BEST cylinder (construction core included). Key Switch indoor fl ush mount. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with U-CHANGE cylinder, allowing user to change keying of lock. NEMA 1 rated. *Key required to remove cover on tamperproof models. **For models 02110B and 02410B, a standard cylinder and keys are supplied. This cylinder should be replaced by a permanent, registered cylinder obtained directly from BEST Access Systems or through a qualifi ed locksmith. ***For models 02119U and 02410U, a standard cylinder and keys are supplied. The station should be rekeyed with a permanent cylinder by a qualifi ed locksmith. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED Key Control Station (Tamperproof) U*** Outdoor surface mount with die-cast metal enclosure and STOP button. NEMA 4, 12 rated B** Key Switch with BEST Cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with BEST cylinder (construction core included). NEMA 4 rated. Key Switch with U-CHANGE cylinder. Same as but standard key cylinder is replaced with U-CHANGE cylinder allowing user to change keying of lock. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Non-Tamperproof without STOP buttons ACCESSORIES Key Control Station (Non-Tamperproof) Outdoor surface mount with die-cast metal enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. WARNING: When used on most commercial door operators, this control will not stop the door. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control. A20 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

217 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators KEY CONTROL STATIONS Custom Control Panels Mushroom Button Control A variety of custom control panels can be designed and manufactured by LiftMaster to meet your specifi c needs. Master controls for 2 or more doors or gates, indicating lights, keyed lockout switches and master emergency operating buttons, among others, can be included. Standard or custom legends can be provided; please indicate at the time of order. Mushroom Button Control Station 02401M 02401M3 Outdoor surface mount. Single button to activate opening one commercial door. NEMA 4, 12 rated M5 Outdoor surface mount. Single button to activate opening fi ve commercial doors. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Outdoor surface mount. Single button to activate opening three commercial doors. NEMA 4, 12 rated. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED Multiple unit control panel shown. Please call your LiftMaster Sales Representative for any custom panel needs. Master Control Station 90-MC4DOOR Includes OPEN/CLOSE/STOP positions and legends. Operates up to 4 doors RG 3-Button Station RED/GREEN Indicating Lights. Operates 1 door. 90-MC6DOOR Includes OPEN/CLOSE/STOP positions and legends. Operates up to 6 doors (image shown). ACCESSORIES Subject to Access Control Multipliers *Wireless controls are used to supplement hardwired, push-button and key-control stations. Wireless controls cannot be used in place of hardwired controls in the absence of safety devices. A21

218 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators RADIO CONTROL SECTION Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls Remote Controls featuring narrow-band multi-frequency (310/315/390 MHz) Rolling Code Technology. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Radio Receivers. 892LT 2-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to two LiftMaster Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Operators or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. 894LT 4-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to four LiftMaster Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Encrypted DIP Remote Controls Compatible with Security+ 2.0 LiftMaster Commercial Operators, Gate Operators and Commercial Receivers. 811LM* 1-Button Remote Control Extreme-range 1-button encrypted DIP switch remote control. Ideal for applications like gated communities or commercial applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Easy to code, 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. 813LM* 3-Button Remote Control Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control. Red/Green/Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code, 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. *Not compatible with LiftMaster Security+2.0 Residential Garage Door Openers Security+ Remote Controls ACCESSORIES 373LM 3-Button Remote Control Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and/or Gate Operators. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. 371LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 315 MHz Rolling Code Technology. 971LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Garage Door Openers with orange or red learn buttons or gray antennas. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 390 MHz Rolling Code Technology. A22 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

219 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators WIRELESS COMMERCIAL DOOR AND ENTRY CONTROLS Digital Remote Controls 361LM/61LM 1-Button Remote Control Easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 12V battery and directional visor clip included. 315 MHz (361LM)/390 MHz (61LM). 333LM/33LM Tri-Colored 3-Button Remote Control 3-Button remote control, red, yellow and green buttons for easy identifi cation. Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions. Easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 12V battery and visor clip included. 315 MHz (333LM)/390 MHz (33LM). Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Receivers STAR1000 Commercial Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver virtually eliminates radio interference. Program up to 1000 remote controls either individually or block learn with Passport Lite. Large keypad and LCD screen for quick and easy programming. Duplicate memory module included for programming additional receivers or data backup. Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Designed for outdoor environments. Includes 9 in. antenna. 850LM Universal Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. Eliminates customer callbacks due to poor range performance. 3 channels providing large capacity: channel 1 (50 remote controls); channel 2 (20 remote controls); channel 3 (20 remote controls). Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Antennas Antenna Extension Kit, 15 ft. 86LM* For use with 312HM, 412HM, STAR1000, 860LM, and 850LM when remote operation is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 15 ft. of cable. 86LM/86LMT Antenna Extension Kits Antenna Extension Kit, 25 ft. 86LMT* For use with 312HM, 412HM, STAR1000, 860LM and 850LM when remote additional remote range is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 25 ft. of cable. EXT-ANT* Medium-Duty External Antenna Kit EXT-ANT ACCESSORIES *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. A23

220 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators WIRELESS COMMERCIAL DOOR AND ENTRY CONTROLS Wireless Commercial Keypads Wireless Digital Keypads KPW250 Wireless Keypad Weathertight, features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. Provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Multi-Code, the perfect wireless keypad to keep on your truck for almost all of your applications. 250-code capacity. Zinc-alloy metal front cover. KPW5 Wireless Keypad Weathertight, features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost effective solution in smaller applications. 5 code capacity, high-impact, polycarbonate front cover. Wireless Commercial Keypad Commercial wireless keypads use standard AA alkaline batteries. Can be wall or pedestal mounted. Lighted keyboard provides nighttime visibility. 100,000 combination codes are available. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC. Mounting Posts Gooseneck Pedestals For use with card readers, digital keypads and access control systems. Includes baseplate at bottom of post (pad mount models) and mounting fl ange for control device at top. Wiring can be fed through the post. PED42 Pedestal 42 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. PED64 Pedestal 64 in. Height In-ground mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. ACCESSORIES PED4272 Dual Pedestal 42 in. and 72 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipes, 11-gauge steel. PED72 Pedestal 72 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED A24 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

221 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators WIRELESS COMMERCIAL DOOR AND ENTRY CONTROLS Vehicle Detection Systems Vehicle Loop Detectors OPEN only (all LiftMaster operators) or SAFETY/HOLD OPEN only (operators with type B2, T, TS or T1 control wiring) when vehicle passes over loop wire. Requires a loop of wire embedded in the pavement to connect to the detector. Requires 2-wire output connection to door operator and either 24VAC or 115VAC power (see individual descriptions). Enclosed Loop Detector Requires separate 24VAC power. Wiring harness with standard plug for detector included. Indoor enclosure, NEMA 1 rated. Enclosed Loop Detector Requires separate 115VAC power. Wiring harness with standard plug for detector included. Indoor enclosure, NEMA 1 rated. Outdoor Wireless Enclosure Wireless Enclosure for Vehicle Loop Detector Outdoor Wireless Enclosure for 24V Vehicle Loop Detector Watertight, oiltight enclosure with single 24VAC detector, wired to terminal block for field connection, NEMA 4, 12 rated. Outdoor Wireless Enclosure for 115V Vehicle Loop Detector Watertight, oiltight enclosure with single 115VAC detector, wired to terminal block for fi eld connection, NEMA 4, 12 rated. Pre-formed Loop Wire Pre-formed Loop Wire for SAW-CUT Applications Includes 50 ft. of lead wire for use with all vehicle loop detectors. 50XNL x 8 ft. pre-formed loop wire is used when saw-cut is required for installation of the loop, NEMA 4, 12 rated. 50XNL x 12 ft. pre-formed loop wire is used when saw-cut is required for installation of the loop, NEMA 4, 12 rated. ACCESSORIES Pre-formed Loop Wire for PAVE-OVER Applications Includes 50 ft. of lead wire for use with all vehicle loop detectors. 50ENL x 8 ft. size pre-formed loop wire is used when the loop will be paved over. NEMA 4, 12 rated. 50ENL x 12 ft. size pre-formed loop wire is used when the loop will be paved over. NEMA 4, 12 rated. A25

222 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators ENTRY CONTROLS AND SAFETY ACCESSORIES Vehicle Detection Systems Outdoor Enclosure (NEMA 4/12) Pneumatic Treadle Kits OPEN only (all LiftMaster Operators) or SAFETY only (LiftMaster Operators with type B2, C2, T, T1 or TS control wiring). After vehicle passes over treadle hose, the weight of the vehicle on the treadle hose activates a pneumatic switch, which sends an OPEN signal to the door. Requires a 2-wire connection to the operator but does not require power to function. This is a non-monitored device Exterior Pneumatic Treadle Kit Includes 10 ft. of signal hose, Outdoor air switch and hose plug Treadle Signal Hose For additional hose above the 10 ft. that is packaged with kits, or as replacement; good for indoor or outdoor use. Electric Treadles OPEN only (all LiftMaster operators) or SAFETY only (LiftMaster operators with type B2, C2, L2, T, T1 or TS control wiring). After vehicle passes over treadle, the weight of the vehicle compresses an electric switch, which sends an OPEN signal to the door. Requires a 2-wire connection to the operator but does not require power to function. This is a non-monitored device Treadle Hose Anchor with Clamp RBMA Electric Treadle 5 ft. long, shown with separate Protection Plate (50800P). NEMA 4, 12 rated. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES 50800P Protection Plate C Covers electrical connections. A26 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

223 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators ENTRY CONTROLS AND SAFETY ACCESSORIES Motion Detector Motion Detector LiftMaster microwave motion detector opens after sensing an object. This sensor can be set up to detect vehicles separately from people and send the two signals to two different outputs. Or you can use the two outputs to differentiate between forward and backward movements. Detection fi elds are adjustable, manually or with remote controls, as is sensitivity to mask interference or cross traffi c. This sensor can be mounted from 6 ft./6 in. up to 23 ft. and has a maximum range up to 80 ft. This detector requires at least 2-wire connection to the operator. NEMA 4 rated. NOTE: Requires 24V power supply separate from operator. 50-HERK2 Motion Detector Remote Control Remote control for the LiftMaster Motion Detector to conveniently choose from 8 different preset comfort functions: adjust detection fi elds, mounting heights, relay hold interval, cross traffi c optimization, direction recognition, people/vehicle separation, slow-motion detection, turn on/off fi lter functions, open the door manually and much more. This remote control is bi-directional; in other words, whatever you set up will be displayed back on the remote control to confi rm that the sensor received the signal. This allows fi ne-tuning the LiftMaster Motion Detector from the ground without guessing whether all the settings have been received by the sensor. 50-HERK-RC2 Take-Up Reels Edge Connection Kit Take-Up Reel, 2 Wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft S0 3-wire, type S0, 18-gauge, 30 ft Take-Up Reel, 3 Wire, 18-gauge, 30 ft gauge, 20 ft. Door Edge Connection Kit Complete kit may be used with most sensing edges. Includes two junction boxes one for the door and one for the wall and a NEMA 1 rated, 3 wire coil cord IMPORTANT NOTE: Take-up reels are not recommended for use with any fail safe type edges. Use a coil cord instead. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A27

224 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators SAFETY ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS TEXT Sensing HERE Edge IF Connections NEEDED Coil Cords Sensing Edge Connections Each sensing edge requires a means to connect it to the door operator. The means must be able to extend and retract as the door moves. Coil cords and take-up reels fulfi ll this function. A wireless connection may also be used. IMPORTANT NOTE: Take-Up reels are not recommended for use with any fail-safe type edge. Use coil cords only Coil Cord, 2 Wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft Coil Cord 4 Wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft Orange Coil Cord, 3 Wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft. OES-COIL Optical Edge System Coil Cord 2-wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft. cord for use with the Optical Edge System (OES) products. Can also be used with other 2-wire edge systems. Take-Up Reels Edge Connection Kit Take-Up Reel, 2 Wire, 18-gauge, 20 ft S0 3-wire, type S0, 18-gauge, 30 ft Take-Up Reel, 3 Wire, 18-gauge, 30 ft gauge, 20 ft. Door Edge Connection Kit Complete kit may be used with most sensing edges. Includes two junction boxes one for the door and one for the wall and a NEMA 1 rated, 3 wire coil cord IMPORTANT NOTE: Take-up reels are not recommended for use with any fail safe type edges. Use a coil cord instead. Plug-In Option Cards ACCESSORIES Auxiliary Contact Option Board Provides additional contacts for and control of auxiliary devices, such as external heaters, security devices or warning devices (5V to 240VAC). AUXCARD FDR Plug-In Option Card For use in conjunction with the LiftMaster Logic 5.0-equipped Door Operator. The FDRCARD facilitates fi eld connections between the release device and the door operator by reducing the standard 10-wire interconnection to the basic 4-wire phone card. Both the FDRCARD and the LM21- AFCB (purchased through manufacturers of fi re doors) are equipped with an RJ-11 phone jack as standard to accept the phone cord. FDRCARD A28 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

225 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators SAFETY ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS Audible/Visible Warning Devices Visible Audible/Visible Warning Devices Auxiliary limit switches or auxiliary contact blocks to control warning devices may be added to the operator at the time of order to allow for connection of warning devices (see Commercial Door Operator Modifi cations). RGL24LY 50505R 50505G Red/Green Traffic Light Traffi c control light for use with TLS1CARD. Red and green LEDs provide highly visible and long-lasting light source. 24VAC/VDC operation. Red Lights Vaportight light with red-colored lens. Use up to 100 Watt, 115VAC (Incandescent bulb not included). Green Light Vaportight light with green-colored lens. Use up to 100 Watt, 115VAC (Incandescent bulb not included). Audible 50505A Amber Light Vaportight light with amber colored lens. Use up to 100 Watt, 115VAC (Incandescent bulb not included). Warning Light Wall-mount warning light (bulb not included), 115V power required. Warning Bell 6 in. alarm bell, wall-mount. 115V power required. Audible/Visible LMHS2475WPADA Horn/Strobe White horn/strobe with clear lens. 12/24VDC. ADA compliant and weatherproof. K Horn/Strobe WARNING: It is strongly recommended that audible/visible warning devices be included in every operator installation. White horn/strobe. 115V. ADA compliant and weatherproof. See Fire Door Systems Notifi cation Devices for additional options. TLS1CARD Timer Light Status Option Card Works in conjunction with Logic 4.0 and Logic 5.0 to provide seven DIP switch, fi eld-selectable modifi cations, including six door traffi c control options and a means to connect external OPEN and CLOSE limits. Traffi c control light ordered separately (RGL24LY). A29 ACCESSORIES

226 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators SAFETY ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS TEXT Warning HERE Signs IF NEEDED and Labels TEXT HERE IF NEEDED These items are packed as standard in some or all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators, depending on applicability. It is strongly recommended that they be replaced on installations where they have been lost or damaged. A 4065 CAUTION label for high-lift and vertical-lift sectional doors B CAUTION label for electrical box cover C 4055 CAUTION label for standard-lift sectional, slide and rolling doors D CAUTION label regarding moving parts E WARNING to disconnect power TEXT HERE IF NEEDED F CAUTION label regarding overload reset G CAUTION label for reversing switch H WARNING placard for placement near push button ACCESSORIES A30 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

227 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators SAFETY ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS Miscellaneous Control Accessories Pass Door Switch Plunger type switch to disable operator control circuit whenever pass door (man-door) is not fully closed. Requires coil cord or take-up reel. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators. Rolling Door Interlock Switch NEMA 1 rated switch is engaged by rolling door lock mechanism and disables operator control circuit when door is locked, thereby preventing electrical operation of door when locked. Mounts at bottom of door guide. Requires 2-wire connection to operator. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators on rolling doors. Sectional Door Interlock Switch NEMA 4 rated switch is engaged by sectional door lock mechanism and disables operator control circuit when door is locked, thereby preventing electrical operation of door when locked. Mounts next to door lock. Requires 2-wire connection to operator. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators on sectional doors. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED Timer Defeat Switch Toggle switch to allow automatic close timer to be manually disabled. May be used with all LiftMaster Commercial Door Operators with type T, T1 or T2 control wiring. For use with Mechanical (M), Logic 4.0 and Logic 5.0 units only. Not for use with Logic 2.0 units. On Logic 2.0 units, the timer can be defeated by pressing the STOP button. 26DGI16 7-Day Timer Used to automatically open a door at pre-programmed times. Includes 20 programs, manual override and battery backup. May require transformer upgrade. WARNING: It is strongly recommended that audible/visible warning devices be included in every operator installation. Antennas 86LM* Antenna Extension Kit for standard 15 ft. size doors. 86LMT* Antenna Extension Kit for 25 ft. doors. EXT-ANT Medium-Duty External Antenna Kit. *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. ACCESSORIES A31

228 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators MOUNTING ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS Mounting Accessories/Hardware Angle Mounting Bracket Heavy 1/2 in. thick cast iron angle bracket used for mounting side-mount operators on the end bracket of a rolling door or grille. May be used for vertical or horizontal mount on either front of coil or top of coil mount. Curved slots in bracket allow for tensioning of chain drive. Right/ left interchangeable. Operator mounting holes match up with mounting dimensions of LiftMaster model DJ, DH, J, MGJ, H and GH operators (also see EZ Mount). NOTE: Cannot be welded. Cannot be used with model GH 3 HP. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED Mounting Bracket for MJ, MGJ, MH Heavy-gauge steel bracket may be used for vertical or horizontal mount on either front of coil or top of coil mount. May be welded. For use with Model MJ, MGJ and MH Operators. Universal Hood Angle Mounting Bracket Heavy-gauge steel bracket. Used for vertical or horizontal mount on either front or top of coil. Has door mounting pattern compatible with many OEM manufacturers. May be welded. For use with Model DJ, DH, MJ, MH, J and H operators only. 1A4324 Hood Angle Mounting Bracket Heavy-gauge steel bracket may be used for vertical or horizontal mount on either front of coil or top of coil mount. May be welded. For use with LiftMaster Model DJ, DH, MGJ, GH, J and H Operators (also see EZ Mount). NOTE: Cannot be used with Model GH 3HP EZ Cast Iron Hood EZ Mount Bracket Cast iron hood-mount bracket with EZ mount Adapter plate, mounting bolts, nuts and washers. Adapter plate holds mounting bolts in place for ease of mounting. 1A4324EZ Steel Hood EZ Mount Bracket Heavy-gauge steel bracket with EZ Mount Adapter plate, mounting bolts, nuts and washers. Adapter plate holds mounting bolts in place for ease of mounting. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A3982 Flat Wall Plate Mounting Bracket Heavy 1/4 in. steel plate bracket used for wall mounting of side-mount operators. Slots in bracket allow for tensioning of drive chain. Mounting studs match up with mounting holes of LiftMaster model DJ, DH, J, MGJ, H and GH Operators. Operator Cover For wall-mounted operators 31in. L x 19 in. W x 18 in. D Assembly required. Will cover LiftMaster model J, H, GH, MJ, MH, DH and DJ operators. Recommended for damp environments where direct spray is present. A32 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

229 ACCESSORIES Commercial Door Operators MOUNTING ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS Mounting Accessories/Hardware (continued) Chain Tensioner Adjustable steel bracket with bearings on each end. One end is placed on the operator output shaft and the other end on the door shaft. The bracket is spread apart until the drive chain is tensioned properly and then locked in place with bolts and locknuts. Both bearings are 1 in. diameter (for 1 in. shafts). NOTE: May be used with all side-mount operators Chain Tensioner 1-1/4 in. Same as (716023) but with 1-1/4 in. bearing for door shaft. 71-EXTBKT41 (#41 Chain) 71-EXTBKT48 (#48 Chain) Extension Bracket Extension brackets designed to allow up to 6 in. of additional backroom to match up with existing angle iron on retrofi t applications. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A33

230 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION WARNING To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, the following should be read by ANYONE involved in the design, specification, selection or purchase of an industrial door operator or automated door system. ACCESSORIES Automated Gate Systems For the purposes of this Safety Information, an automated gate system consists of a vehicular gate, an electric gate operator, control equipment to interface with the gate operator and safety equipment to protect people and property. Vehicular Gates A vehicular gate is a large, heavy object that moves with the help of an electric motor. A moving gate can cause SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! The safety and well-being of others depends on the design of a safe system. The gate itself must be properly installed, work freely and smoothly in both directions and be constructed to industry standard ASTM F2200. Gate operators are not intended for pedestrian use. Gate Operator Selection The proper gate operator must be selected for the application. Pay attention to all application information in this catalog, including gate operator type, size, voltage and control wiring. IMPROPER SELECTION CAN RESULT IN A DANGEROUS SYSTEM. Be sure you understand the application and limitations of the model gate operator you select for your gate. If you are in doubt, contact a LiftMaster Sales Representative. Control Accessories Gate operators can present serious hazards to persons in the immediate area when not controlled in a safe manner or by responsible persons. Choose one or more controls that together will allow complete control of the gate. All controls should be located OUT OF REACH OF SMALL CHILDREN. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH CAN RESULT FROM CHILDREN PLAYING WITH CONTROLS. ALL CONTROLS SHOULD BE LOCATED NO LESS THAN 6 FT. FROM ANY MOVING PART OF THE GATE SO THAT THE PERSON OPERATING THE CONTROLS CAN SEE THE FULL AREA OF GATE MOVEMENT, but should not be so close that a person starting the gate could be injured due to their proximity to the gate. Be especially careful in designing systems with automatic controls, that is, controls that can cause the gate to operate without warning to persons in the immediate gate area. Such controls include, but are not limited to, radio controls, remote mounted access controls, telephone access systems and timing devices. SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SIGNS WARNING OF THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION ARE A MUST IN THE DESIGN OF SUCH A SYSTEM. Safety Accessories Gate operators must protect against entrapment while opening and closing, requiring TWO independent entrapment protection devices for each entrapment zone (inherent system counts as one of those). To be UL 325 compliant, two independent safety entrapment protection devices must be installed at each entrapment zone (inherent reversing system counts as one device). Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge System may be used with this operator to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. See Accessories section. A variety of warning signs and labels are also offered in this section. WITHOUT SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THE GATE COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Safe Installation Procedures Gate operators and associated control equipment should only be installed and serviced by qualified professionals. Professional installers should observe the following safe installation procedures. To ensure that this is the case, provide a copy of this Safety Information section to the installer. 1. POWER SHOULD ALWAYS BE DISCONNECTED whenever installing, wiring or servicing a gate operator or automated gate system. Not only is the chance of electric shock thus reduced, but the MOVING CHAINS IN MOST GATE OPERATORS CAN CATCH CLOTHING OR FINGERS AND CAUSE SEVERE INJURY. 2. Installation and wiring must be in compliance with local building and electrical codes. If no local code exists, install in compliance with the National Electrical Code. 3. All manual gate locks should be disabled to avoid damage to the gate or gate operator should the lock become engaged after the gate operator is installed. 4. Clutches should be adjusted to the minimum force setting required to operate the gate smoothly and still allow slippage with minimum force. However, A CLUTCH IS NOT INTENDED AS, AND SHOULD NOT BE SUBSTITUTED FOR, A SAFETY DEVICE TO PROTECT PEOPLE AND PROPERTY. 5. The manual operation system must be functioning properly. IF THE GATE CANNOT BE MANUALLY OPERATED IN AN EMERGENCY, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT! 6. All warning signs and warning labels are required to be posted as indicated in the Gate Operator Installation Manual, and over the protest of the property owner. 7. The gate operator controls, and safety equipment should be tested at the conclusion of the installation to be sure they are functioning properly. 8. The operation of the gate, controls and safety equipment should be reviewed with the owner and/or end user of the automated gate system. They should also be informed of the need to maintain control and safety equipment on a regular basis. Safety equipment should be checked at least once monthly to ensure that it is working properly. All installation manuals, instructions and safety information should be left with the owner. 9. Moving gates have pinch points and entrapment zones that can be extremely dangerous to pedestrians, especially small children. EVEN THOUGH YOU ARE PLANNING TO USE SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THESE POINTS AND ZONES SHOULD BE GUARDED. If you are unsure about your ability to identify the particular hazards of your gate operator system, call LiftMaster for assistance. UNGUARDED PINCH POINTS AND ENTRAPMENT ZONES CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! A34 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

231 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Always design, install and maintain safe gate access systems in accordance with UL & ASTM F2200 standards Operated Gate Systems to Comply with UL 325 and ASTM F2200 Only install the operator on gates used for vehicular traffic. Install two independent entrapment protection devices protecting Only A separate install pedestrian the gate entry/exit operator must on be gates clearly used visible for to vehicular each traffic. entrapment zone. A separate pedestrian entry/exit must be clearly visible to promote promote pedestrian usage and located so pedestrians do not Pickets of a slide gate must pedestrian be designed usage. or screened It must to prevent be located so persons do not come in Two come independent contact with entrapment the vehicular gate protection while it is moving. devices must be persons installed from reaching through, or passing through a gate. contact with the vehicular gate while it is moving. See at each your owner s entrapment manual zone. for complete details regrading your LiftMaster Perimeter Access Solution. Refer to your Gate Operator Instruction Manual for full details. Slide Gate Site Layout Guidelines Slide Gate Spacing Guidelines Edge sensor on Trailing Edge of gate Public Side Attach WARNING signs on both sides of the gate area See Slide Gate Openings Left Hand Gate opening Non-pinch rollers (4x) ENTRAPMENT ZONE Guard posts Photo eye Photo eye (entrapment protection shown in four locations) Physical stop - weld stops at both ends of gate rail. User controls mounted at least 6 ft. away from gate V track (gate rail) 6 ft. minimum See Slide Gate Openings Physical stop Edge sensor on Leading edge of gate Pedestrian gate clearly located Photo eye (4x) Secure Side Slide Gate Gaps A gap, measured in the horizontal plane parallel to the roadway, between a fixed stationary object nearest the roadway (such as a gate support post) and the gate frame when the gate is in either the fully open position or the fully closed position, shall not exceed 2 ¼ in.. Exception: All other fixed stationary objects greater than 16 in. from the gate frame shall not be required to comply with this section. (ASTM F2200: 6.1.4) Slide Gate Openings Guidelines Openings of a horizontal slide gate must be smaller than 2 1/4" or else be guarded or screened. These design rules apply to both the moving gate as well as the portion of adjacent fence that the gate covers in the open position (UL 325: a.2 and ASTM F2200: 6.1.2). See Illustrations below. Base of Swing and Slide Gate All Gates must have smooth bottom edges, no protrusions should exist. If gate hardware or sensors protrude, they must have smooth surfaces free of any sharp cutting edges that do not exceed ½ inch beyond the base of the gate. (ASTM F2200: 4.8) OK Not Allowed X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Gate Frame and Adjacent Fence Area Gate Frame and Adjacent Fence Area 6 ft. minimum If gaps (xxx) between vertical bars of the gate or fence are less than 2 1/4", no further screening is required. For gaps (xxx) equal to or larger than 2 1/4", a wire mesh screen must be applied to the gate. Wire mesh screen openings must be smaller than 2 1/4". The minimum height of wire mesh screen: 6 ft. above grade. Swing Gate Site Layout Guidelines Swing Gate Clearance Guidelines Pedestrian gate clearly located Public Side Photo eye Photo eye Attach WARNING signs on both sides of the gate area ENTRAPMENT ZONE Edge sensor Secure Side User controls mounted at least 6 ft. away from gate Photo eyes ENTRAPMENT ZONE Photo eyes A B Closed Gate If space is greater than 4", entrapment protection in this area is required. If space is less than 16", entrapment protection in this area is required. Closed Gate With the hinge mounted on the corner of the pilaster, the entrapment area A is eliminated and protection is not required for this area. (ASTM F2200: and ) Opened Gate Opened Gate A B ACCESSORIES Base of Swing and Slide Gate All Gates must have smooth bottom edges, no protrusions should exist. If gate hardware or sensors protrude, they must have smooth surfaces free of any sharp cutting edges that do not exceed ½ inch beyond the base of the gate. (ASTM F2200: 4.8) OK Not Allowed A35

232 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Through-Beam Photo Eyes Through-Beam Photo Eyes Gate operators must protect against entrapment while both opening and closing, requiring TWO independent entrapment protection devices for each entrapment zone (inherent system counts as one of those). Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge System may be used with LiftMaster Gate Operators to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. WITHOUT SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THE GATE COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! LMTBU Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes Provides long-range sensing distance up to 90 ft. NEMA 4X rated. Powerful through-beam design provides superior performance in a variety of environmental conditions. Conical-shaped infrared beam is easy to align. Wireless network capability eliminates the need to wire between operators in dual-gate applications. LED indicators (2) for instant feedback, emitter-power, receiver-misaligned or blocked. Integrated diagnostics with gate operator speed installation. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Dimensions for sensor, including the hood: 4 3/4" H x 3 1/4" W x 3 3/4" D. Includes sensors, stainless steel sensor hoods, powder coated galvanized mounting brackets, hardware and 6 ft. wire. Compatible with LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs. LMBRCKTKIT Sensor Bracket And Hood 10-Pack Replacement kit for LMTBU Monitored Through-Beam Photo Eyes. Includes sensor mounting brackets (10), sensor hoods (10) and mounting hardware. CPS-UN4 Monitored Heavy-Duty Dual-Sided Photo Eyes Provides long-range sensing distance up to 45 ft. NEMA 4X rated. <31mA low-power standby/detect current. Includes bracket and 2 ft. cable leads. Goes into powersave mode and minimizes power draw when the gate is closed. UL Listed to UL 325 standards; tested with operators listed. Compatible with LiftMaster CSW24U, CSL24U, LA400DC, LA412DC, RSL12U and RSW12U. ACCESSORIES A36 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

233 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Retro-Reflective Photo Eyes LMRRU Monitored Retro-Reflective Photo Eye Provides long-range sensing distance up to 50 ft. NEMA 4X rated. Anti-fog lens for increased reliability. LED indicators (2) for instant feedback: aligned, misaligned or blocked. Integrated diagnostics with gate operator speed installation. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Dimensions for sensor including the hood: 4 3/4" H x 3 1/4" W x 3 3/4" D. Includes photo eye sensor, stainless steel sensor, hood, durable polycarbonate refl TEXT ector HERE hood, powder-coated IF NEEDEDgalvanized mounting brackets, hardware and 6 ft. wire. Packed in standard with every new 2016 LiftMaster Gate Operator. Compatible with LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs. LMREFKIT Retro-Reflective Bracket Hood Replacement kit for LMRRU Monitored Retro-Refl ective Photo Eye. Includes refl ector mounting brackets (10), refl ector with refl ector hoods (10) and mounting hardware. AOMRON Heavy-Duty Retro-Reflective Photo Eye VAC/DC. 24VAC, 110VAC standby/detect current. UL listed to UL 325 standards. NEMA 3, 4, 12 rated. 40 ft. sensing distance. Includes bracket and 3 in. refl ector. REFLECTUNIV Replacement Reflector Universal refl ector. 3 in. round. For use with AOMRON, RETROAB and G50NIR. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A37

234 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Sensing Edge Systems Sensing Edges Gate operators must protect against entrapment while both opening and closing, requiring TWO independent entrapment protection devices for each entrapment zone (inherent system counts as one of those). Only LiftMaster Monitored Photo Eyes or Edge System may be used with LiftMaster Gate Operators to meet the 2016 UL 325 standards. WITHOUT SAFETY EQUIPMENT, THE GATE COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Bulk Edges LMWEKITU Monitored Wireless Edge Kit Low-energy Bluetooth technology is extremely power effi cient and provides two years of battery life with 2 AA lithium batteries. NEMA 4X rated. Multichannel Bluetooth transmission eliminates interference and provides up to 130 ft. range. Low-battery indicator operator alarm will chirp with each activation to signal low battery. Easy to pair transmitter and receiver via smart button. Diagnostics with gate operator speed installation. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Dimensions for receiver and transmitter 6 ¾" H x 2" W x 1 ¾" D. Kit includes (1) receiver and (1) transmitter (LMWETXU), (2) AA lithium batteries, mounting brackets and hardware. Compatible with 2016 LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs. Each 2016 UL 325 LiftMaster Gate Operator accepts up to 1 receiver. Each receiver accepts up to 4 transmitters, and each transmitter accepts up to 2 wired edges for a total system of 8 LiftMaster Monitored Edges. Transmitter features 2 confi gurable edge inputs (open or close). LMWETXU L50 S50 Monitored Wireless Edge Transmitter Allows the addition of more transmitters to your Monitored Wireless Edge Kit LMWEKITU. Provides up to 130 ft. range. Connects to wireless edge receiver using low-energy Bluetooth transmission. Compatible with Monitored Wireless Edge Kit LMWEKITU. Monitored Large Profile Edge 82 ft. Roll Monitored resistive edge sends signal to stop and/or reverse operation when sensing obstructions. Field cut to meet exact application requirements. Fast, easy to install and a cost-effective system; no glue is required. IP65 rated. Mounts vertically or horizontally. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Compatible with Monitored Wireless Edge Kit LMWEKITU, Transmitter LMWETXU and LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs. L50 Monitored Large Profi le Edge requires L50E Monitored Large End Caps and L50CHP PVC Edge Mounting Channel or L50CHAL Aluminum Edge Mounting Channel. Monitored Small Profile Edge 82 ft. Roll Monitored resistive edge sends signal to stop and/or reverse operation when sensing obstructions. Field cut to meet exact application requirements. Fast, easy to install and a cost-effective system; no glue is required. IP65 rated. Mounts vertically or horizontally. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Compatible with Monitored Wireless Edge Kit LMWEKITU, Transmitter LMWETXU and LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs. S50 Monitored Small Profi le Edge requires S50E End Caps Kit and L50CHP Edge Mounting Channel PVC or L50CHAL Edge Mounting Channel Aluminum. ACCESSORIES L50E S50E L50CHP Monitored Large Profile Edge End Caps Kit Compact design allows a reliable and operable safety contact edge assembly within minutes. No glue is required. Compatible with Monitored Large Profi le Edge 82 ft. Roll L50. Kit includes 10 pairs of end caps. Monitored Small Profile Edge End Caps Kit Compact design allows a reliable and operable safety contact edge assembly within minutes. No glue is required. Compatible with Monitored Small Profi le Edge 82 ft. Roll S50. Kit includes 10 pairs of end caps. Edge Mounting Channel PVC PVC mounting channel compatible with Monitored Edges L50 and S50. Pack includes 10 8 ft. PVC mounting channels. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. A38 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

235 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Sensing Edge Systems L50CHAL ETOOL Edge Mounting Channel Aluminum Aluminum mounting channel compatible with Monitored Edges L50 and S50. Pack includes 8 10 ft. aluminum mounting channels. Edge Cutting Tool Fast and easy special tool to cut L50 and S50 edges to specifi c, customized lengths. Pre-Assembled Edges Ready-assembled monitored resistive edge sends signal to stop and/or reverse operation when sensing obstructions. IP65 rated. Mounts vertically or horizontally. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Aluminum channel included. Compatible with LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs, with LMWEKITU Monitored Wireless Edge Kit and with LMWETXU Monitored Wireless Edge Transmitter. L504AL (4 ft.)/l505al (5 ft.)/l506al (6 ft.) Monitored Large Profile Edge 4 ft., 5 ft., 6 ft. Aluminum Channel S504AL (4 ft.)/s505al (5 ft.)/s506al (6 ft.) Monitored Small Profile Edge 4 ft., 5 ft., 6 ft. Aluminum Channel Pre-Assembled Edges Wrap- Around Style 4 ft., 5 ft., 6 ft. Ready-assembled pressure-resistive edge sends signal to stop and/or reverse operation when sensing obstructions. IP65 rated. Mounts vertically or horizontally. Operating temperature: -40 C to 65 C. Compatible with LiftMaster Gate Operators with monitored safety inputs, with LMWEKITU Monitored Wireless Edge Kit and with LMWETXU Monitored Wireless Edge Transmitter. Recommended on slide gates applications only. WR4 (4 ft.)/wr5 (5 ft.)/wr6 (6 ft.) Monitored Wrap-Around Round Edge 4 ft., 5 ft., 6 ft. Wrap-around round edges for 1-5/8 2-3/8 in. for round posts WR4 Monitored Wrap-Around Round Edge 4 ft. WR5 Monitored Wrap-Around Round Edge 5 ft. WR6 Monitored Wrap-Around Round Edge 6 ft. WS4 (4 ft.)/ws5 (5 ft.)/ws6 (6 ft.) Monitored Wrap-Around Square Edge 4 ft., 5 ft., 6 ft. Wrap-around square edges for 2 in. square posts WS4 Monitored Wrap-Around Square Edge 4 ft. WS5 Monitored Wrap-Around Square Edge 5 ft. WS6 Monitored Wrap-Around Square Edge 6 ft. ACCESSORIES A39

236 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Sensing Edge Systems (continued) IMPORTANT NOTES: Use only electric edges on gates. Specify length of edge when ordering (4 ft. minimum). A coil cord or wireless sensing edge connection is required with all edges. The last digit in the model number represents the length of the sensing edge in feet. Specify length of edge when ordering. Lead time may apply for non-standard lengths. Sensing Edges G65MG ft. length, 2-wire electric edge for gates. Sensitized on three sides; requires mounting channel. G65MG ft. length, 2-wire electric edge for gates. Sensitized on three sides; requires mounting channel. G65ME120C5 5 ft. length, mounting channel for all MG020 edges. G65MGR205 5 ft. length, 2-wire electric edge for gate with 2 in. round post. Sensitized on three sides. No mounting channel required. G65MGS205 5 ft. length, 2-wire electric edge for gate with 2 in. square post. Sensitized on three sides. No mounting channel required. ACCESSORIES Edge Connections Sensing edges require a means to connect them to the gate operator. The means must be able to extend and retract as the gate moves. Universal Wireless Transmitter/ Receiver Kit 65-MWRT12 Wireless sensing edge connection without audible alarm. A40 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

237 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators SAFETY ENTRAPMENT DEVICES Emergency Devices Emergency Devices With the rapid growth of gated communities, secured commercial sites and residential gates, many municipalities across the nation have implemented special requirements for the access of emergency vehicles. Before installing any motorized gate operator system, be sure to check with the local fi re department for its guidelines. SOSG8 Emergency Vehicle Access Device Siren Operated Sensor. Power requirements 9 30VAC/ DC with ~.1mA draw. Responds to siren Yelp mode found on all standard sirens. Dual relay closures for use on dual gates. STRBSW STROBESWITCH Emergency Vehicle Detector TOMAR STROBESWITCH. Activated via strobe emitters found on emergency vehicles. Includes 12 24VDC power module. 600 ft. range. Digital frequency discrimination prevents interference. C2EKIT* 12VDC Emergency Vehicle Detector Click2Enter Access Control. Combines the scanner/ receiver technology with control technology to act as a radio-controlled key to open access control devices. Variable activation range. C2EHEATER Optional Heater Pad Heater for Click2Enter. 24VAC. Includes plug-in power supply. Optional heater pad for operation in cold climates below -20 F. To be used with C2EKIT. TEXT Fire Access HERE Boxes IF NEEDED *Requires programming by the installer. ACP17 Fire Access Box with Cable Release Pull the interior T-handle to release the gate chain. Access doors on front and back. Includes a hole for standard or fi re department padlock.** AFB120 Fire Access Box with Micro- Switch All-in-one fi re access box. Hole for standard or fi re department padlock. Interior micro-switch. Knockout for Knox key switch. Standard cylinder lock.** ACCESSORIES **Fire department padlock and Knox key switch not provided. A41

238 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators WARNING DEVICES Audible/Visible Warning Devices Audible/Visible Warning Devices One or more of these devices may be connected to a gate operator with several possible modes of operation: while gate is moving, before gate closes, etc. An auxiliary limit switch or auxiliary contact block may be required to allow for connection to the operator. Please call your LiftMaster Sales Representative at time of ordering to review installation requirements. WARNING: It is strongly recommended that audible/visible warning devices be included in every gate operator installation. REDSTROBE Red Strobe Warning Light 24VAC, 500mA. IP23~. NEMA 1 rated. Gives visible indication when gate is in motion. G50200UH Amber Strobe Warning Light with Siren 110/120VAC. ~2A. Weatherproof. Singletone siren: 87dBA (continuous). Siren G VAC/DC, 90mA. NEMA 4 rated. Dual-tone siren: 90/85dBA (continuous or pulse). TEXT Warning HERE SignIF NEEDED G Warning Sign For placement on or near moving gate, plastic. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A42 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

239 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators DETECTORS Loop Detectors LiftMaster Loop Detectors For exit, interrupt or shadow loop applications. Activates only when a vehicle passes over a loop. Requires a loop embedded in the ground to connect to the detector. LOOPDETLM Plug-In Loop Detector Plug-in connector; no wiring needed. 12VDC/3mA power draw. Fail-safe/exit selectable, fail-safe/fail-secure.1 relay, 1 channel, 4 selectable frequencies. 8 sensitivity levels, plus boost to ensure that vehicles are easily identifi ed. Compatible with CSW24U, CSL24U, RSL12U, RSW12U, LA500DC, LA400DC and LA412DC Gate Operators. Includes diagnostic and test feature. AELD Plug-In Loop Detector Plug-in connector; no wiring needed. 24VAC. Fail-safe, 2 relays, 1 channel, 4 frequencies. 2 sensitivity levels. Includes boost feature that increases sensitivity to detect high-profi le vehicles. Compatible with CSW200, SL3000 and HCT Gate Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED LD7LP Low-Power Fail-Safe Loop Detector Wire terminal block, 10 30VAC/DC. 1 relay, 1 channel. Automatic frequency. Automatic sensitivity levels. <2mA current draw. Low power accessory, compact size. Compatible with LA400DC, LA412DC, RSL12VDC, RSW12VDC and mega operators. ACCESSORIES A43

240 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators DETECTORS Loop Detectors for Outdoor Use Outdoor Enclosure Loop Detectors All loop detectors for outdoor use contain 1 or 2 detectors housed in a watertight and oiltight NEMA 4, 12 rated enclosure. Complete with on-board DIP switches, the connector is prewired to terminal block for easy fi eld connections. Also features selectable failure settings, dual relay, 1 channel, 4 frequency settings and 8 sensitivity levels including a boost feature that increases sensitivity to detect high-profi le vehicles. Outdoor Enclosure Vehicle Loop Detectors (NEMA 4, 12) G VAC, 1 detector. Outdoor Enclosure Vehicle Loop Detectors (NEMA 4, 12) G VAC, 1 detector. Loop Detectors (continued) Loop Detectors All Reno loop detectors feature dual relay, 1 channel, 4 frequency settings and 8 sensitivity levels. Loop Detector A24 External DIP switches. Failsafe, 12 24VDC, 24VAC at 50mA current draw. Manufactured by Reno. Loop Detector A79 Internal DIP switches. Current draw manufactured by Reno. Loop Harness A57 11-pin connector harness. ACCESSORIES Peek-Traffic Loop Detectors All Peek-Traffi c loop detectors come with an 11-pin connector harness, fail-safe features, dual relay, 1 channel, 3 frequency settings, 6 sensitivity levels and external DIP switches. Vehicle Loop Detectors (NEMA 1) G50625S VAC mA max, current draw. Loop Detector G50625S12 12VDC, 57 68mA max, current draw. Vehicle Loop Detectors (NEMA 1) G50625S24 24VAC mA max, current draw. A44 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

241 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators DETECTORS Loop Wire Spools LW1000RED LW500RED Loop Wire Spools 1,000 ft. Red wire. 500 ft. Red wire. Ideal for Installers that prefer to make their own loops. 18-gauge 16/30 Tinned Stranded Copper, XLPE loop wire, UL Style 3173, Temp. 125 C, 600V, 1/32 in. insulated wall, plastic spool. LW1000BLK LW1000BLU 1,000 ft. Blue wire. LW1000BLK 1,000 ft. Black wire. LW500BLU 500 ft. Blue wire. LW500BLK 500 ft. Black wire. Pre-Formed Loop Wire Saw-Cut Loops Pre-Formed Loop Wire No need to make loops with ready-to-install pre-formed loops used with vehicle loop detectors. Multiple sets can be used as interrupt loops, shadow loops, exit loops or entrance loops. Saw-cut loops are used in existing asphalt or concrete driveways. Pave-over loops are used under concrete, asphalt or gravel driveways, before driveway installation. Saw-Cut Pre-Formed Loop G50XNL x 8 ft. with 50 ft. lead length. 18-gauge XLP wire. G50XNL x 12 ft. with 50 ft. lead length. 18-gauge XLP wire. Saw-Cut Pre-Formed Loop PL48S50 4 x 8 ft. with 50 ft. lead length. 16-gauge XLPE in polyethylene jacket. PL612S50 6 x 12 ft. with 50 ft. lead length. 16-gauge XLPE in polyethylene jacket. Pave-Over Loops Pave-Over Pre-Formed Loop G50ENL x 8 ft. 50 ft. lead length. 18-gauge TFFN wire in fl exible PVC conduit. G50ENL x 12 ft. 50 ft. lead length. 18-gauge TFFN wire in fl exible PVC conduit. Pave-Over Pre-Formed Loop PL48P40 4 x 8 ft. with 40 ft. lead length. 14-gauge solid UL 493 direct burial wire. PL612P40 6 x 12 ft. with 40 ft. lead length. 14-gauge solid UL 493 direct burial wire. ACCESSORIES A45

242 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators DETECTORS Sealant Loop Sealant Quart tube, nitrile rubber, fast drying, excellent adhesion to asphalt, concrete or cement. Skins over in 10 minutes and restores traffi c in only 1 hour. Ideal for any weather condition, -60 F to 350 F. Unaffected by chemicals, salts, oils, greases, transmission fl uids, gasoline, rain or snow. Loop Sealant LSBLK Black sealant, one quart. LSGRY Gray sealant, one quart. Sensing Probes Sensing Probes Typically used as a free exit device. As a vehicle approaches the probe, it will trigger the gate to open. Probe can be buried in the ground beside the driveway (not necessary to saw-cut the driveway). CP3 Single-Piece Sensing Probe Low-power accessory, 6 31VAC or 10 40VDC. 150microA (standby), 25 30mA (detect) current draw. Automatic sensitivity. 100 ft. lead length. 1-piece design. GC836LV 2-Piece Sensing Probe Low-power accessory, 12 24VAC/DC, 10 45mA current draw. Adjust via dial, 3 levels of sensitivity. 50 ft. lead length. 2-piece design, dual relay used to operate additional devices such as security lights. ACCESSORIES A46 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

243 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators CONTROL DEVICES 3-Button Control Stations 3-Button Remote Control Stations OPEN/CLOSE/STOP for complete control of gate. May be used on all gate operators. G Button Station Surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. G Button Station Flush mount with stainless steel electrical junction faceplate. Standard 2 x 4 in. stainless steel electrical junction box. NEMA 1 rated. G02403PH Button Horizontal Station Surface mount with polycarbonate enclosure. Legend will display horizontally. Can be mounted either vertically or horizontally. NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 rated. 3-Button Station Surface mount with two-position maintained key control. Die-cast metal enclosure and On/Off key control. Key removable in either position. NEMA 4/12 rated. 2-Button Control Stations 2-Button Control Stations Used to open and close all gate operators. WARNING: This control will not stop the gate. Use another control that has a STOP button in conjunction with this control Button Indoor Surface Mount Station (NEMA 1) Indoor surface mount with steel enclosure. NEMA 1 rated. ACCESSORIES A47

244 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators CONTROL DEVICES 2-Position Key Controls with STOP Button 2-Position Key Controls with STOP Button OPEN/CLOSE, spring return to center (Off). Key removable in center position only. Allows complete control of gate. May be used on all gate operators Key Switch with STOP Button 2-position key control with STOP button. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Surface mount. Die-cast metal enclosure. Tamperproof. Key Switch with STOP Button 2-position key control with STOP button. NEMA 4, 12 rated. Surface mount. Die-cast metal enclosure. Non-tamperproof. Timers 7-Day Timers Used to automatically open and close overhead doors, gates and parking barriers at pre-programmed times. A program is required for each On event and Off event. If a gate operator is programmed to open each Monday at 6 a.m. and close at 10 a.m., two programming events have been scheduled. Timer GC839-S12 50 programs. 12VDC. 33mA current draw. Daylight savings. Battery backup. Timer GC839-S24 50 programs. 24VAC/DC. 24VAC, 24VDC current draw. Daylight savings. Battery backup. Timer G26DGI16 20 programs. 24VAC/DC. 24VAC, 24VDC current draw. Daylight savings. Battery backup. ACCESSORIES A48 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

245 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators OPTIONAL KITS Heater Kits Heater Kit for DC Operators HTR Compatible with CSL24U, CSW24U, RSL12U and RSW12U. HTR, HTRNB, HTR460 Heater Kit for Pad- Mount Operators VAC; automatically detects voltage. Protects systems to -40 F. Installs on gate operator frame. Heater Kit for AC Operators HTRNB Compatible with CSW200, SL3000, SL585 and SL595. All voltages except 460 and volt operator heaters are factory installed. Heater Kit HTR460 Compatible with SL585 and SL volt only. 575 volt operator heaters are factory installed. ACCESSORIES A49

246 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators OPTIONAL KITS TEXT Heater HERE Kits (continued) IF NEEDED Thermostat Control Heater, Plate Maintains a suitable temperature inside a control enclosure for temperatures below 32 F. Available for 115VAC operators only. MA201 Thermostat Control Heater Compatible with MA and MAS. 150W. UN201 Thermostat Control Heater Compatible with MAT and MAST. 500W. Service Kits Service Kits Alternate cover options without the burgundy decal, for gated communities or customers that have aesthetic requirements for their gate operator. Decals indicating operator model number included. Operator Covers Service Kits K CSW24U Cover K RSW12U Cover K Gray Replacement Cover RSW12U, CSL24U, CSW24U (front only) K RSL12U Cover K Gray Replacement Cover RSL12U (front only) K CSL24U Cover ACCESSORIES A50 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

247 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators OPTIONAL KITS Field Kits and Modules Relay Modules This easy-to-integrate module, in combination with the control board, will facilitate the control and operation of external accessories such as solenoid locks or magnetic locks. OMNIEXB Relay Module Capable of switching loads up to 1 Amp. Provides the option to add external accessories such as a solenoid lock or magnetic lock, a 3-button control station and an alarm system. Compatible with SL3000UL, CSW200UL and HCT. Quick-Close Circuit Module Allows a gate to close immediately after a car leaves the interrupt loop. Compatible with SL3000UL. Requires Omni Option Board, model OMNIEXB. Does not look for a close command from the Timer-to-Close or an auxiliary device. QCC Switch Mode A If the gate is closing while a car is over the interrupt loop, the gate will stop and then open. As soon as the car leaves the interrupt loop, the gate will resume closing. QCC Switch Mode B If the gate is closing while a car is over the interrupt loop, the gate will only stop. As soon as the car leaves the interrupt loop, the gate will resume closing. QCCOMNI Long Gate Kit Q160 Adjusts gate travel up to 51 ft. Call your LiftMaster Sales Representative for application information. Compatible with SL3000UL. K1D8387-1CC Expansion Board Additional programming features, external loops, plug-in loops, auxiliary relays and inputs for additional controls and photo eyes. Compatible with all LiftMaster DC Gate Operators. SAMSKIT Sequenced Access Management Includes required relay and limits. Sequenced access between any Mega Arm Operator and any LiftMaster Gate Operator. ACCESSORIES A51

248 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators OPTIONAL KITS TEXT Field Kits HERE and IF Modules NEEDED(continued) MA200 MA230VKIT K1 Relay Output Option Accessory relay for external signaling. Common, N.C. and N.O. contacts. Compatible with Mega Operators. Voltage Conversion Kit Convert from 115VAC to 230VAC operation. Compatible with Mega Operators. Push-to-Open Bracket Allows the gate to swing away from the property. Compatible with LA400 and LA412. MSWIRE12GA6C G SL585LIMIT Dual Gate Wiring Kit Includes 40 ft. of cable. Compatible with RSL12V and RSW12V. Diagonal Support Brace Adds structural support to operator stand. 4 braces included. Compatible with SL585. Long Gate Kit Adjusts gate travel up to 70 ft. Call Technical Support for application information. Compatible with SL585. Auxiliary Contact Block KT ACCESSORIES 71-REDGRN-HCT Red/Green Warning Light Box Signals if door is moving or stationary. Compatible with HCT. G50402 Timer Defeat Hold Open Switch Allows the automatic close timer on the operator to be manually disabled. Compatible with BG770 and BG790. Includes wired terminal block. Drives auxiliary device in 1 direction (OPEN or CLOSE cycle). For both directions, 2 blocks required. Compatible with SL585, SL595. Quick-Release Arm Cap Kit 50-SW4QRR Compatible with SW490. A52 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

249 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators POWER DEVICES Solar Packages 20W7A 20W33A 210W 40W33A 7Ah 12V Solar Kit For RSL12U and RSW12U. 20W 12V panel. Includes one (1) SP10W12V and one (1) K Ah 12V Solar Kit For RSL12U and RSW12. Includes one (1) SP20W12V, one (1) A12330SGLPK, and one (1) K W 24V Solar Kit For CSL24U, CSW24U, LA500 and LA400. Includes two (2) SP10W12V and one (1) K Ah 24V Solar Kit For CSL24U and CSW24U. Includes two (2) SP20W12V, two (2) A12330SGLPK and one (1) K NOTE: Recommended for areas that reach below 32 F/0 C for extended periods of time. See Gate Operator Solar Charts. Solar Panels SP10W12V Solar Panel 10W 12V solar panel. Mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. Compatible with LA400, LA412, LA500DC, RSL12U, RSW12U, CSL24U and CSW24U. 2 panels required for models LA400, LA500, CSL24U and CSW24U. SP20W12V Solar Panel 20W 12V solar panel. Mounting bracket and hardware. 10 ft. of cable. Compatible with LA400, LA412, LA500, RSL12U, RSW12U, CSL24U and CSW24U. Batteries MBAT A12330SGLPK BTYHARN7AH 7Ah 12VDC Battery (Single) Compatible with LA500, LA400, LA412DC, MA, MAT, RSW12U, RSL12U, CSW24U and CSL24U. 33Ah 12VDC Battery (Single) Compatible with LA500, LA400, LA412, RSL12U, RSW12U, CSL24U, CSW24U, MA and MAT. When adding second 33Ah battery to the CSW24U, order additional K tray. 7Ah Battery Harness Compatible with RSL12U and RSW12U. ACCESSORIES A53

250 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators POWER DEVICES Solar Accessories Battery Tray K For CSL24U, when adding second 33Ah batteries. K K Solar Harness Kit For use with 7Ah and 33Ah batteries. Battery Tray For LA500DC 33Ah batteries. For use with LA500CONTXLDC. Surge Suppressors and Power Supply Surge Suppressors Lightning damage from direct hits or nearby strikes can potentially leave sites unsecured or inaccessible. Downtime and repair costs can be prevented or reduced with the use of surge suppression. LiftMaster Gate Operators feature built-in surge suppression. But not all devices used on installations have this feature. SURGELV Surge Suppressor 30V. Screw terminal. Low voltage. 2 pair wire. Voice/Data/Power. ARMP5 Power Supply 120VAC/60Hz input. 12VDC output. 12VA power. 1A current. Compatible with 12VDC devices that have a current draw up to 1A. Example: MG1300. ACCESSORIES A54 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

251 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators BARRIER ARMS AND BARRIER ARM ACCESSORIES Barrier Arms for Mega Arm Operators Aluminum Arms, 12 ft. Arm opening area may vary dependent upon barrier gate operator arm length and distance from curb. See specifi c notes for each arm. MALED12 White aluminum arm with integrated red LED lights. 3 in. round. MA023 White aluminum arm. 12 ft. long x 3 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). MA024 White aluminum arm with yellow-black stripes. 12 ft. long x 3 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). MA024R White aluminum arm with refl ective yellow-black stripes. 12 ft. long x 3 in. round in. (end of cabinet to arm tip). MA024RDOT White aluminum arm with red/white retrorefl ectorized DOT tape. 12 ft. long x 3 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). [Text] Aluminum Arms, 12 ft. with Padding MA025 White aluminum arm with yellow padding. 12 ft. long x 4 in. round. Requires adapter collars model MA031. MA026 Replacement yellow foam padding. 12 ft. long x 4 in. round (2 in. ID). Replacement for model MA025. MA027 Replacement white aluminum arm. 11 ft. long x 2 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Replacement for model MA025. ACCESSORIES A55

252 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators BARRIER ARMS AND BARRIER ARM ACCESSORIES Barrier Arms for Mega Arm Operators (continued) Aluminum Arms, 14 ft. with Padding MA030 MA031 MA028 White aluminum arm with yellow padding. 14 ft. long x 4 in. round. Requires Adaptor Collar model MA031. MA029 Replacement yellow foam padding. 16 ft. long x 4 in. round (2 in. ID). Replacement for model MA028. Replacement white aluminum arm. 13 ft. long x 2 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Replacement for model MA028. Adaptor Collars for padded barrier arms. Set of 2. Aluminum Arms, 17 ft. 15 ft. gate arm requires 22 in. of rear clearance for upswing of counter arm extension. Arm opening area may vary depending upon barrier operator arm length and distance from curb. See specifi c notes for each arm. MALED17 MA115 MA116 White aluminum arm with integrated red LED lights. 3 in. round. Requires Counterweight MALEDCW. White aluminum arm. 17 ft. long x 3 in. round. (14 ft. from end of cabinet to arm tip). Requires Counterweight model MA117. White aluminum arm with yellow and black stripes. 17 ft. long x 3 in. round. 14 ft. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Requires Counterweight model MA117. ACCESSORIES MA116R White aluminum arm with refl ective yellow and black stripes. 17 ft. long x 3 in. round. 14 ft. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Requires Counterweight model MA117. MA116R DOT White aluminum arm with red/white retro-refl ectorized DOT tape. 17 ft. long x 3 in. round. 14 ft. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Requires Counterweight model MA117. A56 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

253 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators BARRIER ARMS AND BARRIER ARM ACCESSORIES Articulating Arm MA034* PVC articulating arm with yellow and black stripes and hardware kit. 9 ft. long x 2.5 in. square. MA035* Replacement PVC arm only with yellow and black stripes. 9 ft. long x 2.5 in. square. Replacement for model MA034. MA024-10* White aluminum articulating arm only with yellow and black stripes. 10 ft. long x 3 in. round. Hardware kit not included, see model MA033. MA033 Hardware kit only for articulating arm. For model MA034 and MA barrier arms. *Arm shipped as single piece. Installer cuts down to meet site requirements. Barrier Arm Accessories for Mega Arm Operators MA117 MALEDCW MAREDLED12 MA900 Counterweight required for all 17 ft. barrier arms. Counterweight for MALED17. Red LED light strip for MALED12, 9.9 ft. length. Yellow and black tape roll 2 in. wide x 36 yards. MAREDLED17 RED LED light strip for MALED17, 13 ft. length. MA021 G50FL12024 SAMSKIT Replacement 5 16 in. nylon arm nuts. Regular, package of 50. MA021A Replacement 5 16 in. nylon arm nuts. Thin, package of VAC/DC fl exible rope light, red. 10 ft. length. Sequenced Access Management functionality between any Mega Arm Operator, SL3000 or CSW200. ACCESSORIES A57

254 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators BARRIER ARMS AND BARRIER ARM ACCESSORIES Barrier Arms for Mega Arm Sprint Operators Barrier Arms for Mega Arm Sprint Operators For use with Mega Arm Sprint/Tower Operators only. Arm opening area may vary dependent upon barrier gate operator arm length and distance from curb. See specifi c notes for each arm. SP8 SP8PAD White aluminum arm with yellow padding. 8 ft. long x 4 in. round. Requires Adaptor Collars model MA031. Replacement yellow foam padding. 8 ft. long x 4 in. round (2 in. ID). Replacement for model SP8. SP8TUBE Replacement white aluminum arm. 8 ft. long x 2 in. round in. (from end of cabinet to arm tip). Replacement for model SP8. MA031 Adaptor Collars for padded barrier arms. Set of 2. Barrier Arms for BG Operators ACCESSORIES G651209P Single-Piece Arms, BG 770 PVC arm with yellow and black stripes. 10 ft. long x 2.5 in. square. Requires Clamp model (G108019). G Wood arm with white and black stripes. 12 ft. long x 0.75 in. wide x in. high (height tapers down). 15ALUMARM White aluminum arm with yellow and black stripes. 15 ft. long x 2.5 in. square. Arm adaptor included. A58 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

255 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators BARRIER ARMS AND BARRIER ARM ACCESSORIES Barrier Arms for BG Operators (continued) Articulating Arms, BG 770 Articulating arms are available by special order. 4-week lead time minimum. G651210P PVC articulating arm with yellow and black stripes and hardware kit. 10 ft. long x 2.5 in. square. Arm shipped as single piece. Installer cuts down to meet site requirements. Requires clamp, see model (G108019). G Wood articulating arm with white and black stripes and hardware kit. 12 ft. L x 0.75 in. W x in. H (height tapers down). G K Hardware kit for wood articulating arm. For model (G651210) barrier arm. Barrier Arm Accessories for BG Operators G651208R MA900 G G Replacement wood wishbone arm for BG790 (white and black stripes). 24 ft. long x 0.75 in. wide x in. high (height tapers down). No counterweight included. Model (G658056) sold separately. (See Parts Catalog.) Yellow and black tape roll. 2 in. wide x 36 yards. White and black tape roll. 3 in. wide x 36 yards. PVC arm mounting clamp. Used with (G651209P) and (G651210P). G50FL12024 G VAC/DC fl exible rope light, red. 10 ft. length, includes clips. Used with all barrier gate operators. Timer Defeat, Hold Open Switch that allows for the auto-close timer to be manually disabled. Long-Distance Control Wiring (24VAC). ACCESSORIES A59

256 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Wheels LiftMaster Elite Series Power Wheels, Solid Steel Continuous-cycle operation and maintenance free. Designed for 1 in. or larger angle tracks. Solid cold-rolled steel. Silver zinc-plated wheels are heat-treated for longer life. AH107 Gold Zinc-Plated V-Groove Power Wheels with Ball Bearings Pair of 4 in. wheels. Gold zinc plating. Can handle gates up to 3,000 lbs. AH110 Gold Zinc-Plated V-Groove Power Wheel with Ball Bearings 6 in. single wheel. Gold zinc plating. Can handle gates up to 5,000 lbs. AH111 Heat-Treated V-Groove Power Wheels with Ball Bearings AH111 Pair of 4 in. wheels. Heat-treated silver zinc plating. Can handle gates up to 3,000 lbs. AH113 Heat-Treated V-Groove Power Wheel with Ball Bearings 6 in. single wheel. Heat-treated silver zinc plating. Can handle gates up to 5,000 lbs. ACCESSORIES UHMW Specifi cally designed for lighter sliding gates. Heavyduty nylon, non-breakable. Designed for 1 in. or larger angle tracks. AH102 UHMV V-Groove Wheel 4 in. single wheel. Heavy-duty nylon, UHMW. Can handle gates up to 750 lbs. Specifi cally designed for lighter sliding gates. A60 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

257 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Hinges LiftMaster Elite Series Power Hinges Engineered to last longer, install easier and provide greater safety than conventional gate hinges. They are designed for industrial, high-traffi c applications with heavy wrought-iron or aluminum gates. Double 5 8 in. ball bearings for smooth operation. ¾ in. solid stainless steel shaft, grounded and tempered to Rockwell standards. Continuous-cycle operation, self-lubricating/no-grease fi ttings. Offers a unique design so the gate never hits the post. POWERHINGE POWERHINGE2 POWERHINGE3 Power Hinge Can handle 3,000 lbs. per pair. Solid coldrolled steel. For use on steel gates with steel mounting posts. Power Hinge 2 Can handle 1,000 lbs. per pair. ½ steel, ½ aluminum. For use on aluminum gates with steel mounting posts. Power Hinge 3 Can handle 1,000 lbs. per pair. Heavy-duty aluminum. For use on aluminum gates with aluminum mounting posts. Miscellaneous Gate Hinges SWG600 Heavy-Duty Bearing Hinge Set Can handle 2,000 lbs. per pair. Steel with high-grade steel needle bearings. Self-aligning bearing case, 1 in. solid bar attachment and Zerk fi ttings. Compatible with 4 x 4 in. post. SWG606 Heavy-Duty Hinge Set for Uphill Swing For uphill swing, high usage or heavy gates. Can handle 2,000 lbs. per pair. Steel with bronze bearings. ½ in. thick weldable steel plates and ¾ in. diameter steel hinge bolt. Up to 15% lift. Wheel Mounting Brackets Single Bracket for 4 in. V-Groove Wheels AH103 For 4 in. wheels. Single bracket, steel, unpainted. Single Bracket for 6 in. V-Groove Wheels AH1036 For 6 in. wheels. Single bracket, steel, unpainted. ACCESSORIES A61

258 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Wheel Covers LiftMaster Wheel Covers Wheel covers guard against pinch points to meet ASTM standards and ensure UL 325 compliance. Wheel covers are manufactured exclusively for use with LiftMaster Elite Series Power Wheels. NOTE: Wheels sold separately. CVRPWST4 Black Painted Steel Cover Fits 4 in. wheels. Comes as a pair of covers, steel, black. CVRPWST6 Black Painted Steel Cover Fits 6 in. wheels, single cover, steel, black. V-Track V-Track Universal Gate Operator Track for use with V-Groove Wheels. VTRACKBLK V-Track 10 ft. V-track, black. Manufactured from 12-gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel. Single-piece design, 90 rounded angle top. 10 ft. length by 4 in. width. Multiple 3 8 in. diameter anchoring holes for ease of installation. TV201 Interlocking Ends 10 ft. V-track, black. Steel construction, 90 angle top. Powder-coated fi nish. 10 ft. length by 4 in. width. Multiple 1/2 in. diameter anchoring holes. TM202 V-Track Mounting Plate Used in asphalt driveways to install TV201 track instead of pouring a concrete pad. Steel top plate welds to bottom of V-track. 10 in. vertical tube. Anchor on vertical tube. Guide Rollers ACCESSORIES Guide Rollers 5 8 in. zinc-plated bolt and nut. Silent operation. Steel roller bearings and steelreinforced roller. GR122-R* GR122-S * AUHM 6 in. roller made of neoprene. 6 in. roller with bracket made of neoprene. 6 in. roller made of UHMW. Comes in black. *Specify black or gray when ordering. A62 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

259 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Jamb-Track Assembly Jamb-Track Assembly A great alternative for jobs where conventional swinging and sliding gates would take up too much valuable space or simply would not work. Allows an overhead gate or door to be lifted as close as 1 in. to the ceiling when fully open. Comes with weldable attachments and bronze attachments; UHMW fully machined rollers for quiet operation. 450 lb. capacity. All assembly models come with both right and left power arm assemblies, 2 track rollers with brackets and 2 kicker rollers with brackets. JTA175-7 For gates that are 6-½ ft. to 7-½ ft. high. JTA175-8 For gates that are 7-½ ft. to 8-½ ft. high. JTA175-9 For gates that are 8-½ ft. to 9-½ ft. high. JTA175-7, JTA175-8, JTA175-9 Replacement Hardware for Jamb-Track Assembly Replacement Track Contents For both right and left tracks. JTR-7 Jamb-Track Replacement For gates that are 6-½ ft. to 7-½ ft. high. JTR-8 Jamb-Track Replacement For gates that are 7-½ ft. to 9-½ ft. high. Replacement Spring Contents Jamb-Track Spring Only, 7 ft. L SA700-7 Jamb-Track Spring Only, 8 ft. L SA700-8 ACCESSORIES A63

260 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Locks Installation Examples MG1300 EMLO1300F* EMLO1300S* Surface Mount LiftMaster Elite Series Maglock 12 or 24VDC. 12VDC at 500mA, 24VDC at 250mA current draw. Holds up to 1,300 lb. Includes 12VDC transformer, pivoting steel armature, mounting plate and hardware. Features junction box with knockouts, and face mount. LiftMaster Elite Series Maglock Face Mount 12 or 24VDC. 12VDC at 500mA, 24VDC at 250mA current draw. Holds up to 1,300 lb. Includes mounting plate and hardware. *Requires separate power supply. 12VDC Transformer model ARMP5 sold separately. LiftMaster Elite Series Maglock Surface Mount 12 or 24VDC. 12VDC at 500mA, 24VDC at 250mA current draw. Holds up to 1,300 lb. Includes mounting plate and hardware. Face Mount GPINLCK Pin Lock Locks gate arm to the gate s mounting bracket. Compatible with LA400DC and LA412DC Operators. SGLOCK12V** Solenoid Lock Compatible only with LiftMaster LA412, RSL and RSW Gate Operators. Holds up to 3,500 lbs. Fail-secure. Use model SGLOCKV25 for operators with code 2.5 and above. TEXT Bulk Pack HERE Chains IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES G #50 Nickel-Plated Chain Pack Nickel-plated. 25 ft. pack. Compatible with SL585, SL595 and VSL D #41 Black Oxide Chain Pack Black oxide. 10 ft. pack. Compatible with RSL12U, SL3000UL, HCT and CSL24U DNP #41 Nickel-Plated Chain Pack Nickel-plated. 10 ft. pack. Compatible with SL3000UL and CSL24U D #40 Black Oxide Chain Black oxide. 10 ft. pack. Compatible with SL3000UL and CSL24U. A64 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

261 ACCESSORIES Gate Operators HARDWARE Mounting Accessories for Gate Operators MPEL MSEL MSLM G Mounting Plate for Post Mounting Compatible with SL3000UL, CSW200UL, CSL, CSW and RSW. Multiple post mounting options: 3 in. round on the outside 3 in. round on the inside 4 in. square welded on the inside Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad Stand height: 7.5 in. Plate: 17.5 x 16.5 in. Compatible with CSL and SL3000. Steel Stand for Mounting to Concrete Pad or Post Mounting Removable top plate for post mounting (square post welded on the inside). Stand height: 9 in. Compatible with RSL. Post Mount Kit For post mounting a gate operator. 4 U-bolts and hardware for 3 in. pipe. Compatible with SL585 and SL595. Mounting Accessories for Control Boxes Post mounting kit for LA400DC or LA412DC standard or XL metal control boxes. Kit includes 2 U-bolts and hardware For 6 in. round post For 4 in. round post For 2.5 in. round post. Miscellaneous Hardware ASRI Rubber Safety Bumper 5 ft., for use on slide gates. ACCESSORIES A65

262 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems REMOTE CONTROLS Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls Remote Controls featuring narrow-band multi-frequency (310/315/390 MHz) Rolling Code Technology. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Radio Receivers. 892LT 2-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to two LiftMaster Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Operators or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. 894LT 4-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to four LiftMaster Gate Operators, Garage Door Openers, Commercial Operators and/or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 and Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Encrypted DIP Remote Controls Compatible with Security+ 2.0 LiftMaster Commercial Operators, Gate Operators and Commercial Receivers. 811LM* 1-Button Remote Control Extreme-range 1-button encrypted DIP switch remote control. Ideal for applications like gated communities or commercial applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Easy to code, 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. 813LM* 3-Button Remote Control Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch remote control. Red/Green/Yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for commercial door operators. Easy to code, 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. *Not compatible with LiftMaster Security+2.0 Residential Garage Door Openers Security+ Remote Controls ACCESSORIES 373LM 3-Button Remote Control Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and/or Gate Operators. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. 371LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 315 MHz Rolling Code Technology. 971LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Garage Door Openers with orange or red learn buttons or gray antennas. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 390 MHz Rolling Code Technology. A66 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

263 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems REMOTE CONTROLS AND WIRELESS KEYPADS DIP Remote Controls Multi-Code Remote Control 361LM/61LM 1-Button Remote Control 1-Button remote control, easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 315 MHz (361LM)/390 MHz (61LM). 333LM/33LM Tri-Colored 3-Button Remote Control 3-Button remote control. Red, yellow and green buttons for easy identifi cation. Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions. Easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 315 MHz (333LM)/390 MHz (33LM). 300MC 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Multi-Code code format.* 300 MHz frequency. Not LiftMaster compatible. 418 MHz Remote Controls DT MHz Remote Control 1-button decodable remote control. 418 MHz frequency for use with Dial Code or ICON 26 Series. Security+ 2.0 Commercial Wireless Keypads KPW250 Wireless Keypad Weathertight. Features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. Provides additional compatibility with Security+ and Linear Multi-Code, the perfect wireless keypad to keep on your truck for almost all of your applications. 250 code capacity. Zinc-alloy metal front cover. KPW5 Wireless Keypad Weathertight. Features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost-effective solution in smaller applications. 5- code capacity, highimpact, polycarbonate front cover. ACCESSORIES 4/16 Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC A67

264 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems RECEIVERS Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Receivers STAR LM 860LM Commercial Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow-band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver virtually eliminates radio interference. Program up to 1,000 remote controls either individually or block learn with Passport Lite. Large keypad and LCD screen for quick and easy programming. Duplicate memory module included for programming additional receivers or data backup. Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Designed for outdoor environments. Includes 9 in. antenna. Universal Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow-band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. Eliminates Customer callbacks due to poor range performance. 3 channels providing large capacity: channel 1 (50 remote controls); channel 2 (20 remote controls); channel 3 (20 remote controls). Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Weather-Resistant Universal Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow-band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. 3 channels providing large capacity: channel 1 (50 remote controls); channel 2 (20 remote controls); channel 3 (20 remote controls). Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Weather-resistant, suitable for mounting outdoors. Security+ Commercial and Gated Community Receivers 312HM Universal Coaxial Commercial Receiver Two memory settings: high security mode holds up to 15 Security+ 315 MHz remote controls; normal security mode holds up to 31 Security+ 315 MHz or DIP switch remote controls. 12VDC or 35VAC/DC, jumper selectable. 2-piece aluminum case with detachable cover. Compatible with Security+ 315 MHz Rolling Code Technology and DIP switch Remote Controls. 412HM Universal Coaxial Commercial Receiver Two memory settings: high security mode holds up to 15 Security+ 390 MHz remote controls, normal security mode holds up to 31 Security+ 390 MHz or DIP switch remote controls. 12VDC or 35VAC/DC, jumper selectable. 2-piece aluminum case with detachable cover. Compatible with Security+ 390 MHz Rolling Code Technology, 390 MHz billion-code technology and DIP switch Remote Controls. ACCESSORIES A68 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

265 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems ACCESSORIES A69

266 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems PASSPORT CREDENTIALED RADIO CONTROL SOLUTIONS TEXT Security+ HERE 2.0 IF Passport NEEDEDSolution Passport Credentialed Solution Passport with Security+ 2.0 delivers enhanced radio range with virtually no interference and provides credential management through simplifi ed, menu-driven programming. This allows for a more effective method of managing entrances within a gated community, parking facility or commercial environment. Property managers no longer have to manage several different remote controls for the main gate, tenant gate, pool, clubhouse and parking entrances. Residential and commercial property management is now simplifi ed with an innovative remote control solution that integrates with access control systems. Security+ 2.0 Passport Receiver PPWR Passport Receiver Fully compatible with LiftMaster Access Control Systems, as well as third-party access systems supporting standard 26-bit, 30-bit, 34-bit and 50-bit Wiegand protocol. It features two operational modes: Pass-Through (default) and Advanced. Pass-Through mode automatically passes the defi ned Wiegand information on to the access control solution. Advanced Mode provides an additional layer of security in areas where other remote controls may be operating. The receiver only passes signals from a remote control with a previously programmed facility code. All other signals are blocked. Ideal for residential and commercial properties that require a higher level of security with an access control system. ACCESSORIES TEXT HERE IF NEEDED SPECIFICATIONS: Receiver: 12 30mA Standby, 250mA Power Mini Remote Control: 3 Volts (one 2032 Lithium Battery) Visor Remote Control: 3 Volts (one 2032 Lithium Battery) LEDs Receiver: Power, Noise, Data Transmission, Valid Message, Access Granted Receiver: Security+ 2.0 only (310, 315, 390 MHz Tri-Band) Frequency Remote Control Passport Lite: Security+ 2.0 only (310, 315, 390 MHz Tri-Band) Remote Control Passport MAX: Security+ 2.0 (310, 315, 390 MHz Tri-Band) and Security+ (315MHz or 390MHz) (Receiver in Accordance with FCC Part 15) Buffer Receiver: 12,000 Rolling Code Users (FIFO) Memory Receiver: Non-Volatile Temperature Range Receiver: (-40 F to % Rh) (-40 C to % Rh) Remote Control: -40 F to 185 F (-40 C to 85 C) Output Receiver: 26,30,31,34 (even or odd) and 50 bit Wiegand code formats Wire/Distance Receiver: 5 Wire Shielded/1,000 Feet Enclosure Receiver: Weather-Resistant NEMA 3 Rated Dimensions Receiver: 4-3/16 in. W x 6-1/8 in. H x 1-5/8 in. D A70 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

267 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems PASSPORT CREDENTIALED RADIO CONTROL SOLUTIONS Passport MAX Remote Controls Passport Lite Remote Controls 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Remote Control PPK3M Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button keychain remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Mini Keychain Remote Control SP-PPK3M-100 Same as the PPK3M, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control PPK3PHM Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button keychain remote control has an added HID Prox transponder for use with card readers. Programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control SP-PPK3PHM-100 Same as the PPK3PHM, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control PPV3M Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button visor remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Visor Remote Control SP-PPV3M-100 Same as the PPV3M, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Mini Keychain Remote Control PPLK1-10/PPLK1-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button keychain remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 only and is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Mini Keychain Remote Control SP-PPLK1-100 Same as the PPLK1, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control PPLK1PH-10/PPLK1PH-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button keychain remote control has an added proximity sensor for use with card readers and programs to Security+ 2.0 only. It is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control SP-PPLK1PH-100 Same as the PPLK1PH, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Visor Remote Control PPLV1-10/PPLV1-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button visor remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 only and is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Visor Remote Control SP-PPLV1-100 Same as the PPLV1, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available in quantities of 100 only. Each box contains 100 individual poly-bagged Passport Remote Controls. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. Approximately 2-week lead time. A71 ACCESSORIES

268 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems CARD READERS HID iclass SE Readers HID iclass SE Readers Next generation access control solutions for increased security, adaptability and enhanced performance. Supports HID iclass cards. Ideal for new and existing iclass installations for increased safety and performance. Subject to 4 week vendor lead time. iclass SE R40 DL91105 Contactless Smart Card Reader, designed to mount and cover single-gang switch boxes MHz card compatibility. Dimensions: 3.3 in x 4.8 in x 1.0 in. iclass SE R10 Mini Mullion DL91106 Contactless Smart Card Reader MHz card compatibility, Wiegand Controller Communications. Small version suited for mullion-mounted door installations. Dimensions: 1.9 in x 4.1 in x 0.9 in. iclass SE R15 Mullion Mount DL91109 Contactless Smart Card Reader MHz card compatibility. Small version suited for mullion-mounted door installations. Dimensions: 1.9 in x 6.0 in x 0.9 in. HID Multiclass SE Readers HID Multiclass SE Readers Next generation access control solutions for increased security, adaptability and enhanced performance supports multiple technologies including iclass SE and iclass. Subject to 4 week vendor lead time. Multiclass SE RP10 Mini Mullion DL91112 Powerful, secure and adaptable contactless smart Card Reader, compatible with iclass SE and HID Prox technologies. Dimensions: 4.8 in x 10.3 in x 2.3 cm. Multiclass SE RP15 Mullion Mount DL91113 Multi-technology card reader designed for customers upgrading their current card system from some of the most popular proximity format to iclass credentials. The RP15 reader allows Customers to transition to smart cards over time while incorporating the use of multiple card technologies within a single building or across multiple facilities. Dimensions: 6.1 in x 1.9 in x 0.9 in. ACCESSORIES Multiclass RP40 Wall Switch DL91114 Multi-technology card reader designed for customers upgrading their current card system from HID Prox to iclass credentials. With the RP40 multiclass, the Customer has the ability to transition to smart cards over time while incorporating the use of multiple card technologies within a single building or across multiple facilities and enhanced security through mutual authentication and data encryption. Dimensions: 3.3 in x 4.8 in x 1.0 in. Multiclass RPK40 DL91115 The iclass RPK40 is a multi-technology card reader with keypad designed for Customers upgrading their current card system from HID Prox to iclass credentials. With the iclass RPK40, the Customer has the ability to transition to smart cards over time while incorporating the use of multiple card technologies within a single building or across multiple facilities. With the iclass RPK40, you get enhanced security through mutual authentication and data encryption. A72 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

269 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems CARD READERS HID Prox Readers HID Prox Readers Low cost, entry level security supports HID Prox cards. Subject to 4 week vendor lead time. MiniProx 5365 SNARHIDMINI MiniProx reader s potted electronics and slim design are ideal for indoor or outdoor mounting. 125 MHz. Dimensions: 6 x 1.7 x 1 in. Thin Line II 5395 SNARHIDTHIN MiniProx reader housed in a two-piece weatherproof secure potted enclosure. 125 MHz. Dimensions: 4.7 x 3 x 6.8 in. ProxPoint Plus 6005 SNARHIDPOINT Combines multiple confi gurations at an economical price. Ideal for indoor and outdoor applications. 125 MHz. Dimensions: 3.7 x 1.72 x 0.66 in. ProxPro with Keypad 5355 SNARHIDPRO Ideal for applications requiring a longer read range. 125 MHz. Dimensions: 5 x 5 x 1 in. ACCESSORIES A73

270 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems CARD READERS TEXT Stand-Alone HERE IF Proximity NEEDEDCard Reader PPLX PPLX Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader 50,000 user capacity. Programmable output relay (N.O./N.C.). Multiple Wiegand protocols (legacy 26-bit industry standard, Passport). Latch mode to hold the door or gate open. Timed Anti-Passback Logic. Programmable as Stand-Alone or Wiegand Pass-Through. KPR2000 Wired Keypad and Proximity Reader 2,000 user capacity (card, PIN, card and PIN). Standalone or Pass-Through operation. Supports HID 26- and 30-bit Wiegand proximity card formats. Multicolored LED status display and backlit keypad. PPLX Components PPRP Radio Programmer for PPLX Handheld programmer for use with Passport Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader. PPCSC Proximity Card (Clamshell) Passport proximity card. (Shipped in sleeves of 50). PS12D2A Power Supply 12VDC 2.0A Power supply for Passport Stand-Alone Proximity Card Reader. ACCESSORIES A74 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

271 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems CREDENTIALED CARDS HID TEXT Prox HERE Credentials IF NEEDED HID Prox Credentials Low cost entry level, compatible with HID Prox Readers. Subject to 4 week vendor lead time. SNACPH32 Proximity Card HID 30-bit proximity card, facility code 2. Proximity Card SNACPH39 HID 30-bit proximity card, facility code 9. SNACPKH32 Proximity Key HID 30-bit proximity key, facility code 2. Prox 1346 ProxKey III DL91201 Pocket-size key fob. Prox 1386 ISOProx Card (Imageable) DL91203 Proximity card technology with photo identifi cation capability. Prox 1326 ProxCard II Clamshell Card DL91205 Industry choice for a cost-effective solution to proximity access control. HID iclass SE Credentials HID iclass SE Credentials For use with HID iclass SE Readers, the highest level of security. Subject to 4 week vendor lead time. iclass SE Key II Contactless Smart Key DL91204 High frequency credential delivers same level of security as smart card. iclass SE Contactless Smart Card DL91206 SIO-enabled smart card credential for iclass MIFARE and DESfi re. ACCESSORIES iclass SE Clamshell Contactless Smart Card DL91207 Ideal for SE installations in harsh environments and can be used for a range of diverse applications. A75

272 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems IPAC ACCESSORIES TEXT IPAC Accessories HERE IF NEEDED IPACRTR Retrofit Trim Ring Makes installation easy when replacing both fl ush mount Infi nity L and ICON26 models. SNARHIDPOINT HID ProxPoint Plus Mini Proximity Reader Provides multiple confi guration options and is both sleek and inconspicuous. IPACKEY Keypad For customers needing multiple keypad options, IPAC accommodates an external keypad. IPACPLB Postal Lock Box Meets postal requirements while offering fl exibility for right- or left-side installation. IPACCAMK Camera Kit High-performing camera is perfect for applications requiring visual installations. ACCESSORIES A76 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

273 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems EL2000 ACCESSORIES EL2000 TEXT HERE Accessories IF NEEDED EL2000DVRCAMKT WOMODKT DVR Compatible Low-Lux Color Camera Kit Optional color low-lux camera, compatible with DVR. EL25/EL2000 Wiegand Module Supports two Wiegand-compatible remote control access devices. HIDWOKPRO ELHTRKT Combo Keypad/Card Reader Wiegand Output 125 khz wall switch keypad proximity reader. Sealed for indoor or outdoor use. EL2000 LCD Display Heater Allows the EL2000 LCD display to maintain normal operation to approximately -20 F. EL2000SSTKN Trim Kit Narrow This trim kit is compatible with model EL2000SS only. It includes a bezel, housing, mounting brackets and hardware. Retrofi ts to Dialcode, Infi nity S/M. EL2000SSTKW Trim Kit Wide This trim kit is compatible with model EL2000SS only. It includes a bezel, housing, mounting brackets and hardware. Retrofi ts to Infi nity L and ICON26. EL2000SSPKT Pedestal Mounting Kit The pedestal mounting kit allows you to mount an EL2000SS onto a standard or 2 x 2 in. gooseneck pedestal. Kit includes stainless steel mounting plates with gaskets, mounting nut plate and hardware. ACCESSORIES A77

274 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems EL25 ACCESSORIES EL25 Accessories EL25DVRCAMKT DVR-Compatible Low-Lux Color Camera Kit Optional color low-lux camera, compatible with DVR. WOMODKT EL25/EL2000 Wiegand Module Supports two Wiegand-compatible remote control access devices. HIDWOKPRO Combo Keypad/Card Reader Wiegand Output 125 khz wall switch keypad proximity reader. Sealed for indoor or outdoor use. ACCESSORIES A78 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

275 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems STANDARD PEDESTALS Mounting Posts Pedestals Faceplate with universal hole pattern to fi t almost any access device. Black powder-coated fi nish, ensuring no chipping or fading. 2 x 2 in. square post. Each neck is bent with a 6 in. center radius. Mounting hardware included for all pad mount models. PED42 Gooseneck Pedestal 42 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. PED64 Gooseneck Pedestal 64 in. Height In-ground mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. PED4272 Dual Gooseneck Pedestal 42 in. and 72 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipes, 11-gauge steel. PED72 Gooseneck Pedestal 72 in. Height Pad mount, 2 x 2 in. square pipe, 11-gauge steel. Miscellaneous Pedestals 142A0271 Trim Plate 4 x 4 in. Plate for pedestal cover, powdercoat fi nish, black. Decorative trim piece for face plate, powder-coated fi nish, black. GC813 Pedestal 68 in. Height In-ground mount, threaded 3 x 3 in. square post with 1-½ in. pipe, black 11-gauge steel. ACCESSORIES A79

276 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems SURGE SUPPRESSORS AND PROTECTION Surge Suppressors and Protection Surge Suppressors Lightning damage from direct hits or nearby strikes can potentially leave sites unsecured or inaccessible. Downtime and repair costs can be prevented or replaced with the use of surge suppression. LiftMaster Gate Operators feature built-in surge suppression. But not all devices used on installations have this feature. SURGE240V SURGELV Surge Suppressor 240VAC. Wired, high voltage, single phase. Diagnostics LED. Surge Suppressor 30V, screw terminal, low voltage, 2 pair wire. Voice/Data/Power. Surge Protection LVSS Surge Protector for Power Transformer Surge protector, 12VAC (low voltage). R4SS Surge Protector Surge Protector for RS485. 2,000 Amp protection. SNATSURGE Telephone Line Surge Suppressor For added protection to the phone line inputs during low-voltage storm surges. ACCESSORIES A80 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

277 ACCESSORIES Access Control Systems TRANSFORMERS AND ANTENNAS Transformers 85LM* Optional Universal Radio Control Plug-In AC Transformer Power input level: VAC. Plug-in jack for easy installation. 95LM* Optional Transformer 110VAC input, 22VDC output. 2-wire connection. *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. Antennas 86LM/86LMT Antenna Extension Kits Antenna Extension Kit, 15 ft. 86LM* For use with 312HM, 412HM, STAR1000, 860LM, and 850LM when remote operation is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 15 ft. of cable. Antenna Extension Kit, 25 ft. 86LMT* For use with 312HM, 412HM, STAR1000, 860LM and 850LM when remote additional remote range is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 25 ft. of cable. *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. Power Supply 12VDC, 2 Amp power supply. PS12D2A ACCESSORIES A81

278 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls MyQ ACCESSORIES 828LM Internet Gateway Easily add smartphone control to MyQ-enabled products from LiftMaster. Compatible only with MyQ-enabled Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and MyQ Accessories. Use a tablet, PC or the free MyQ smartphone App to monitor door status, receive door activity alerts and operate doors, gates and lights. Simple user-friendly installation. 888LM MyQ Control Panel Provides the MyQ Technology upgrade to LiftMaster garage door openers manufactured after 1998 that have safety photo eyes, enabling monitoring and control with a tablet, PC or smartphone with the free MyQ App. Also provides the upgrade needed to utilize Security The MyQ Control Panel is equipped with the Timer-to- Close and Motion Detection features. Motion Detection activates the Garage Door Opener lights. Lock button locks out remote controls for added security. 821LM MyQ Garage Easily add MyQ smartphone control to most other major brand garage door openers that have safety photo eyes. Control up to two garage door openers (requires extra door sensor, sold separately). Add MyQ light control accessories for even greater home control. 823LM Remote Light Switch Control lights remotely. Replace existing light switches to control lights* in your garage, yard or inside your home with your smartphone and free MyQ app or with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Requires a LiftMaster Wi-Fi Garage Door Opener, Internet Gateway (828LM) or a MyQ Garage (821LM) for smartphone control. (*Supports single pole lights.) 825LM Remote Light Control Control lamps with your smartphone and free MyQ app or with your Garage Door Opener remote control. Simply plug into an outlet and plug a lamp into the Remote Light Control. Requires a LiftMaster Wi-Fi Garage Door Opener, Internet Gateway (828LM) or a MyQ Garage (821LM) for smartphone control. 829LM Door and Gate Monitor Monitor and close up to four garage doors or gates from any room inside your house. Green and red LED lights indicate whether the garage door or gate is open or closed. Volume controlled audible alert lets you know when the garage door or gate is being opened. Compatible only with LiftMaster Wi-Fi or MyQ-enabled Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance A82 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

279 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls SECURITY+ 2.0 REMOTE CONTROLS Remote Controls and Keypads featuring narrow-band multi-frequency (310/315/390 MHz), Rolling Code Technology. MAX models are compatible with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and Radio Receivers manufactured since January MAX 3-Button Remote Control Powerful multi-door remote control. Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators or MyQ Accessories. Compatible with all Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators manufactured by LiftMaster since January MAX 3-Button Mini Remote Control Fits in a purse, in a pocket or on a keychain. Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators or MyQ Accessories. Compatible with all Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators manufactured by LiftMaster since January TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 893LM 891LM 375UT* 3-Button Remote Control Controls up to three Garage Door, Gate Operators, Commercial Door Operators or MyQ Accessories. Features only Security+ 2.0 Rolling Code Technology. 1-Button Standard Remote Control Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator, Commercial Door Operator or MyQ Accessory. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 2-Button Universal Remote Control Program up to two different brands of garage door openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 374UT* 2-Button Mini Universal Remote Control Sleek, small design is perfect for key rings, purses and backpacks. Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 892LT 2-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to two LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0, Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. 894LT 4-Button Learning Remote Control Controls up to four LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators or MyQ Accessories. Each button operates independently. Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 2.0, Security+ and can clone any LiftMaster DIP switch technology. ACCESSORIES * See Radio Compatibility Chart on page A86. A83

280 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls SECURITY+ 2.0 COMMERCIAL AND GATED COMMUNITY RADIO CONTROLS 811LM 1-Button Remote Control Extreme range 1-button encrypted DIP switch Remote Control. Compatible with Security+ 2.0 LiftMaster Commercial Operators, Gate Operators and Commercial Receivers. Ideal for applications like gated communities or commercial applications requiring a large number of remote controls for a common entrance. Easy to code,12- position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. 813LM 3-Button Remote Control Extreme range 3-button encrypted DIP switch Remote Control. Compatible with Security+ 2.0 LiftMaster Commercial Operators, Gate Operators and Commercial Receivers. Red/green/yellow on buttons designed to be programmed for OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functionality for Commercial Door Operators. Easy to code, 12-position DIP switch offers up to 4,096 codes. Security+ 2.0 Commercial and Gated Community Receivers 850LM 860LM STAR1000 Universal Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. Eliminates customer callbacks due to poor range performance. 3 channels providing large capacity: channel 1 (50 remote controls); channel 2 (20 remote controls); channel 3 (20 remote controls). Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Weather-Resistant Universal Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. 3 channels: channel 1 (50 remote controls); channel 2 (20 remote controls); channel 3 (20 remote controls). Compatible with all Security+ 2.0 Remote Controls. Commercial Access Control Receiver Security+ 2.0 narrow band multi-frequency 310/315/390 MHz receiver that virtually eliminates radio interference. Program up to 1,000 remote controls individually or block learn with Passport Lite. Duplicate memory module may be removed for programming additional receivers or safe storage for backup. Designed for outdoor environments. TEXT Security+ HERE Commercial IF NEEDEDand Gated Community Receivers ACCESSORIES 312HM Universal Coaxial Commercial Receiver Two memory settings: high security mode holds up to 15 Security+ 315 MHz remote controls; normal security mode holds up to 31 Security+ 315 MHz or DIP switch remote controls. 12VDC or 35VAC/DC, jumper selectable. 2-piece aluminum case with detachable cover. Compatible with Security+ 315 MHz Rolling Code Technology and DIP switch Remote Controls. 412HM Universal Coaxial Commercial Receiver Two memory settings: high security mode holds up to 15 Security+ 390 MHz remote controls, normal security mode holds up to 31 Security+ 390 MHz or DIP Switch remote controls. 12VDC or 35VAC/DC, jumper selectable. 2-piece aluminum case with detachable cover. Compatible with Security+ 390 MHz Rolling Code Technology, 390 MHz billion code technology and DIP switch Remote Controls. A84 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

281 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls SECURITY+ REMOTE CONTROLS Security+ Remote Controls 361LM/61LM 1-Button Remote Control 1-Button remote control, easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 315 MHz (361LM)/390 MHz (61LM). 371LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 315 MHz Rolling Code Technology. 971LM 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Garage Door Openers with orange or red learn buttons or gray antennas. Program a single Garage Door Opener, Gate Operator or Commercial Door Operator. Compatible with Security+ 390 MHz Rolling Code Technology. 333LM/33LM Tri-Colored 3-Button Remote Control 3-Button remote control, red, yellow and green buttons for easy identifi cation. Accommodates commercial door operators requiring OPEN/CLOSE/STOP functions. Easy code selection. 9-position trinary DIP switches with 19,683 changeable codes per channel. Red LED indicates battery strength and signals sent transmissions. 315 MHz (333LM)/390 MHz (33LM). 373LM 3-Button Remote Control Controls up to three LiftMaster Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and/or Gate Operators. Compatible with 315 MHz Security+ Rolling Code Technology. TEXT Multi-Code HERE IF Remote NEEDED Control 418MHz Remote Control 300MC 1-Button Remote Control Compatible with Multi-Code format. 300 MHz frequency. Not LiftMaster compatible. DT MHz Remote Control 1-Button decodable remote control, 418 MHz frequency for use with Dial Code or ICON26 Series. ACCESSORIES Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC A85

282 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls PASSPORT CREDENTIALED RADIO CONTROL SOLUTIONS TEXT Security+ HERE 2.0 IF Passport NEEDEDSolution Passport Credentialed Solution Passport with Security+ 2.0 delivers enhanced radio range with virtually no interference and provides credential management through simplifi ed, menu-driven programming. This allows for a more effective method of managing entrances within a gated community, parking facility or commercial environment. Property managers no longer have to manage several different remote controls for the main gate, tenant gate, pool, club house and parking entrances. Residential and commercial property management is now simplifi ed with an innovative remote control solution that integrates with access control systems. Security+ 2.0 Passport Receiver PPWR Passport Receiver Fully compatible with LiftMaster Access Control Systems, as well as third-party access systems supporting standard 26-bit, 30-bit, 34-bit and 50-bit Wiegand protocol. It features two operational modes: Pass-Through (default) and Advanced. Pass-Through mode automatically passes the defi ned Wiegand information on to the access control solution. Advanced Mode provides an additional layer of security in areas where other remote controls may be operating. The receiver only passes signals from a remote control with a previously programmed facility code. All other signals are blocked. Ideal for residential and commercial properties that require a higher level of security with an access control system. ACCESSORIES TEXT HERE IF NEEDED SPECIFICATIONS: Receiver: 30 ma Stand by, 250ma Power Mini Remote Control: 3 Volts (One 2032 Lithium Battery) Visor Remote Control: 3 Volts (One 2032 Lithium Battery) LEDs Receiver: Power, Noise, Data Transmission, Valid Message, Access Granted Receiver: Security+2.0 only (310, 315, 390MHz Tri-Band) Frequency Remote Control Passport Lite: Security+2.0 only (310, 315, 390MHz Tri-Band) Remote Control Passport MAX: Security+2.0 (310, 315, 390MHz Tri-Band) and Security+ (315MHz or 390MHz) (Receiver in Accordance with FCC Part 15) Buffer Receiver: 12,000 Rolling Code Users (FIFO) Memory Receiver: Non-Volatile Temperature Range Receiver: (-40 F to % Rh) (-40 C to % Rh) Remote Control: -40 F to 185 F (-40 C to 85 C) Output Receiver: 26,30,31,34 (even or odd) and 50 bit Wiegand code formats Wire/Distance Receiver: 5 Wire Shielded/1,000 Feet Enclosure Receiver: Weather-Resistant NEMA 3 Rated Dimensions Receiver: 4-3/16 in. W x 6-1/8 in. H x 1-5/8 in. D A86 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

283 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls PASSPORT CREDENTIALED RADIO CONTROL SOLUTIONS Passport MAX Remote Controls Passport Lite Remote Controls 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Remote Control PPK3M Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button keychain remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Mini Keychain Remote Control SP-PPK3M-100 Same as the PPK3M, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 3-Button Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control PPK3PHM Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button keychain remote control has an added proximity sensor for use with card readers. Programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control SP-PPK3PHM-100 Same as the PPK3PHM, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED 3-Button Passport MAX Visor Remote Control PPV3M Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems. This 3-button visor remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 and Security+ Technology, also making it ideal for use with LiftMaster Garage Door Openers and MyQ Light Accessories. 3-Button Customized Passport MAX Visor Remote Control SP-PPV3M-100 Same as the PPV3M, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Mini Keychain Remote Control PPLK1-10/PPLK1-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button keychain remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 only and is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Mini Keychain Remote Control SP-PPLK1-100 Same as the PPLK1, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control PPLK1PH-10/PPLK1PH-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button keychain remote control has an added proximity sensor for use with card readers and programs to Security+ 2.0 only. It is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Mini Keychain Proximity Remote Control SP-PPLK1PH-100 Same as the PPLK1PH, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. 1-Button Passport Lite Visor Remote Control PPLV1-10/PPLV1-100 Compatible with the Passport Receiver (PPWR) for use with Access Control Systems and the Commercial Access Control Receiver (STAR1000). This 1-button visor remote control programs to Security+ 2.0 only and is not compatible with LiftMaster Residential Garage Door Openers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 10 and Button Customized Passport Lite Visor Remote Control SP-PPLV1-100 Same as the PPLV1, but available with specifi c facility code and identifi cation numbers. Available bulk packaged in boxes of 100 only. Specify facility code and identifi cation numbers at the time of order. 2-week lead time. ACCESSORIES A87

284 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls WIRELESS KEYLESS ENTRY Wireless Keyless Entries 877MAX 877LM 377LM Wireless Keyless Entry Open or close the garage door instantly with a private 4-digit code. Program temporary access codes for visitors or delivery and service personnel. One-buttonto-close feature works with all LiftMaster Garage Door Openers manufactured since Compatible with all Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators and Gate Operators manufactured by LiftMaster since January Wireless Keyless Entry Features only LiftMaster Security Open or close your door or gate operator instantly with a private 4-digit code. Program temporary access codes for visitors or delivery and service personnel. Mounts outside garage for convenient access. Wireless Keyless Entry Compatible with LiftMaster Security+ 315 MHz Garage Door Openers, Commercial Door Operators, Gate Operators and Radio Control Receivers. Temporary password option. Program code directly from keypad. Universal Remote Control and Wireless Keyless Entry 375UT 374UT* 387LM 2-Button Universal Remote Control Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. 2-Button Mini Universal Remote Control Sleek, small design is perfect for key rings, purses and backpacks. Program up to two different brands of Garage Door Openers. Compatible with most major brands of Garage Door Openers, Gate Operators and Commercial Door Operators. Universal Wireless Keyless Entry Compatible with most major brands of garage door openers and gate operators. Open or close the garage door without using a remote control or key. Users can also program a temporary code for friends and service people. Completely wireless installation. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED RADIO COMPATIBILITY CHART Manufacturer/ Code Format LiftMaster Security+ 2.0 Rolling Code LiftMaster Security+ Rolling Code LiftMaster Billion Code LiftMaster DIP Switch (7, 8 & 9 pos.)* Genie Intellicode Rolling Code Genie DIP Switch (9 and 12 pos.)* ACCESSORIES Frequency 310/315/390 MHz 315 or 390 MHz 390 MHz 390 MHz 315 or 390 MHz 390 MHz Manufacturer/ Code Format Multi-Code Linear MegaCode Moore-O-Matic DIP Switch (8 pos.) (Delta3 )* Stanley SecureCode Rolling Code Stanley DIP Switch (10 pos.)* Wayne-Dalton Frequency 300 MHz 318 MHz 310 MHz 310 MHz 310 MHz 37 MHz LiftMaster is a trademark of The Chamberlain Group. Intellicode is a trademark of Genie Company. Multi-Code, MegaCode and Delta3 are trademarks of Linear Corporation. Stanley SecureCode is a trademark of The Stanley Works. *2-Button Mini Universal Remote (374UT) does not support DIP technology. NOTE: Chart applicable to the 375LM Universal Remote Control Multi-Code is a registered trademark of Nortek Security & Control LLC A88 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

285 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls COMMERCIAL OPERATOR AND GATE RECEIVER ACCESSORIES Radio Control Accessories 86LM* 86LMT* EXT-ANT* Remote Control Antenna Mounting Kit For use with models 312HM, 412HM, 850LM, 860LM and STAR1000 when remote operation is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 15 ft. of cable. Antenna Extension Kit For use with models 312HM, 412HM, 850LM, 860LM and STAR1000 when remote operation is needed. Kit contains antenna bracket and 25 ft. of cable. Medium-Duty External Antenna Kit Allows antenna to be mounted outside of the Medium- Duty electrical box, when needing additional radio range. Kit includes 13 in. brass antenna and 6 in. BNC connector. *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES NOTE: Indicate door width and height when ordering. A89

286 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls WIRELESS COMMERCIAL KEYPADS Security+ 2.0 Commercial Wireless Keypads Wireless controls are used to supplement hardwired, pushbutton and key control stations. Wireless controls cannot be used in place of hardwired controls. Multi-Code is a registered trademark of the Linear Corporation. KPW250 Wireless Commercial Keypad Weathertight, features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. Provides additional compatibility to Security+ and Linear Multi-Code, the perfect wireless keypad to keep on your truck for almost all of your applications. 250 code capacity. Zinc-alloy metal front cover. KPW5 Wireless Commercial Keypad Weathertight, features Security+ 2.0 with NEMA 4X (water protection requirements) sealed electronics for reliable outdoor use. The KPW5 is an ideal, cost-effective solution in smaller applications. 5 code capacity. High-impact polycarbonate front cover. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES A90 For more information, please contact your LiftMaster Sales Representative. To place an order, visit Dealer.LiftMaster.com or contact Customer Care at

287 ACCESSORIES Radio Controls TRANSFORMERS Transformers 85LM* Optional Universal Radio Control Plug-In AC Transformer Power input level: AC. Plug-in jack for easy installation. 95LM* Optional Transformer 110VAC input, 22VDC output. 2-wire connection. 100MAPS External Power Supply** Provides enough power to operate two LC-36A Light Curtains. Includes 38 ft. cable leads. *Radio Control and Accessory Discount applies. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED **Required for use with LiftMaster Medium-Duty Commercial Door Operators. Available as an extra power source for use with LiftMaster Logic 3, 4 and 5.0 Operators. TEXT HERE IF NEEDED ACCESSORIES NOTE: Indicate door width and height when ordering. A91